SERVICE MANUAL MODEL 7050 THIRD EDITION APRIL 1997 CODE# CSM-7050
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 1/290
SERVICE MANUAL
MODEL
7050
THIRD EDITION
APRIL 1997
CODE# CSM-7050
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 2/290
7050SERVICE MANUAL
THIRD EDITION
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 3/290
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperiencedperson servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of damage to the equipment, Konica Business Technolo-gies strongly recommends that all servicing be per-formed by Konica-trained service technicians only.
Changes may have been made to this equipment toimprove its performance after this service manual wasprinted. Accordingly, Konica Business Technologies,Inc., makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, that the information contained inthis service manual is complete or accurate. It is under-stood that the user of this manual must assume all risksor personal injury and/or damage to the equipment whileservicing the equipment for which this service manualis intended.
© 1999, KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
Corporate Publications Department
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 4/290
iii
CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTSREVISION HISTORY ................................................... vii
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................. ix
SAFETY CIRCUITS...................................................... xi
OPERATION
See table of contents in operation section
MAIN BODYOUTLINE AND COMPOSITION .................................2-1
IMAGE READ MECHANISM ......................................2-2
Outline ..................................................................2-2
IMAGE PROCESSING ...............................................2-3
Outline ..................................................................2-3
Analog Processing ................................................2-3
A/D Conversion .....................................................2-3
Shading Correction ...............................................2-3
Brightness/Density Conversion ............................. 2-4
AES Processing ....................................................2-4
Text/Halftone Dot Identification.............................2-4
Filtering .................................................................2-4
Magnification Processing ......................................2-5
Reversal Processing .............................................2-6
Copy γ Correction .................................................2-6
SGU Selector ........................................................2-6
Write Density Control ............................................2-6
Error Dispersion Processing .................................2-6
Image Compression Processing ...........................2-6
Memory .................................................................2-6
Two-Beam Control ............................................... 2-6
IMAGE WRITE ........................................................... 2-7
Outline ................................................................. 2-7
Collimator Lens ................................................... 2-8
Beam Combining Prism ...................................... 2-8
Compression Prism ............................................. 2-8
Fine Adjustment Prism......................................... 2-8
Polygon Mirror ..................................................... 2-8
fθ Lens ................................................................. 2-8
Cylindrical Lenses ............................................... 2-9
Index Sensor ....................................................... 2-9
IMAGE FORMATION ............................................... 2-10
Charging ............................................................ 2-10
Exposure ........................................................... 2-10
Developing ........................................................ 2-10
Transfer ............................................................. 2-10
Separation ......................................................... 2-11
Cleaning ............................................................ 2-11
PCL .................................................................... 2-11
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................... 2-13
System Configuration ........................................ 2-13
Outline of the System ......................................... 2-14
SPACE REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 2-15
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ................................ 2-16
CENTER CROSS-SECTION ................................... 2-18
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM .................................... 2-19
Main Drive ......................................................... 2-19
Drum/Developing Drive Unit ............................. 2-20
Paper Feed Drive Unit ....................................... 2-21ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive Unit ........... 2-22
ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive Unit ......... 2-23
1000 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit .......... 2-24
1500 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit .......... 2-25
EXTERNALS ........................................................... 2-26
Composition ...................................................... 2-26
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-26
DRIVE UNIT ............................................................ 2-29
Composition ...................................................... 2-29
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-29
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-29
M1 (Main) Control .............................................. 2-31
M4 (Drum) Control ............................................. 2-32
READ SECTION ...................................................... 2-33
Composition ...................................................... 2-33
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-33
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-33
M12 (Optics Drive) Control ................................ 2-39
Exposure Control ............................................... 2-43
Original Read Control ....................................... 2-44
APS Control ....................................................... 2-44
AES Control ....................................................... 2-46
WRITE UNIT ............................................................ 2-47
Composition ...................................................... 2-47
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-47
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-48
M5 (Polygon) Control ........................................ 2-51
Image Write Control ........................................... 2-52
DRUM UNIT ............................................................ 2-55
Composition ...................................................... 2-55
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-55
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-56
PCL/PSL Control ............................................... 2-59
Separation Claw Control ................................... 2-59
Paper Guide Plate Control ................................ 2-60
CORONA UNIT SECTION....................................... 2-61
Composition ...................................................... 2-61
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-61
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-62
Transfer/Separation Corona Maintenance ........ 2-65
Charge Control .................................................. 2-66
Transfer/Separation Control .............................. 2-66
M7 (Charge Wire Cleaning) Control ................. 2-67
M8 (Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning)
Control ............................................................. 2-68
Revised 3/9
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 5/290
iv
DEVELOPING UNIT ................................................ 2-69
Composition ...................................................... 2-69
Mechanism ........................................................ 2-69
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-70
M3 (Developing Drive) Control ......................... 2-72
M35 (Agitator Screw) Control ............................ 2-73
Developing Bias Control ................................... 2-73
Toner Density Control ....................................... 2-74
Dmax Control/Drum Jam Control ...................... 2-75
Gray Scale Correction Control .......................... 2-76
FM30 (Developing Suction) Control .................. 2-77
TONER SUPPLY UNIT ............................................ 2-78
Composition ...................................................... 2-78
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-78
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-79
Toner Level Detection Control .......................... 2-80
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT ..................... 2-81
Composition ...................................................... 2-81
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-81Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-81
PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................. 2-84
Composition ...................................................... 2-84
Mechanisms ...................................................... 2-84
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 2-86
Paper Feed Control ........................................... 2-93
Paper Up/Down Control .................................... 2-95
Paper Size Detection Control ............................ 2-96
No Paper Detection Control .............................. 2-97
LCT 1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE
SECTION..................................................................2-98
Composition ........................................................2-98Mechanisms ........................................................2-98
Disassembly and Reassembly ............................2-99
1000 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection
Control.............................................................2-101
LCT-1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE
SECTION................................................................2-102
Composition ......................................................2-102
Mechanisms ......................................................2-102
Disassembly and Reassembly ..........................2-103
1500 Tray Paper Feed/No Paper Detection
Control.............................................................2-104
LCT PAPER TRAY .................................................2-106
Composition ......................................................2-106
Mechanisms ......................................................2-106
Disassembly and Reassembly ..........................2-107
Tray Up/Down Control ......................................2-110
ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION .......2-111
Composition ......................................................2-111
Mechanisms ......................................................2-111
Disassembly and Reassembly ..........................2-112
Selector Guide ..................................................2-112
M152 (ADU Cooling Fan) Control .....................2-113
ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION......2-114
Composition ......................................................2-114
Mechanisms ......................................................2-114
Disassembly and Assembly ..............................2-116
Paper Feed/Reversal Control ...........................2-116
Conveyance Control .........................................2-118
ADU Mis-centering Detection Control ...............2-119
CONVEYANCE SECTION......................................2-120
Composition ......................................................2-120
Mechanisms ......................................................2-120
Disassembly and Reassembly ..........................2-121
FM14 (Conveyance Suction) Control ................2-122
FUSING UNIT .........................................................2-123
Composition ......................................................2-123
Mechanisms ......................................................2-123
Disassembly and Reassembly ..........................2-124
Fusing Temperature Control .............................2-133
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROL...............................2-134Parts Through Which Current Flows When the
Main Switch is Turned OFF.............................2-134
Parts That Operate When the Main Switch is
Turned ON ......................................................2-134
Cooling Fan Control ..........................................2-135
Operation Panel Control ...................................2-137
Counter Control .................................................2-139
Option Control ...................................................2-140
DIAGRAMSELECTRICAL PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING ...............3-1
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ...........................3-4OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................3-7
CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................3-23
OPERATION BOARD/1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...........3-35
OPERATION BOARD/2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...........3-36
OPERATION BOARD/3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...........3-37
DC DRIVER BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...............3-38
TONER CONTROL SENSOR BOARD CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ...............................................................3-45
TRANSFER PAPER DETECTING BOARD
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ................................................3-46
TRANSFER PAPER LED BOARD CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ...............................................................3-47
DRUM BOARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ........................3-47
TIMING CHARTTIMING CHART ..........................................................4-1
ADU TIMING CHART .................................................4-2
JAM LISTPaper Jam ................................................................. 5-1
FS-103/FS Cross-Reference Table........................... 5-7
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 6/290
v
CONTENTS
Polygon Motor Low Speed Rotation Timing...... 7-17
Functions When Auto Button is Pressed or
Original is Placed in ADF ............................ 7-18
Switching Auto/Manual Priority ......................... 7-18
ATS Selection .................................................... 7-18
11x17 Double Count Setting ............................. 7-18
Setting Paper Size for Trays 2, 3, and 4 ............ 7-19
FS-103 Sub-tray Select (Printer)........................ 7-19FS-103 Original Count Over Control ................. 7-19
Message Language Selection .......................... 7-20
Priority of the Paper Size.................................... 7-20
Jumping Selection of the Paper Size ................ 7-20
FS-102/103 Overload Control Select................. 7-20
Setting Intermittent Time for Running Test ....... 7-21
ADF Frame Erase Selection .............................. 7-21
PM Cycle Setting ................................................ 7-21
Finisher Initial Mode Setting .............................. 7-21
Clearing Fusing Failures .................................. 7-21
Auto Reset Setting ............................................. 7-21
Key Counter Operation Selection ...................... 7-22
Switching the Contents of Normal/High ............ 7-22
ADF Mode Lead Edge Erasure Setting ............. 7-22
Toner Level Detecting Selection ....................... 7-22
Master Key Code Setting ................................... 7-22
Original Image Shift Setting............................... 7-23
Switching Longitudinal Line Paper/Transversal
Line Paper ........................................................7-23
25 Mode Address Map ........................................7-24
36 MODE ..................................................................7-29
Setting Method ....................................................7-29
Running Test Mode .............................................7-29
Adjusting Lead Edge Timing ...............................7-30
Paper Feeding Loop Adjustment ........................7-30
Lead-to-Trail Magnification Adjustment ..............7-31
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment ............................7-31
Electronic RDH Type Lead Edge Timing
Adjustment ........................................................7-32
Original Lead Edge Erasure Adjustment.............7-32
Optical Brake Adjustment ...................................7-33
Centering Adjustment .........................................7-33
Writing Unit Adjustment for One-Sided.............. 7-34
ADU Adjustment for Rear Side.......................... 7-34
Adjustment on Original Image for One-Sided ... 7-35
Alternate Method of Adjustment: 36 Mode,
Address 80........................................................7-35
List of 36 Mode ...................................................7-3635 MODE ..................................................................7-37
Setting Method .................................................. 7-37
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment .......................... 7-37
List of Mode 35 .................................................. 7-38
Test Patterns of 35 Mode ................................... 7-39
Overall Halftone (35-01) ............................. 7-39
Gray Scale Pattern (35-02) ......................... 7-40
Gray Scale Pattern (35-03) ......................... 7-41
Gray Scale Pattern (35-05) ......................... 7-42
Beam Misalignment Check (35-11) ............ 7-43
Warning ..................................................................... 5-8
Trouble .............................................................. 5-10
LIST OF CONNECTOR DISCONNECTIONS .......... 5-16
Paper Jamming ................................................. 5-16
Warning ............................................................. 5-16
Warning ............................................................. 5-17
Others ................................................................ 5-18
ADJUSTMENTHOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT MANUAL............6-1
ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS...........6-1
SETTING AND CHECKING WITH THE P
FUNCTION ...............................................................6-3
List of Confirmation Item by Means of the
P Function ...........................................................6-3
Confirmation of the PM Count and Resetting ......6-3
Setting the Density Shift ........................................6-4
Confirmation of the Drum Count and Resetting . 6-4
Service Data Control Operation Mode Access .... 6-4
Function to Control Data ...................................... 6-5
DIAGNOSTICS47 MODE AND MULTI MODE ....................................7-1
Method of Setting the 47 Mode............................ 7-1
Initializing the NVRAM......................................... 7-2
Charge Corona Current Adjustment ................... 7-3
Transfer Current Adjustment ............................... 7-3
Separation (AC) Current Adjustment ................... 7-3
Separation (DC) Current Adjustment .................. 7-3
Charge Grid Voltage Adjustment......................... 7-4
Developing Bias Adjustment ............................... 7-4
Test Pattern Density Adjustment ......................... 7-5
Initial Setting ........................................................ 7-5
Adjustment Mode List .......................................... 7-5
L Detection Adjustment ....................................... 7-6
Telephone Number Setting ................................. 7-6
Input Check List ................................................... 7-7
Output Check List ................................................ 7-9
Adjustment Mode List ........................................ 7-12
47 Mode Input/Output List for FS-103................ 7-14
25 MODE ................................................................. 7-15
Selection Method ............................................... 7-15
ECM ................................................................... 7-15
Copy Control/Service Control Mode Enable ..... 7-15
Data Control Function Select ............................ 7-15Pre-heat Mode Temperature Selection ............. 7-16
Pre-heat Mode Shut Off Time ............................ 7-16
Selection of Fusing Control During Auto Shut
Off .....................................................................7-16
Setting of Auto Shut Off and Auto Pre-heat
Timing ..............................................................7-16
Selecting Outside Erasing the Original ...............7-17
Auto Outside Erasing the Original.......................7-17
Selecting Preliminary Rotation of Polygon
Motor .................................................................7-17
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 7/290
vi
Linearity Evaluation Pattern (35-16)........... 7-44
Process Overall Halftone (35-60) ............... 7-45
Read Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-30).... 7-46
Copy γ Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-32) . 7-47
Write Gate Array Built-in Pattern (35-36) .... 7-48
Electronic RDH GA Built-in Pattern
(35-37) ........................................................ 7-49Writing Unit for Centering (35-80, P+1) ........7-50
ADU for Centering (35-80, P+2) ...................7-51
Front Edge Timing (Printer) (35-80, P+3)..... 7-52
Printer Type Horizontal Magnification (Main
Drive Speed Adjustment ) (35-80, P+4) .......7-53
Main Scanning Sub-scanning Alignment
(35-80, P+5) ...............................................7-54
Adjustment of Gradation (LD1)
(35-80, P+6) ...............................................7-55
Adjustment of Gradation (LD2)
(35-80, P+7) ...............................................7-56
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS .......................................... 7-57
Adjustment for One-Sided ................................. 7-57Tray Tilt Adjustment ........................................... 7-59
SERVICESERVICE SCHEDULE ...............................................8-1
Service Schedule ..................................................8-1
Maintenance Items ................................................8-2
Periodic Check (Main Body) .................................8-7
Periodic Check (I) (RADF [DF-306]) .....................8-9
Periodic Check (I) (FNS [FS-102]) ........................8-9
Regular Service FNS (FS-103) ...........................8-10
SERVICE MATERIALS .............................................8-10
SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .............................................8-11
INSTALLATIONINSTALLATION ..........................................................9-1
Site Requirements ................................................9-1
Unpacking .............................................................9-1
Accessories ..........................................................9-2
Installation Procedure ...........................................9-3
L-Detection Adjustment .........................................9-8
Paper Size Setting ................................................9-9
Confirmation of Operation ...................................9-12
INDEX
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 8/290
vii
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 9/290
viii
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 10/290
ix
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 11/290
x
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 12/290
xi
SAFETY CIRCUITSThe electrical circuit of this machine contains the following
safety circuits to prevent an accident from occurring in the
event of an abnormality.
• Overall safety circuit protector
• Exposure lamp (L1) overheating protection circuit
• Fusing heater lamps (L2, L4) overheating protection
circuit
These safety circuits are described below to provide the
service engineer with a renewed awareness of them in order
to prevent servicing errors that may impair their function.
Overall Safety Circuit Protector
Protection function provided by softwareWhen the L1 CONT signal output from the protection
function control board (CB) by software becomes [L], L1
lights. At the same time, the L1 FB signal, which indicates
that L1 is lit, is output from DCPS2 to the CB.
The CB monitors both the L1 CONT and L1 FB signals.
If they differ from each other, main relay (RL1) will be
turned OFF, and power to L1 will be cut off.
CAUTION: The function of RL1 must not be de-
activated under any circumstances.
Protection function using hardware timer circuit(HT)
If L1 remains lit for more than prescribed time because of
some abnormality, the hardware timer on DCPS2 will
operate, forcibly cutting off the relay on this board.
CAUTION: The function of relay must not be de-
activated under any circumstances.
Protection function using optics temperature fuse(f1)
If the temperature in the vicinity of f1 rises above
prescribed temperature f1 will blow, cutting off the flow
of current to L1.CAUTION: Do not under any circumstances use a
piece of wire, etc., In place of f1.
Exposure Lamp (L1) OverheatingProtection Circuit
Protection function provided by the circuit breaker
(CBR)This function breaks the AC line instantaneously in the
event that an excessive current flows due to a short
between the AC line, for example.
CAUTION: The function of the CBR must not be de-
activated under any circumstances
whatever.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 13/290
xii
Fusing Heater Lamp (L2, L4) OverheatingProtection Circuit
Protection function provided by softwareThis function turns OFF fusing heater lamp 1 (L2), fusing
heater lamp 2 (L4) and main relay (RL1) in the event that
the output voltage from fusing temperature sensor 1 (TH1)
read the CPU is abnormal.
CAUTION: Periodically check the contact face of
TH1 with respect to the roller, and replace
TH1 if it is abnormal.
The function of RL1 must not be de-
activated under any circumstances.
Protection function provided by hardware circuitThis function uses a comparator circuit which compares
the output voltage of fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2
(TH1 and TH2) with the abnormal judgment reference
value. It disconnects L2, L4 and RL1 from the circuit in
the event that the output voltage of TH1 or TH2 exceeds
the reference value.
CAUTION: Periodically check the contact face of TH1,
TH2 with respect to the roller, and replace
TH1, TH2 if it is abnormal.
The function of RL1 must not be de-
activated under any circumstances.
Protection function provided by the upper thermostat(TS1) and lower thermostat (TS2)
This function turns OFF TS1 or TS2, directly cutting off the
power to L2, L3 and L4, if the temperature of the either
upper fusing roller or lower fusing roller exceeds the
specified value.
CAUTION: Do not substitute a different electrical
conductor in place of TS1 or TS2.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 14/290
xiii
The caution labels are attached to the machine areas, as shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any
dangerous situations or serious injury.
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE
CAUTION:
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution labelto keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled, clean the label.If you cannot make it legible or if the caution label is removed, please contact your Service
Centre.
CAUTIONVORSICHTATTENTION
HIGHHEISSETEMPERATURE
TEMPERATUREINNENFLACHEN ELEVEE
HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION.VORSICHT HOCHSPANNUNG.
ATTENTION HAUTE TENTION.
This portion is internally very hot.
Do not touch it, lest you should get burnt.
CAUTION:
ATTENTIONHaute temperaturerisque de brülure.
Soyez prudent en retirant
une feuille coincée.
VORSICHTHohe temperaturenKönnen verbrennungen verursachen.
Bitte vorsicht bei antfernen
von papierstau.
CAUTIONHigh temperaturecan cause burns.
Take care when
removing jam.
High Temperature !Température élevée !Heiße Oberfläche !
DO NOT TOUCHUse care when clearing paper.
Risque de brülure.Soyez prudent en retirant la feuille coincée.
Brandverletzungsgefahr.Bei Beseitigung von Papierstaus vorsichtigvorgehen.
CAUTION/ATTENTION/VORSICHT
This portion is
internally very hot.
Do not touch it, lest
you should get burnt.
CAUTION:
This portion has a high
voltage generated.
Never touch it, lest you
should be electrically
shocked.
CAUTION:
This portion is
internally very hot.Do not touch it, lest
you should get burnt.
CAUTION:
The ADU guide plate is not
latched. Do not release it,
lest you may cause injury.
CAUTION:
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 15/290
OPERATION
1-1
OPERATIONSUser's Reference Guide Availability
7050 User's Reference Guides may be ordered from the EastCoast Parts Distribution Center using standard ordering pro-
cedures.
7050 User's Reference Guide OP-01-7050
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 16/290
1-2
This page left blank intentionally.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 17/290
MAIN BODY
2-1
OUTLINE AND COMPOSITION
In a digital copier, the light reflected from the original is converted into electrical signals, subjected to image processing, then
converted back into light and directed onto the drum.
Figure 1 shows the composition of the machine, and Figure 2 an outline of the digital copying process.
Figure 1
Electrical signalImage read Image processingOriginal
Optical data Electrical signal
Image write
Optical data
PCL ChargingDeveloping
Cleaning
Fusing
Separation <- Transfer corona
Figure 2
Polygon mirror
Developing unitPCL
Image processing unit
Fusing unit
Cleaningunit
Separationcorona unit
Transfercorona unit
OPC drum
PSL
Charging corona unit
Image read unit
Image write unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 18/290
2-2
IMAGE READ MECHANISM
OutlineA halogen lamp is used as the light source. The light from the
lamp is directed onto the original.
The light reflected off the original is reflected by the 1st, 2nd and
3rd mirrors shown in Figure 3. Then, it is passed through the
lens and directed onto the CCD image sensor.
The CCD image sensor consists of 5000 pixels. One pixel is
7 µm in length, and the length on the original that can be read
by one pixel is 63.5 µm.
Light source (halogen lamp) 2nd mirror
3rd mirrorLens1st mirror
CCD image sensor
Figure 3
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 19/290
MAIN BODY
2-3
IMAGE PROCESSING
OutlineThe analog signal produced by the CCD sensor on the A/D
board is subjected to analog processing, then A/D-converted,
and subjected to image processing.
Image processing consists of shading correction, brightness/
density conversion, AES processing, text/dot pattern
judgement, filter/magnification change processing, copy γ
correction, write density correction, and 2-beam control. Inaddition, error dispersion processing and data compression
are carried out within the electronic RDH.
Analog ProcessingIn the analog processing unit, the minute signals from the CCD
sensor are amplified and level-shifted into the A/D conversion
range.
Amplification and level-shifting are done automatically during
shading correction timing by an electronic variable resistor.
There is no need for any manual adjustment.
A/D ConversionThe image signals from the analog processing unit are con-
verted one pixel at a time into 9-bit digital signals.
Shading CorrectionShading correction evens out the light distribution of the CCD
sensor. The following correction takes place at the specified
timing.
White CorrectionThe voltage output from each pixel of the CCD sensor
when the white reference plate is exposed to the light from
the exposure lamp is memorized as the maximum output
value for that pixel.
Black Correction
The output voltage from each pixel of the CCD sensorwhen the exposure lamp is out is memorized as the
minimum output voltage for that pixel.
• Based on the difference between the white and black
data for each pixel memorized in 1 and 2 above, the
calculated result that indicates the number of the step
corresponding to the image data read from the original
is output to an accuracy of 10 bits.
CCD imagesensor
A/Dconversion
A/D board
Shading correction Copy γ correction
Selector SGUWrite density
control2-beam control
Data compressionand expansion
Image writeError dispersion
processing
Electronic RDH
Memory
Figure 4
Figure 5
Image processing board
Brightness/densityconversion,AES processing,Text/dot pattern
judgement, filter/ magnification
processingreversalprocessing
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 20/290
2-4
Figure 7
Brightness/Density ConversionThe signal resulting from shading correction corresponds to
the light reflected off the original, hence it is referred to as a
brightness signal. The brightness/density conversion section
converts the brightness signal into a density signal, as shown
below.
AES ProcessingA density that is suitable for the density of the original is
automatically selected by AES processing, and a suitable
copy made.
AES Sampling RangePlaten mode: 176 mm x original length
Brightness
e n s
y
176 mm
Figure 6
ADF mode (1-1): 176 mm x 28 mm
176 mm
ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2): 176 mm x 210 mm
28mm
176 mm
210mm
Figure 8
Figure 9
Text/Dot Pattern IdentificationIn order to copy an original under the optimum conditions , the
text/dot pattern identification section judges whether the read
is text, dot pattern, or a photograph, and uses the results in the
subsequent filtering section.
FilteringThe appropriate filtering takes place according to the kind of
original and the selected magnification.
• Text filter: highlights the light and dark parts of the
original.
• Dot pattern filter: reduces moire.
• Photograph filter: improves the gray scale reproduc-
tion.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 21/290
MAIN BODY
2-5
Magnification ProcessingIn an analog machine, the lead-to-trail magnification is changed
by changing the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and
front-to-rear magnification by changing the position of the
lens. In this machine, the lead-to-trail magnification is changed
by changing the scanning speed of the exposure unit, and the
front-to-rear magnification by means of electrical image
processing.The read unit of the CCD (63.5 µm) and the write unit of the
laser (63.5 µm) are equal to each other, and remain unchanged
when the copy image is enlarged or reduced in the vertical
direction. As a result, write data that corresponds exactly to the
write position when the image is enlarged or reduced in the
vertical direction sometimes fails to exist.
Front-to-Rear Magnification Change ProcessingDuring Enlargement
As shown in the example of Figure 10, if the pixel data
obtained when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D5,
the positions of the read data when the image is enlarged
are E1 to E5.. However, the following problems will occur
if the write data consists of this read data alone.
• There will be a gap between one data and the next,
resulting in gaps in the image.
• The data position and write position will not coincide
exactly.
Consequently, if the read data that corresponds exactly to
the write position fails to exist, as indicated by the dotted
lines of Figure 10, the write density is determined as shown
below.
Fig.10
Original read position
Write position
Data position whenimage is enlarged
Front-to-Rear Magnification Change ProcessingDuring ReductionAs shown in the example of Figure 11, if the pixel data obtained
when the original is read by the CCD is D1 to D5, the positions
of the read data when the image is reduced overlap each other
as indicated by R1to R5, hence the write positions fail to
coincide with the read positions. Therefore, the write density
is determined as shown below.
Position
Figure 12
D e n s i t y
E2 – E1
16
Density CorrectionFigure 11 is a graph the vertical axis of which represents
density (256 steps) and the horizontal axis of which represents
position: Here, the distance between E2 and E1 of Figure 10
is set out on the horizontal axis and divided into 16 steps. If the
position with respect to write data W2 is “ ”, the density S can
be obtained using the following equation.
S = E1 + ( ) x
Figure 11
Original read position
Data position when theimage is reduced
Write position
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 22/290
2-6
Reversal ProcessingThis function reverses the input brightness data in order to
reverse black and white when the reverse copy mode is
selected.
Copy γ γ CorrectionThe copy γ correction function selects the density curve
corresponding to the density selected by the density button on
the operation panel. The selected density curve is applied to
the data that was subjected to filter/magnification change
processing.
Suitable density curves are provided for the text, photo, and
text and photo modes.
Selector, SGUSelector is a function that switches between the image signal
from the electronic RDH, and the read time image processed
signal.
SGU is a function that generates various test patterns .
Write Density ControlThe write density control function converts image data to the
optimum laser exposure based on the characteristics related
to the drum like drum potential, toner density, etc.
Image Compression Processing This processing function stores compressed image data in
the memory to enable a large quantity of image data to be
stored when electronic RDH is used.
Memory The memory can hold about seventy 8.5x11 size originals
consisting of average word processor text. The number of
pages will be less than this if the originals include many
photographs and halftone dot images. Expansion memory
units MU-101 and MU-102 are available as options.
Two-beam controlThis function is used to adjust the timing of the laser data from
the two beams and also to detect and correct any deviation
between the two beams.
Laser exposure level
C o p y d e n s
i t y
Figure 13
Error Diffussion ProcessingError diffusion processing is intended to make efficient use of
the installed image memory and also to obtain a satisfactory
copy image.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 23/290
MAIN BODY
2-7
IMAGE WRITE
OutlineFigure 14 shows the layout of the various parts of the write unit.
The processed image data is emitted by semiconductor lasers.
The light from these lasers is sent via the path shown in Figure
15 to the OPC drum.
fθ lens unit
V mirror unit
CY1 lens
Beam combining prism
Fine adjustment prism 2
Collimator lens unit 2
Semiconductor laser LD2
Fine adjustmentprism 1
Polygon mirror
CY2 lens
Figure 14
Semiconductor laser 1(LD1)
Semiconductor laser 2(LD2)
Beam combiningprism
Figure 15
Index mirror Index sensor
OPC drum3rd mirror
Cylindrical lens 2(Cy2)
Cylindrical lens 1 (cy1) Polygon mirror
Fine adjustment prism2 (main scanning)
Fine adjustment prism1 (sub scanning)
Compression prism 1 Compression prism 2
Collimator lens unit 1 Collimator lens unit 2
3rd mirror
Stepping motor
Semiconductor laser LD1
Glass cover
Index mirror
fθ lensunit
Index sensor
V mirrorunit
Compression prism 2
Collimator lens unit 1
Compression prism 1
3rd mirror 2nd mirror
1st mirror
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 24/290
2-8
Collimator LensFigure 16 shows the function of the collimator lens. This lens
is used to form the light that diverges from a point source into
a parallel beam.
Beam Combining PrismThis prism causes the beams from the two semiconductor
lasers that are mounted at right angles to each other to be
emitted in the same direction.
Compression PrismThis prism shapes the beam emitted from each semiconductor
laser and adjusts the height in the up/down direction.
Fine Adjustment PrismThis prism performs fine adjustment of the beam emitted from
each semiconductor laser in the left/right and up/down
directions.
Collimatorlens
Semiconductorlaser
Parallelbeam
Figure 16
Semiconductor laser 1
Beam combining prism
Semiconductor laser 2
Fig.17
Polygon MirrorThis is a multi-sided mirror which converts the laser beam into
a scanning beam. The polygon mirror in this machine has
eight sides. Figure 18 shows the appearance of the polygon
mirror.
fθθ LensThe polygon mirror rotates at a constant angular speed.
Consequently, if a general image forming lens were to be used,
the speed at which the laser beam scans the surface of the
drum would vary between the center and the edge of the drum,as shown in Figure 19.
An fθ lens is used to maintain the scanning speed constant
over the entire length of the drum.
Figure 20
Polygonmirror
Cylindricallens
Drum;Scanningspeed isconstant.
Polygonmirror
Figure 19
Drum;Scanningspeed falls asbeamapproachescenter ofdrum.Image forming lens
Laser beam
Laser beam
fθ lens
Figure 18
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 25/290
MAIN BODY
2-9
Cylindrical LensesTwo lenses, cylindrical lens 1 (Cy1) and cylindrical lens 2
(Cy1), are used to eliminate the tilt error of the polygon mirror.
Cylindrical lenses 1 and 2 are positioned before and after the
polygon mirror, as shown in Figure 21. The laser beam is
focused on the polygon mirror by cylindrical lens 1, and the
light reflected off the polygon mirror is once again focused on
the drum by cylindrical lens 2.The optical relationship between the polygon mirror and the
drum face with respect to cylindrical lens 2 is that of image and
object. Consequently, even if the polygon mirror is tilted, the
light path is corrected by cylindrical lens 2, ensuring that the
beam is scanned along the same line.
Index Sensor
This sensor is intended to determine the leading edge writeposition for each scan in the axial direction of the drum, and
also to determine the positions of the two beams.
Figure 21
Cylindrical lens1 (Cy1)
Collimator lens Cylindrical lens2 (Cy2)
Polygonmirror
fθ lens unitMirror
Drum
Semiconductorlaser
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 26/290
2-10
IMAGE FORMATION
Charging
A negative charging method using a scorotron is employed. A
constant negative voltage is applied to the charging plate and
back plate in order to maintain the potential of the drum
constant.
Exposure
Exposure is done with the laser beams, causing the charge on
the drum to be erased. Two laser beams are used to write
(exposure) two lines of image data at a time.
Developing
Negatively charged toner adheres to the surface of the drum
where the charge was erased during the exposure process.
Transfer
The transfer corona unit causes the toner on the drum to be
transferred to the paper by means of a discharge from the back
of the paper.
The PSL improves the transfer of the toner and the separation
of the paper.
Figure 22
Charging corona unit
Figure 24
Figure 23
Drum
Transfercorona unit
Figure 25
PSL
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 27/290
MAIN BODY
2-11
Separation
The toner remaining on the drum is removed by the cleaning
blade.
The separation corona unit erases the charge on the paper by
applying an AC discharge from the back of the paper, thus
allowing the paper to separate from the drum under its own
weight.
Cleaning
Separation corona unit
Figure 26
Cleaning blade
Toner collecting roller
Drum
Figure 27
PCL
Figure 28
Drum
The PCL uses light to erase the potential remaining on the
surface of the drum.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 28/290
2-12
This page left blank intentionally.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 29/290
2-13
MAIN BODY
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONSystem Configuration
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 30/290
2-14
System Configuration
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 31/290
2-15
MAIN BODY
SPACE REQUIREMENTS
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 32/290
2-16
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONSType
Type: Console type
(floor-mounted type)
Copying method: Indirect electrostatic method
Original table method: Fixed
Photosensitive
material: OPC
Sensitizing method: Laser writing method
Paper feed method: Two stacked trays (total capacity
of 500 sheets of 20 lb. paper)
Two LCT trays (1000 & 1500
sheet capacity of 20 lb. paper)
Bypass tray (150 sheet capacity
of 20 lb. paper)
FunctionsOriginals: Sheets, books, solid objects
Original size: Max 11x17
Copy size: 11x17 to 5.5x8.5RMagnification
Fixed magnifications: x0.50, x0.65, x0.77, x1.00, x1.29,
x1.55, x2.00
User set
magnifications: Two
Zoom magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)
Vertical magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)
Horizontal
magnification: x0.50 to 4.00 (1% steps)
Warm-up time: Approximately 6.5 minutes
(68°F, rated voltage)
First copy time (seconds)
frame erasure, shift, reduction
shift, weekly timer, job memory,
same size standard mixed
original mode
Copy PaperPlain paper • 20 lb. to 24 lb. fine quality paper
Special paper • Label paper (specified by Konica)
• OHP film (specified by Konica, by-
pass feed only)
• Blueprint master (specified by Konica)
• 16 lb. to 32 lb. general purpose paper
OptionKey counter
Finisher: FS-102/FS-103
Weekly timer: WT-101K
Expansion memory unit: MU-101/MU-102
Image processor: IP-201
Machine ParticularsPower source: 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 20 A
Power consumption: Max. 1500 W
Weight: Approximately 440 lb.
Machine dimensions
Continuous copy speed (life size, copies/minute)
Size
Manual
AES
APS
8.5x11
4.9
4.9
4.9
Size
8.5x11
8.5x11
50
Number of
continuous copies: 1 to 999
Original density
selection: AES, manual
arbitrarily set density
(two settings)
Special functions: OHP intersheet, thin paper/thick
paper mode, 2 IN 1; 4 IN 1
mode, intersheet, insertion
page, chapter demarcation,
book copy, repeat, text/photo
mode, reversed black and
white mode, erasure outside
original area, fold erasure,
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 33/290
2-17
MAIN BODY
ServiceService interval: Every 120,000 copies
MaterialsDeveloper: Konica 7050 only
Toner: Konica 7050 only
Drum: Konica 7050 only
Machine Working EnvironmentTemperature:50°F to 86°F
Humidity: 10% to 80%
The contents of this manual are subject to change without
notice.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 34/290
2-18
ADF
Image read unit
Image write unit
Developing unit
Paper feed unit
Upper tray
2nd paper feed unit
Transfer corona unit
PSL
Separation corona unitLCT-1000 tray
LCT-1500 tray
ADU paper feed/ conveyance unit
Lower tray
Conveyance unit
ADU paper exit/ conveyance unit
Fusing unit
Image processing unit
Exposure lamp
Cleaning unit
PCL
Chargecorona unit
CENTER CROSS-SECTION
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 35/290
MAIN BODY
2-19
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Main Drive
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 36/290
2-20
Drum/Developing Drive Unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 37/290
MAIN BODY
2-21
Paper Feed Drive Unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 38/290
2-22
ADU Paper Exit/Conveyance Drive Unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 39/290
MAIN BODY
2-23
ADU Paper Feed/Conveyance Drive Unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 40/290
2-24
1000 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 41/290
MAIN BODY
2-25
1500 Tray Paper Feed/Conveyance Unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 42/290
2-26
EXTERNALS
Composition
Disassembly and ReassemblyCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
unplugged from the power outlet.
Caution: When replacing the ozone filter, secure the new
filter securely to the inside of the main body.
Replacing Ozone Filter (S)
Procedure(1) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear
cover.
Paper feedandconveyancedoor
Right sideupper cover
Right side lower cover
ADF
ADFconnector
Rear cover
Bypass feedtable
Main switch
Paper exit tray
Left sideuppercover
ADUconveyance
door
Left side
lower cover
LCT-1500tray
LCT-1000tray
ADU
Lower tray
Upper tray
Front door
Operation panel
LCTconveyance door
Outer I/F connector
FNS connector
(2) Pull out the ozone filter box toward you, then attach the
handle to the board mounting panel and secure it.
(3) Pull up ozone filter (S), then pull it out and remove it.
Ozone filter box
Ozone filter (S)
Handle Board mounting panel
(5) Reinstall the ozone filter in the opposite sequence to
removal.
ADF
Set screw
Set screws
Set screw
ADFconnector(CN102)
Set screw
Set screw
Set screw
Set screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 43/290
2-27
MAIN BODY
Replacing Ozone Filter (H)Procedure
(1) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear
cover.
(2) Pull forward ozone filter (H) and remove it.
(3) Reinstall the ozone filter in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Replacing the Developing Suction FilterProcedure
(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Remove the lock, open the filter box, and remove the
developing suction filter.
(3) Reinstall the suction filter in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Replacing the Dust Prevention FilterProcedure
(1) Open the front door and the ADU conveyance door.
(2) Loosen the four set screws, then remove the left side
upper cover.
(3) Open the ADF.
(4) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass
holder.
(5) Remove the two set screws, then remove the original
stopper plate.(6) Remove the platen glass.
Ozonefilter (H)
Developingsuction filter
Filter box
Set screws
Originalstopper plate Platen
glass
Glassholder
Set screws
Setscrews
ADUconveyance
Set screws
Front door
Left sideupper cover
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 44/290
2-28
(7) Remove the two set screws, and remove the upper
cover (center).
(8) Remove the old dustproof filter, then install the new
dustproof filter (filter has adhesive strip).
(9) Install the other parts in the reverse sequence to
removal.
Set screw
Upper cover (center)
Set screw
Dust preventionfilter
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 45/290
MAIN BODY
2-29
DRIVE UNIT
Composition
Mechanism Method
Drum drive Gear drive (dedicated motor)
Developing sleeve drive Gear drive (dedicated motor)Developing agitator drive Gear drive (dedicated motor)
2nd paper feed drive Timing belt + gear drive
conveyance drive Timing belt + gear drive
Fusing and exit drive Timing belt + gear drive
ADU lead-in drive Timing belt + gear drive
Toner recycle Timing belt + gear drive
*1
*1*1
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body. (Refer to
the drum carriage section.)
(2) Remove the nine set screws, then remove the rear
cover.(3) Remove the three set screws, then remove the two
flywheels.
*1: Separation of the different parts of the drive system
The drum, developing sleeve, and developing agitator of
this machine are driven by separate motors in order to
improve the serviceability of the drum unit and also to
improve the developing performance.
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Main Motor UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
unplugged from the power outlet.
Caution: Be sure to remove the drum carriage before removing
or reinstalling the main motor unit.
If you leave the drum carriage in place, the cleaning
blade is likely to be damaged because the drum will
turn when you remove or reinstall the flywheel.
Mechanisms
Set screws
Flywheel
Agitator screw motor (M35)
Drum motor (M4)
Developing drive motor (M3)
Main motor (M1)
Drum drive unit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 46/290
2-30
(4) Disconnect the three connectors (CN204, 205 and
324), then remove the cable from the wiring clamp.
(5) Remove the four set screws, slide the main motor unit
to the right, then pull it forward and remove it.
Caution: DO NOT strike the main motor unit against the drum
drive gear when removing or reinstalling it.
(6) Reinstall the main motor unit in the opposite sequence
to removal.
Replacing the Paper Feed Drive Shaft and FusingInput Gear
Procedure
(1) Remove the main motor unit.
(2) Remove the e-ring.
(3) Remove the bearing, then remove the developing
drive gear unit.
(4) Remove the spring, then loosen the two set screws
and remove the tension from main body drive belt.
(5) Remove the three set screws, then remove the fusing
drive plate.
Caution: Be careful not to lose the polyslider when installing
the fusing drive plate.
(6) Remove the fusing input gear.
(7) Remove the four set screws, then remove the paperfeed drive plate.
E-ring
Main motor unit
Developing drivegear unit
Bearing
Set screws Fusing drive plate
Fusing inputgear
Spring
Set screws(Loosen)
Main body drive belt
Guide screw
Slotted hole
Set screwConnectors(CN204 and 205)
Drumdrive gear
Set screwConnector (CN324)
Set screw
Set screw
Main motorunit
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 47/290
MAIN BODY
2-31
(8) Remove the bearing, polyslider and paper feed input
gear.
(9) Remove developing drive gear, then pull out the pin
remaining on the shaft.
(10)Remove the paper feed drive shaft.
(11)Reinstall the paper feed drive shaft and fusing input
gear in the opposite sequence to removal.
M1 (Main) Control
M1 (main) is controlled by the control board (CB) via the DC
driver board (DCDB).
OperationM1 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the ADU paper
exit/conveyance, toner recycle, conveyance, 2nd paper
feed and fusing sections. M1 is PLL-controlled by feedback
signals from a speed sensor installed inside M1 itself,
maintaining it at a constant speed.
M1 goes ON when the start print button is pressed, and
goes OFF again when the final copy has been exited.
If the upper fusing roller fails to reach the set temperature
within the specified time from the start of warmup, M1
remains ON until the completion of warmup.
SignalsInput signal
• M1 ACK (M1 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M1 reaches the specified speed.
Output signals
• M1 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M1)
This is the M1 drive control signal.
[L]: M1 ON
[H]: M1 OFF
• M1 CLK (CB −> DCDB −> M1)This is the M1 rotational speed control reference clock
signal.
Set screws
Paper feeddrive plate Polyslider
Fusing input gear
Paper feedinput gear
Poly-slider
Bearing Developing drivegear
Paper feeddrive shaft
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 48/290
2-32
M4 (Drum) Control
M4 (drum) is controlled by the control board (CB) via the DC
driver board (DCDB).
Operation
M4 is a 24 V drive DC motor that drives the drum and the
cleaning guide roller. M4 is PLL-controlled by a reference
signal and feedback signal from a speed sensor installed
inside M4 itself, maintaining it at a constant speed.
M4 goes ON when the start print button is pressed, and
goes OFF again when the final copy has been exited.
SignalsInput signal
• M4LD (M4 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M4 reaches the specified speed.
Output signals
• M4CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M4)
This is the M4 drive control signal.
[L]: M4 ON
[H]: M4 OFF
• M4 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M4)
This is the M4 rotational speed switchover signal.
Normally [H]: 280 mm/sec
[L] is used during warmup for D-max and gamma
correction, and in printer mode for 600 dpi.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 49/290
2-33
MAIN BODY
READ SECTION
Composition
Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Light source Halogen lamp (170 W)
Exposure Light source shift slit exposure
Scanning 1st, 2nd and 3rd mirror shift
Lamp power supply Lamp cord
Cooling of optics Cooling of intake air using a fan
Disassembly and ReassemblyScrews that must not be removed
The 16 set screws of the CCD unit
V mirror (2nd and 3rd mirrors)
CCD unit
A/D converter board(ADB)
A/D converterboard (ADB)
Screws that mustnot be removed
Screws that mustnot be removed
Screws that mustnot be removed
Screws that mustnot be removed
Optics cooling fan (FM2)
Optics rail (R)
Optics unit
Optics drive wire
Front
Note: 2 screws are located behind the ADB in the figureabove.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 50/290
2-34
Removing and Reinstalling the CCD UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
removed from the power outlet.
Caution: Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing
the CCD unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Procedure(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, and
upper cover (center).
(2) Remove the two set screws, then remove the glass
stopper plate.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove lens light
blocking cover 2.
(4) Remove the eight set screws, then remove lens light
blocking cover 1.
(5) Disconnect the connector (CN49).(6) Remove the eight set screws, then remove the fan
mounting plate.
Set screws
Set screws
Light blocking cover 2
Glass stopper plate
Set screws
Set
screwsSetscrews
Lens lightblockingcover 1
Connector (CN49) Set screws
Fan mounting plate
Set screws Set screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 51/290
2-35
MAIN BODY
Replacing the Exposure LampCaution:
• Be sure that the power cord has been removed
from the power outlet.
• DO NOT touch the glass of the exposure lamp with
bare hands.
Caution:
• Be sure to install the exposure lamp with themanufacturer's mark facing the front side of the main
body.
• The nipple on the exposure lamp must face the paper
feed side.
• Be sure to check the image after installing the exposure
lamp. (For details, refer to the adjustmentsection.)
Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, platen
glass and the upper cover (center).
(2) Move the exposure unit to the notch on the main frame
fitted on the paper exit side.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove mirror supportplate 2.
(7) Disconnect the two connectors (CN420 and 412).
(8) Remove the two set screws, then remove the CCD
unit.
Connector (CN412)
(9) Reinstall the CCD unit in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Set screws
CCD unit
Electronic RDH
Connector (CN420)
Set screws
Mirror support plate 2
Reflector mirror 1
Exposure lamp
Lamp terminal
Spring
(4) To prevent the exposure lamp from falling out, insert a
sheet of paper from beneath reflector mirror 1 and
wrap it around the exposure lamp.
(5) Remove the spring, then slide the lamp terminal to the
rear and remove the exposure lamp. (Lift out the lamp
while holding it with the paper that you wrapped around
it.)
(6) Reinstall the exposure lamp in the opposite sequence
to removal.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 52/290
2-36
Removing the Exposure UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
unplugged from the power outlet.
Caution:
• Use a wire positioning jig when installing the exposure
unit. (For the method of installing this jig, refer to the
sub-section describing the method of installing the
exposure unit.)• Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing
the exposure unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, upper
cover (center) and the operation panel.
(2) Remove the seven set screws, then remove the front
door and disconnect the five connectors (CN10, 212,
213 383 and 414).
Installing the Exposure UnitCaution:
• Use a wire positioning jig when installing the exposure
unit.
• Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing
the exposure unit. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Procedure
(1) Insert the jig into the exposure unit mounting position
from the front.
(2) Slide the exposure unit to the paper feed side until ittouches the jig.
(3) Install the exposure unit on the optics wire using the
four set screws.
Set screw
Wiringsecuring plate
Exposure unit
Set screws
Connector(CN212)
Set screws
Operation
panel
Set screws
Connector(CN212)
(3) Move the exposure unit to the notch in the main body
frame on the paper exit side.
(4) Remove the set screw, then remove the wiring securing
plate and disconnect the connector (CN384).
(5) Remove the four set screws, then remove the exposure
unit.
Connector (CN414)
Connector(CN383)
Connector(CN10)
Connector(CN384)
Set screws
Exposure unit
Jig
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 53/290
2-37
MAIN BODY
Installing the optics wireCaution:
• When winding the wire around the pulley, be sure to
run the wire tightly to ensure that it does not ride up the
side of the pulley.
• Be sure to perform image adjustment after replacing or
reinstalling the wire. (For details, refer to the adjustment
section.)
Procedure
(1) Remove the optics unit.
(2) Move the V mirror unit to the paper feed side, then
insert the jig from the front (through the V mirror unit)
and secure it in place (refer to the illustration on the
right).
(3) The optics wire has exposure unit mounting pieces
installed on it. The position of each mounting piece
differs depending upon whether the mounting piece is
at the front or the rear. Use the mounting piece that is
at the shorter distance from the metal bead at the end,
as the rear mounting piece.
(4) Ensure that the end of the outer wire coincides with the
metal bead, and the end of the inner wire coincides
with the lug terminal. Place the metal bead midway
along the optics wire in the mounting hole of the drive
pulley, then wind five turns to the outside, and four
turns to the inside, starting from this point.
Pull out the outer wire in the paper exit direction from
the top of the drive pulley, and pull out the inner wire in
the paper feed direction from the top of the drive pulley.
(5) Secure the outer wire, after it has been wound, on the
wire stopper via pulley 1 and the outside of V mirror
pulley.
(6) Pass the inner wire through the notch in the wire
stopper, reverse it at pulley 2, then pass it around the
inside of the V mirror pulley and around pulley 3, in that
sequence, and attach the lug terminal to the spring
securing plate. Temporarily secure the spring securing
plate with the screw.
(7) Insert the jigs into the exposure unit mounting positions
from the front.
Exposure unitV mirror unit
Jig
Note: The wire stopper is provided with two grooves. Use the
outer groove for the rear side, and the inner one for the
front side.
Connector(CN41)
Connector(CN388)
Connector(CN381)
Front cover
Front door
Set screws
Setscrews
Set screwsSet screws
Set screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 54/290
2-38
9 9 10
11
13
8
10
11
(8) Loosen each of the screws that you temporarily
secured, then attach the spring to the spring securing
plate and secure it once again.
(9) Mount the other wire in the same way.
Caution:
• Ensure that the end of the outer wire coincides with the
metal bead, and the end of the inner wire coincides
with the wire terminal.
• Pull out the outer wire in the paper exit direction from
the top of the drive pulley, and pull out the inner wire in
the paper feed direction from the top of the drive pulley.
E x p o
s u r e
u n i t
m o u n
t i n g p
i e c e
Optics wire (rear)
Rear
Pulley 3
Pulley 2
Spring securing plate
Set screws
Spring
Wirestopper
Optics wire (front)
Wire stopper
Metal bead
V mirror unit
Metal bead
Drive pulley
Pulley 1
5
6
8
35
6
4 4Front
Metal bead
Four turnsFive turns Four turns
Rear
Five turns
Metal bead
Wire stopperMetal bead
V mirror unit Pulley
Metal bead
Exposure unitmounting piece
Metal bead
Lug terminal
Optics wire (front)
Optics wire (rear)Pulley
Metal bead
Wire stopper
V mirror unit
Pulley 1
Spring securing plate
Pulley 3
Pulley 2
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 55/290
2-39
MAIN BODY
M12 (Optics Drive) Control
M12 (optics drive) is driven by the optics motor drive board
(OPMDB), and is controlled by the control board (CB).
Related signals are PS1 (optics overrun), PS2 (optics ADF and
EE), PS3 (shading), PS4 (paper supply restart), PS5 (optics
return), PS7 (optics timing) and PS8 (platen glass sensor).
OperationOperation of M12
M12 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven using
a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing through the
windings is switched according to the position of the rotor
which is detected by a sensor (magnetic sensor) inside the
motor.
FB
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 56/290
2-40
Scanning operation of the exposure unit
Scanning speed
Position of each sensor
Magnification Scanning speed
Forward 280 mm/sec (life size)
Return 1520 mm/sec
Home position sensor of the exposure unit
If the exposure unit is not in the home position when the
main switch is turned ON, M12 rotates at low speed in the
reverse direction until PS7 (optics sensor) is turned ON,
thus detecting the fact that the optics unit is in the homeposition.
Shading correction read operation
At the position where PS3 (shading) goes ON, the light
reflected from the white reference plate installed at the rear
of the original table is read.
Other operations
• During copying
When manual density has been selected
During a platen copy operation
Exposure unit
Exposure scan
Original placed on platen
Original conveyance
Exposure scan
Exposure scan
Exposure unit
Stop
Stop
AES mode
During a platen copy operation
Exposure scan
AES scan
Exposure unitOriginal placed on platen
2nd original feed
1st original feed
Copy button pressed
Press copy button
Shading correctionread operation
Home position(PS7 and PS5 ON)PS3
During an ADF copy operation
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 57/290
2-41
MAIN BODY
SignalsInput signals
• PS1 (PS1 −> CB)
This is the exposure unit overrun detection signal.[L]: The exposure unit is in the overrun position.
[H]: The exposure unit is not in the overrun position.
• PS2 (PS2 −> CB)
The brake is applied to M12 after the specified period
from when PS2 goes ON during the return scan of the
exposure unit. Also, when the ADF (1-1 mode) is used,
EE read starts when PS2 goes ON.
[L]: Exposure unit detected
[H]: Exposure unit not detected
• PS3 (PS3 −> CB)
This is the white reference plate read position detection
signal.
[L]: The exposure unit is in the white reference plate read position.
[H]: The exposure unit is not in the white reference
plate read position.
• PS4 (PS4 −> CB)
The timer that determines the 2nd paper feed start
timing starts when PS4 goes ON during the forward
scan of the exposure unit.
[L]: Exposure unit detected
[H]: Exposure unit not detected
• PS5 (PS5 −> CB)
This signal is used to detect the return position and also
the home position of the exposure unit.
[L]: Exposure unit detected
[H]: Exposure unit not detected
• PS7 (PS7 −> CB)
This signal is used to detect the return position and
also the home position of the exposure unit.
[L]: Exposure unit detected
[H]: Exposure unit not detected
• PS8 (PS8 −> CB)
This signal is used to detect whether the original glass
is set or not.
[L]: Original glass detected
[H]: Original glass not detected
During an ADF copy operation (1-1)
Original conveyance
1st original feed
Stop
2nd original feed
Stop
Prescan
AES scan
Exposure scan
Exposure scan
AES scan
Stop
Stop
Exposure unit
During an ADF copy operation (1-2, 2-1, 2-2)
Original conveyance
1st original feed
2nd original feed
Stop
Exposure unit
AES scan
Exposure scan
AES scan
Exposure scan
Stop
Stop
Stop
• Book copy mode
When manual density has been selected
Original placed on platen
Copy button pressed
Exposure unit
Exposure scan (rear half)
Exposure scan (front half)
Original conveyance
Copy button pressed
Exposure unit
AES scan
Exposure scan (front half)
Exposure scan (rear half)
AES mode
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 58/290
2-42
• M12 DIR (OPMDB −> CB)
This is the M12 rotational direction detection signal.
[L]: Reverse rotation (return operation)
[H]: Forward rotation (forward operation)
• M12LD (OPMDB −> CB)
[H] is output when M12 reaches the specified speed.
• M12 MAG A/A' (M12 −> OPMDB)
• M12 MAG B/B' (M12 −> OPMDB)• M12 MAG C/C' (M12 −> OPMDB)
These are the output signals from the sensors (magnetic
sensors) contained in M12. OPMDB detects the
position of the rotor of the motor by means of these
signals, and switches over the M12 DRIVE A to C
output.
• M12 FG (M12 −> OPMDB)
This is a feedback signal from the rotational speed
sensor contained in M12. It is compared with the M12
CLK signal from the CB, and the output voltage adjusted
so that the feedback signal becomes the same as the
M12 CLK signal, thus controlling the rotational speed
of M12.
Output signals
• M12 DRIVE A, B, C (OPMDB −> M12)
This is the M12 drive signal. While M12 is rotating,
voltages are output sequentially from M12 DRIVE A to
C, and applied to M12.
The voltage from each output that is applied to M12
consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width
of this output changes according to the rotation
condition of M12, as shown in the figure, and as a
result the RMS value of the voltage applied to M12
changes, causing the speed to be regulated.
• M12 BRAKE (CB −> OPMDB)
This is the M12 brake control signal.
[L]: Brake OFF
[H]: Brake ON
• M12 NCR (CB −> OPMDB)
This is the M12 brake control signal.
• M12 MODE 0, 1, 2 (CB −> OPMDB)
This is the M12 rotational speed control signal.Up to eight rotational speed modes are activated by
different combinations of these three signals.
• M12 CONT (CB −> OPMDB)
This is the M12 ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: M12 ON
[H]: M12 OFF
• M12 CLK (CB −> OPMDB)
This is the M12 rotational speed control reference
clock signal.
• M12 F/R (CB −> OPMDB)
This signal is used to control the rotational direction of
M12.
[L]: Forward operation
[H]: Return operation
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 59/290
2-43
MAIN BODY
Exposure Control
Power is supplied to exposure lamp (L1) by means of the CVR
(constant voltage regulator) in DC power supply unit 2 (DCPS2),
and is controlled by the control board (CB).
OperationL1 light intensity control
The light intensity from L1 is determined by the output
voltage from the CVR circuit in DCPS2.
Rated output: 60 VDC
Protection from abnormality
• Hardware timer circuit
If L1 remains ON continuously for at least 40±8 seconds
for some reason or other, the hardware timer in the CVR
of DCPS2 operates, turning OFF the main relay (RL1).As a result, current to the AC loads including L1 is cut off.
• Temperature fuse
If L1 exceeds a certain temperature, f1 (optics temperature
fuse) melts, cutting off the current to L1. (f1 melting
temperature: 121°C)
SignalsInput signals
• L1 FB (DCPS2 −> CB)
This signal informs the CB of the lit or unlit state of L1.
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF or broken
• RL1 INHIBIT (DCPS2 −> CB)
This signal turns OFF RL1 if an abnormality occurs inthe machine.
[L]: Abnormal
[H]: Normal
Output signal
• L1 CONT (CB −> DCPS2)
This is a control signal which turns L1 ON and OFF.
[L]: L1 ON
[H]: L1 OFF
• L1 DRIVE1, 2 (DCPS2 −> L1)
This is the L1 drive signal.
• RL1 DRIVE (CB −> DCPS2 −> RL1)
This signal controls RL1.
This signal becomes [H] and turns off RL1 if anabnormality occurs in the machine.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 60/290
2-44
Original Read Control
The original is read by the A/D converter board (ADB) and the
CCD sensor installed on the ADB.
OperationThe light reflected off the exposed original passes through a
lens to the CCD sensor. The analog voltages that correspond
to the input light intensity are A/D-converted in the ADB, and
output to the image processing board (IPB).
Original read operation
The original read timing is as follows.
• During a platen copy operation
When PS4 (paper feed restart) goes ON.
• During an ADF copy operationWhen the exposure unit is +2 mm toward the paper
feed side from the position at which PS4 goes ON.
APS Control
APS takes place as a result of the signal read by the APS
sensor being sent to the control board (CB) when the original
cover is opened and closed.
Related signals are PS45 (APS timing 1) and PS44 (book
detection).
OperationAPS detection operation
APS detection is an operation that detects the paper size
according to the particular ON/OFF combination of PS41
(long), and PS42 (APS (inner)).
The APS sensor consists of LEDs and photosensors. APS
detection takes place as a result of the light emitted fromeach LED being reflected off the original and received by
the photosensor.
LED
P a p e r e x i t s i d e
Photosensor
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 61/290
2-45
MAIN BODY
The relation between each sensor and the paper size is
shown below.
APS detection timing
APS detection takes place when PS45 goes ON or PS44
goes OFF.
APS detection stops when PS45 goes OFF or PS44 goes
ON.
SignalsInput signals
• PS41 (PS41 −> CB)This is the paper size detection signal.
[L]: Paper is detected.
[H]: Paper is not detected.
• PS42 (PS42 −> CB)
This is the paper size detection signal.
[L]: Paper is detected.
[H]: Paper is not detected.
• PS45 (PS45 −> CB)
This is the original cover opening/closing detection
signal.
It activates or deactivates the APS function.
[L]: ON (APS function activated)
[H]: OFF (APS function deactivated)
• PS44 (PS44 −> CB)
This is the original cover state detection signal.
This signal is used to detect the raised state of the rear
part of the original cover when a book or other thick
original is being copied.
When the rear part of the original cover is in a raised
state, PS44 is OFF, and [H] is output.
[L]: ON (APS function is activated)
[H]: OFF (APS function is deactivated)
PS45 goes ON
ADF(DF-306)
APS sensor
Paper size
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11R
8.5x5.5R
8.5x11
8.5x5.5
C
PS41
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
PS42
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
PS44
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 62/290
2-46
AES Control
AES control takes place during an AES scan as a result of the
CCD sensor reading the original density and selecting the
most suitable γ correction curve.
AES processing is done by the image processing board (IBP).
OperationAES detection operation
• During a platen copy operation
When the start print button is pressed, an AES scan
takes place, and the density is measured over the
range shown below.
AES sampling range
With APS detection: (document width-20mm) x
(document width-20mm)Without APS detection: (176mm-20mm) x (176mm-
20mm)
• ADF mode (1-1)
The read operation takes place from the point at which
PS2 (ADF-AES) goes ON during the return scan of the
exposure unit, either while the original is being
conveyed through the ADF or after the original has
been placed in it.
AES sampling range (176mm-20mm) x L
• ADF mode (1-2, 2-1, 2-2)
The density of the original is read during the AES scan
after the original has been placed in the ADF.
AES sampling range (176mm-20mm) x (176mm-20mm)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 63/290
2-47
MAIN BODY
WRITE UNITComposition
Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Scan Polygon mirror
(Rotational speed: 16535 rpm)
Light source Laser diodes (two)
(Output: max 15 mW)
Positioning Index sensor fine
adjustment prism
Laser beam combining Beam combining prism
*1: Path of laser beam
The light emitted to each semiconductor is sent to the OPC
drum via the collimator lens, compression prism, fine
adjustment prism, beam combining prism, cylindrical lens
1, polygon mirror, fθ lens unit, V mirror unit, cylindrical lens
2, and the 3rd mirror. The dust proof glass is positioned
between the polygon mirror and fθ lens unit, and betweenthe reflecting mirror and drum.
*1
*2
*3
Semiconductorlaser LD2
Fine adjustmentprism
OPC drum
Stepping motor
Collimatorlens unit
Cylindrical lens 1
fθ lens unit
V mirror unit
Beam combining prism
Collimator lensunit 2
Index mirror
Collimator lens unit 1 Cylindrical lens 2
3rd mirror
Polygon mirror
Index sensor board
Laser driver board 1
Polygon driver board
Laser driver board 2
Semiconductorlaser LD1
Compressionprism
Index mirror
Fine adjustmentprism
Beamcombining prism
Compressionprism
CY1 lens
V mirror unit
fθ lens unit
CY2 lens
Polygon mirror
3rd mirror
Glass cover
Index sensor
3rd mirror
2nd mirror
1st mirror
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 64/290
2-48
*2: Positioning
Each laser beam is positioned by the compression prism
and the fine adjustment prism.
This is adjustable only in the factory, not in the field.
*3: Combining the laser beams
The two laser beams are emitted at right angles with
respect to each other. The beam combining prism causesthem to be emitted parallel to one another.
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Write UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
unplugged from the power outlet.
Warning:
• Do not energize the write unit when it is not in the
correct position.
• Do not remove the cover from the write unit other thanto clean the polygon mirror.
Procedure
(1) Remove the glass holder, original stopper plate, and
platen glass.
Board cover
(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the board cover.
(3) Remove the 13 screws, then remove the board
protection cover.
Boardprotectioncover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Semiconductor laser 1
Beam combining prism
Semiconductor laser 2
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 65/290
2-49
MAIN BODY
(4) Disconnect the four connectors (CN421, 422, 423 and
424) from the image processing board (IPB).
(5) Loosen the four screws, then remove the upper coveron the right side.
(6) Remove the eight screws, then remove the write unit
cover.
(7) Disconnect the connector (CN95).
(8) Loosen the two screws, then pull out the write unit.
(9) Reinstall the write unit in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Cleaning the polygon mirrorProcedure
(1) Remove the write unit.
(2) Remove the five screws, then remove the write unit
cover.
Image processing board (IPB)
Connector(CN424) Connector
(CN423)
Connector(CN421)
Connector(CN422)
Write unitConnector(CN95)
Write unit cover
Screws
Write unit cover
ScrewsScrews
Screws
Screws
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 66/290
2-50
(4) Remove the screw, then remove board support piece
1.
(5) Remove the set screws, then pull out and remove the
electronic RDH.
(6) Reinstall the electronic RDH in the opposite sequence
to removal.
Electronic RDH
Board support piece 1
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the polygon
mirror cover.
(4) Immerse a cotton stick in a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and acetone, then use it to clean the eight faces
of the polygon mirror.
Caution: Take care not to scratch the polygon mirror when
cleaning it.
Removing and Reinstalling the Electronic RDHCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
removed from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Remove the top cover on the left side.
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN49).
(3) Remove the eight screws, then remove the fanmounting plate.
Connector (CN49)
Fan mounting plate
Polygon mirror cover
Screws
Screws
Screws Screws
Screws
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 67/290
2-51
MAIN BODY
M5 (Polygon) Control
M5 (polygon) is driven by the polygon driver board (PMDB),
and is controlled by the control board (CB).
Operation• M5 is a 3-phase brushless DC motor which is driven
using a 3-phase bipolar method. The current flowing
through the windings is switched according to the position
of the rotor which is detected by a sensor (magnetic)
inside the motor.
This motor rotates the polygon mirror, causing the laser
beams from LDB1 and 2 (laser diode boards 1 and 2) to
be scanned in the axial direction of the drum. The speed
of the motor is maintained constant by PLL control.
• M5 is powered by 24 VDC. The rotational speed is asfollows.
Rotational speed
High speed (16,535 rpm)
One of the following four speeds can
be selected using the 25 mode.
• 14,000 rpm *
• 11,024 rpm *
• 8,000 rpm *
• Stop *
State of the machine
During copy
During idling
* If the item marked * is selected, the rotational speed of
M5 switches over after the lapse of the specified timefrom the end of the copy process. The specified time can
be selected using the 25 mode.
* (15 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec, 120 sec)
SignalsCB output signals
• M5 CONT (CB −> PMDB)
This signal controls the ON/OFF state of M5.
L: M5 ON
H: M5 OFF
• M5 CLK (CB −> PMDB)
This is a reference clock signal for PLL-controlling M5in the PMDB.
CB input signal
• M5 RDY (PMDB −> CB)
This signal indicates the rotation condition of M5.
L: Specified rotational speed
H: If the specified speed has not been reached
PMDB input signal
• M5 MAG A/A' (M5 −> PMDB)
• M5 MAG B/B' (M5 −> PMDB)
• M5 MAG C/C' (M5 −> PMDB)
These are output signals from the position sensors
(magnetic sensors) contained in M5. The PMDB detects
the position of the rotor of the motor by means of thesesignals, and switches over the M5 DRIVE A to C
output.
PMDB output signal
• VMAG- (PMDB −> M5)
This is the GND line to the rotor position sensors
(magnetic sensors) contained in M5.
• M5 DRIVE A to C (PMDB −> M5)
This is the drive output signal for M5. While M5 is
rotating, voltages are output sequentially from M12
DRIVE A to C, and applied to M5.
The voltage from each output that is applied to M5
consists of the pulses shown below. The pulse width
of this output changes according to the rotation condition
of M5, as shown in the figure, and as a result the RMS
value of the voltage applied to M5 changes, causing
the speed to be regulated.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 68/290
2-52
Image Write Control
The analog image data from the CCD sensor is A/D-converted
by the A/D converter board (ADB), then sent to the imageprocessing board (IPB) where it is data-processed. The
processed image data is converted into a laser beam and
applied to the drum with control signals from the CB. There are
two lasers which are used to write two lines of image data in a
single scan. The write start position of each laser is detected
by the index sensor board (INDXSB). The electronic RDH (E-
RDH) can store digitized image data. Various editing functions
can be carried out based on this data.
Operation
Image processingThe following processing is done by the image processing
board (IPB).
• Shading correction
Implementation timing
White correction
• When the machine is switched ON
• When the front door or the side door is opened
and closed
• Every 1000 copies
Black correction
• When the start print button is pressed
• Brightness/density conversion
• AES processing• Text/halftone dot identification
• Filtering
• Magnification change processing
• Copy γ correction
• Write density control
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 69/290
2-53
MAIN BODY
The following processing is performed by the E-RDH
(electronic RDH processing board).
• Error diffusion processing
• Data compression
The write operation takes place under instructions from the
CB after the above processing has been completed.
WriteThe image processing board (IPB) sends image data one pixel
at a time to LDB1 and LDB2 in accordance with control signals
from the control board (CB).
LDB1 and LDB2 cause the lasers to emit light pulses of a length
corresponding to the image data. This laser light illuminates
the drum.
• Automatic adjustment of laser beam intensity (APC)
The CB monitors the laser drive current at fixed intervals,
and maintains the light intensity at the correct value.
APC takes place at the following timing.
• Before Dmax/gray scale correction
• When the copy button is pressed
• After each two copies during a continuous copy
operation
• When the front door is opened and closed.
Note: MPC
MPC is the data (00-99steps) stored in the NVRAM in the main
body, which determines the LD output power to be adjusted
later by APC. It can be read out by 47-036, 47-037. MPC value
is sent from CB to IPB in case of step 1 or step 2 in APC above.
• Write timing
Axial direction of drum
In this machine, the INDEX signal from INDEXSB
determines the laser write start timing for each scan in
the axial direction of the drum.
Image area
Laser output
1
Laser output
21st scan 2nd scan
Symbol
a
b
b–c
c–d
d–e
Description
When laser goes ON during 1st scan
When index sensor goes ON
The timing at left is controlled by counting the
LD1 IRCLK and LD2 IRCLK signals. It differs
depending upon the paper size.
INDEX
Direction of rotation of drum
• When realtime output
• When superfine mode is selected.
• 1st copy in either normal or fine mode with
platen mode or RADF (1-1) mode.
When PS4 (paper feed restart) goes ON
• When data is output from the E-RDH memory
When the copy paper reaches the specifiedposition
• During paper feed from the tray, LCT or ADU:
After the specified period from when PS18 (no
feed) goes ON
• During bypass paper feed:
After the specified period from the start of
bypass paper feed
•Laser beam position correction
Axial direction of drum
The index sensor detects the magnitude of the
error. This error is corrected by changing the timing
of the light emission from the laser.
Direction of rotation of drumThe index sensor detects the degree of
misalignment, and M40 (laser correction motor)
changes the angle of the fine adjustment prism of
laser LD1, thus adjusting the beam in the up/down
direction.
SignalsCB output signals
• MEE V/V (CB −> IPB)
This signal determines the scanning area in the sub
scanning direction during the pre-scanning operation
(EE control). The period during which this signal is [L]
is judged to be the scanning range.
• M V/V (CB −> IPB)
This signal determines the scanning range in the sub
scanning direction during the exposure scan. The
period over which this signal is [L] is judged to be the
scanning range.
• M CLK CHG (CB −> IPB)
This is the clock frequency switching signal.
[H]: Low clock frequency
[L]: High clock frequency
• DCORR (CB −> IPB)
The black data collection trigger signal is used when
shading correction is taking place.• I YOBI 1 (CB −> IPB)
This is the spare input port.
• RXA 0, 1 (CB −> IPB)
This is the data that is transferred serially from the CB
to the IPB.
• MTN V/V (CB −> IPB)
This signal determines the patch output range in the
sub scanning direction while Dmax is being measured.
The period during which this signal is [L] is judged to be
the patch output range.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 70/290
2-54
• MAPC CAL (CB −> IPB)
This is the APC and PWM calibration trigger signal.
• MIND CHG (CB −> IPB)
This signal selects the index signal.
[H]: External index signal
[L]: Internal index signal
• CORR (CB −> IPB)
The white data collection trigger is used when shadingcorrection is taking place.
• RESET (CB −> IPB)
This is the processing CPU reset signal (not used).
CB input signal
• IP REQ (IPB −> CB)
This is the processing board communications enable
signal.
• INDEX (IPB −> CB)
This is the write system index signal.
• TXA 0, 1 (IPB −> CB)
This is the data that is transferred serially from the IPB
to the CB.
• MPR (IPB −> CB)
This is the image processing board power supply
monitoring signal (connector check).
• O YOBI 1 (IPB −> CB)
This the spare output port.
IPB output signal
• M40 PWR A (IPB −> M40)
This is the M40 A phase drive signal.
• M40 PWR B (IPB −> M40)
This is the M40 B phase drive signal.
• M40 DRIVE A/A' (IPB −> M40)
This is the M40 A phase drive pulse signal.
• M40 DRIVE B/B' (IPB −> M40)
This is the M40 B phase drive pulse signal.
• LD1 APC CONT 1, 2 (IPB −> LDB1)
APC (laser light intensity automatic adjustment) of
LD1 takes place according to the combination of
these two signals.
• LD1 C/S (IPB −> LDB1)
This is the LD1 MPC signal.
• LD1 VIDEO (IPB −> LDB1)
This is the LD1 laser image data
• LD1 IRCLK (IPB −> LDB1)
This is the LD1 APC clock signal.• LD1 INC (IPB −> LDB1)
This is the LD1 MPC signal.
• LD1 U/D (IPB −> LDB1)
This is the LD1 MPC signal.
• LD2 APC CONT 1,2 (IPB −> LDB2)
APC of LD2 takes place according to the combination
of these two signals.
• LD2 C/S (IPB −> LDB2)
This is the LD2 MPC signal.
• LD2 VIDEO (IPB −> LDB2)
This is the LD2 laser image data.
• LD2 IRCLK (IPB −> LDB2)
This is the LD2 APC clock signal.
• LD2 INC (IPB −> LDB2)
This is the LD2 MPC clock signal.• LD2 INC (IPB −> LDB2)
This is the LD2 MPC signal.
• HLVL (IPB −> INDEXSB)
This is the 5 VDC for monitoring power supply.
IPB input signals
• LD1 ALM (LDB1 −> IPB)
This is the signal that indicates an abnormality in the
laser drive current.
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
• LD2 ALM (LDB2 −> IPB)
This is the signal that indicates an abnormality in the
laser drive current.
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
• M INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB −> IPB)
This is the index signal for detection of main scanning
skew.
• S INDEX 1, 2 (INDEXSB −> IPB)
This is the index signal for detection of sub scanning
skew.
• IPR (INDEXSB −> IPB)
This is the INDEXSB power supply monitoring signal
(connector check).
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
• LD1 LPR (LDB1 −> IPB)
This is the LD1 power supply monitoring signal
(connector check).
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
• LD2 LPR (LDB2 −> IPB)
This is the LD2 power supply monitoring signal
(connector check).
[H]: Normal
[L]: Abnormal
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 71/290
2-55
MAIN BODY
DRUM UNIT
Composition
Mechanisms
Mechanism
Carriage supply
PCLAuxiliary separation
Method
Fixed rail
LEDSeparation claws*1
The drum unit of this machine is an integral assembly
consisting of the drum, and also the charge corona
unit, developing unit, cleaning unit, toner recycle unit
and the PCL which are installed around the drum.
*1: Auxiliary separation
Three separation claws separate the paper from
the drum and prevent paper jamming. These
claws are pressed against the drum or removed
from it by the ON/OFF operation of the separation
claw solenoid (SD4).
Also, while the swing latch installed in the swing
block is turning one revolution, the separation
claws slide about 7 mm, preventing a specific part
of the paper from becoming dirty and also preventing
the drum from being scratched.
Charge corona unit
Developing unit
PCL
Cleaning unit
Cleaning unit
PCL
Developing unit
Chargecorona unit
Transfer and separation corona unit
Drum
Separation claw solenoid
Separationsolenoid (SD4)
Swing block
Separation claws
Drum
PSL
Drum
Swing clutch
Separationclaw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 72/290
2-56
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Drum UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
removed from the power outlet.
Caution:
• The drum in this machine is more sensitive than the
drums used in previous machines. Before pulling out
the drum unit, be sure to cover the drum and store thedrum carriage in a dark place.
• Be careful not to rotate the drum when installing or
removing the drum unit. If you rotate the drum in the
direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates
during a copy operation, you may damaging the
cleaning blade.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, loosen the set screw, release the
lock plate of the toner supply unit, then pull forward the
toner supply unit and secure it in place.(4) Remove the three screws, then slowly pull forward the
drum unit. (Raise the toner recycle unit and then
remove the screw at the center of the drum.)Caution: There is a possibility of the drum rotating in reverse,
so retain the cleaner idler gear to prevent the drum
from rotating.
Toner recycle unit
Drum unit
Cleaner idler gear
(5) Reinstall the drum carriage in the opposite sequence
to removal.
Drum cover
Conveyance lever
Toner supply unit
Lock plate
(2) Release the conveyance lever.
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the drum cover.
Screw
Screws
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 73/290
2-57
MAIN BODY
(5) Reinstall the drum in the opposite sequence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Separation ClawsCaution:
• Take care not to damage the drum when removing the
separation claws.
• Be careful of the direction and position of the separation
claws when reinstalling the claws.
• Do not touch the cleaning blade or the drum with the
bare hands.
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum carriage from the main body.
(2) Remove the drum from the drum carriage.
(3) Remove the spring.
(4) Remove the three screws, then remove the swing
block and switch clutch.(5) Remove the separation claw unit.
Drum fixing coupling
Cleaner idler gear
Drum
Swing clutch
Screws
Separation claw unit
Spring
Swing block
Removing and Reinstalling the DrumCaution:
• Do not to touch the drum or the cleaning blade with
bare hands, or damage these parts.
• When leaving the drum out, be sure to cover the drum
and store it in a dark place.
• When reinstalling the drum, cleaning blade and guide
roller, apply setting powder to the entire surface of thedrum and also to the cleaning blade regardless of
whether or not the parts are new or old. In addition,
apply toner to both ends of the cleaning blade.
• After applying setting powder to the drum, carry out the
following work before installing the drum unit on the
main body.
1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before
installing the drum to the drum unit, discharge the
surface of the γ detecting sensor and the Dmax
sensor on the control board by using a piece of
cloth moistened with alcohol, thus preventing the
toner from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing the drum in the drum unit, with the
charging corona unit and the developing unit
removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides of
the drum, then turn the drum one revolution. This
prevents setting powder from scattering onto the
charging corona unit, and other parts, and also
prevents image defects.
• Do not drop the blade spacer which is inserted on the
cleaning blade axis on the back side.
• When installing the drum, be careful of the orientation
of the drum. The end of the drum with the wider non-
image area is the front.
• When installing a new drum, be sure to enter code 91
of the 47 mode and reset the drum counter. (For
details, refer to the adjustment section.)
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the charge corona unit, developing unit and
cleaning blade from the drum unit. (For the sequence
of removing these parts, refer to the charge corona
unit, developing unit and cleaning/recycle unit sections.)
(3) Remove the cleaner idler gear and the drum fixing
coupling.
Note: Before removing the drum, in order to reprevent the
toner from dropping, rotate the cleaner idler gear (B)counterclockwise and remove the toner remaining
between the drum and guide roller. If the toner cannot
be removed, rotate the drum clockwise a bit, then
detach the drum keeping the toner on the place.
(4) Gently lift out the drum while holding it at both ends to
ensure that you do not damage the photosensitive
surface.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 74/290
2-58
(6) Remove the spring and the e-ring from the separation
claw unit.
(7) Remove the three screws of the claws (one screw
each), then remove the three claws.
Removing and Reinstalling the PCLProcedure
(1) Remove the charge corona unit. (Refer to the charge
corona section for the method of removing the PCL.)
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN20) from the drum board.
(3) Press inward the hooks at the front and rear of the PCL
cover, and remove the PCL.
(8) Reinstall the separation claws in the opposite sequence
to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Separation ClawSolenoid Press-fit Assembly
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the drum and separation claw unit from the
drum unit.
(3) Disconnect the connector (CN34).
(4) Remove the two screws, then remove the separation
claw solenoid press-fit assembly.
Screws
Spring
Separation claws
(5) Reinstall the press-fit assembly in the opposite
sequence to removal.
E-ring
Connector (CN34)
Separation clawsolenoid press-fitass'y
Connector (CN20)
Charging wirecleaning motor (M7)
Charging corona unit
Drum
(4) Reinstall the PCL in the opposite sequence to removal.
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 75/290
2-59
MAIN BODY
Separation Claw Control
The separation claws are driven by SD4 (separation claws),and are controlled by the CB.
OperationDuring the separation discharge, SD4 goes ON, causing
the separation claws to touch the drum in order to help
separate the paper from the drum.
SignalsOutput signal
• SD4 DRIVE (CB −> SD4)
This is the SD4 drive control signal.
[L]: SD4 ON
[H]: SD4 OFF
PCL/PSL Control
The precharge exposure lamp (PCL) and transfer sync
exposure lamp (PSL) consist of LEDs which are controlled by
the control board (CB).
OperationThe PCL goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1
(main), and TSL with the drum motor (M4).
SignalsOutput signals
• PCL CONT (CB −> DB −> PCL)
This is the PCL ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: PCL ON
[H]: PCL OFF
• PSL CONT (CB −> PSL)This is the PSL ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: PSL ON
[H]: PSL OFF
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 76/290
2-60
Paper Guide Plate Control
A constant voltage is applied to the paper advance guide
plate in order to prevent toner from adhering to it.
Operation• ON/OFF timing
The paper guides go ON and OFF in synchronism with M4
(drum).
• Applied voltage
-500 VDC
SignalOutput signal
• GP CONT (CB −> HV1)
This controls the voltage that is applied to the paperadvance guide plate.
[L]: Voltage applied.
[H]: Voltage not applied.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 77/290
MAIN BODY
2-61
CORONA UNIT SECTION
Composition
Mechanisms
Mechanism
Charge
Transfer
Separation
Method
Scorotron (DC negative corona discharge)
Discharge wire: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.Grid plate: stainless steel 0.1 mm dia.
With auto wire cleaner
DC positive corona discharge
Discharge wires: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.
With auto wire cleaner
AC corona discharge
Discharge wires: tungsten 0.06 mm dia.
With auto wire cleaner
*1
*2
*1: Cleaning the charge corona wires
The charge corona unit has a wire cleaner. The charge wire
cleaning motor causes the charge wire cleaning block to
move back and forth, removing dirt from the wires.
Charge corona unit Transfer and separation corona unit
PCL
Charge wire cleaning knob
Charge wire cleaningmotor (M7)
Charge corona unit
Drum board
Transfercorona unit
Separationcorona unit
Separation corona bridge
Transfer and separationwire cleaning motor (M8)
Charge wire cleaningblock
Charge wires
Charge wirecleaning motor (M7)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 78/290
2-62
*2: Cleaning the transfer and separation wires
The transfer and separation corona unit has a wire cleaner.
The transfer and separation wire cleaning motor causes
the transfer and separation wire cleaning blocks to move
back and forth, removing dirt from the wires.
Removing and Reinstalling the Transfer andSeparation Corona UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
removed from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, and release the conveyance
lever.
(2) Remove the screw, then remove the transfer andseparation corona unit cover.
Screw
Transfer and separationcorona unit
Connector (CN168)
(5) Reinstall the transfer and separation corona unit in the
opposite sequence to removal.
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Charge Corona
UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
removed from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN21).
(3) Lift out the charge corona unit.
Connector (CN21)
(4) Reinstall the charge corona unit in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Separation wires
Transfer and separation
wire cleaning motor (M8)
Transfer wire cleaning block
Separation wirecleaning block
Transfer wire
Chargecorona unit
Transfer and separationcorona unit cover
Conveyance lever
Transfer and separationcorona unit
Screw
(3) Disconnect the connector (CN168).
(4) Remove the screw, then pull forward and remove the
transfer and separation corona unit.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 79/290
MAIN BODY
2-63
Removing and Reinstalling the Separation CoronaBridge
Procedure
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit
(2) Push in the six hooks at the rear of the back plate while
grasping then with a pair of tweezers, and remove the
separation corona bridge.
(3) Reinstall the separation corona bridge in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Cleaning the Charge Control PlateProcedure
(1) Remove the charge corona unit.
(2) Remove the two springs, then slide the charge control
plate toward the charge wire cleaning motor andremove it.
(3) Remove dirt from the charge control plate by gently
dabbing it with a piece of cloth moistened with drum
cleaner, then remove any remaining dirt with a blower
brush.
(4) Reinstall the charge control plate in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Replacing Charge Wire Cleaning Block (B)Procedure
(1) Remove the charge corona unit.
(2) Remove the charge control plate.
(3) Remove the two screws of the charge corona unit
(front).
(4) Lift out and remove charge wire cleaning block (B)
together with the spark arrestor plate (front).
(5) Reinstall charge wire cleaning block (B) in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Separation corona bridge
Hooks
Hooks
Charge wire control plate
Charge corona unit
Spring
Narrow
Wide
Charge wirecleaning block (B)
Spark arrestor plate (front)
Charge corona unit (front)
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 80/290
2-64
Replacing the Charge WireProcedure
(1) Remove the charge corona unit.
(2) Remove the charge control plate.
(3) Remove charge wire cleaning block (B).
(4) Remove the screw, then remove the spark arrestor
plate (rear).
(5) Remove the spring, then remove the charge wires.
(6) Reinstall the charge wires in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Replacing Charge Wire Block (A)Procedure
(1) Remove the charge corona unit.
(2) Remove the charge control plate.
(3) Remove charge wire cleaning block (B).
(4) Remove the charge wires.
(5) Turn the charge corona unit upside down, then remove
the stop ring, and remove charge wire cleaning block(A).
(6) Reinstall charge wire cleaning block (A) in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Replacing the Transfer and Separation Wire
Cleaning BlocksProcedure
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit.
(2) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front).
(3) Lift out and remove the the transfer wire cleaning blockand separation wire cleaning block.
(4) Reinstall the transfer and separation wire cleaning
blocks in the opposite sequence to removal.
Spark arrestor plate (rear)
Spark arrestor plate (front)
Transfer wire cleaning block
Transfer andseparationwire cleaningmotor (M8)Separation wire
cleaning block
Spring
Charge wire
Charge wire cleaningblock (A)
Charge wire cleaningmotor (M7)
Charge wire cleaningmotor (M7)
Charge wire cleaningblock (A) (rear)
Stop ringScrew
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 81/290
MAIN BODY
2-65
Procedure:
(1) Turn the copier OFF and remove the transfer/separation
corona from the main body.
(2) Check the position of the wire pressure pad of the
separation cleaning block assembly (refer to the
illustration). If the position of the pad is correct, go to step
(3). If the pad is not positioned correctly, replace the
separation cleaning block assembly.
(3) Apply a very small amount of grease (Plas Guard No. 2
p/n 00GR00020) to the slide groove of the wire pressure
pad.
Notes:
a) Do not disassemble the separation cleaning
block assembly when applying the grease to the
wire pressure pad. Also, do not apply grease to the
wire pressure pad of the transfer cleaning block
assembly.
b) Once this procedure has been performed, it doesn'
need to be repeated at subsequent PMs.
c) Do not perform this procedure on the transfe
cleaning block assembly or its wire pressure pad. I
this pad is positioned poorly, it is because of the
incorrect position of the separation cleaning block
assembly.
Replacing the Transfer and Separation WiresProcedure
(1) Remove the transfer and separation corona unit.
(2) Remove the separation corona bridge.
(3) Remove the spark arrestor plate (front).
(4) Remove the transfer wire cleaning block and the
separation wire cleaning block.
(5) Remove the spark arrestor plate (rear).(6) Remove the spring from each wire, then remove each
wire. Each wire comes away together with the support
rubber.
Separationwire cleaningblock
Spark arrestorplate (rear)
Spark arrestorplate (front)
Transfer wirecleaning block
Support rubber
Support rubber
Separationcorona bridge
Separationwires
Transfer wire
Spring
Transfer andseparation motor(M8)
(7) Reinstall the transfer and separation wires in the
opposite sequence to removal.
Transfer/Separation Corona MaintenanceTo enhance its performance and to help prevent arcing, keeping
this unit clean is important. If the cleaning block is not cleaned
properly (this problem was corrected in machines with seria
number 25SE04289 and above), the cleaning block can bind
resulting in code F22-2 (cleaning wire trouble) or other related
codes such as F35-1, F36-1, and F43-2. Improper cleaning o
the corona wire will also result in poor separation.The procedure below should be performed when poo
separation occurs, when code F22-2 occurs, and/or when the
machine is scheduled for a PM.
Caution: When cleaning the transfer/separation corona unit,do
not remove the transfer guide plate assembly (p/n 25SA-2660)
This part must be installed with a special fixture to correctly
position the part; this cannot be done in the field. An improperly
installed transfer guide plate may affect transfer/separation
performance.
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 82/290
2-66
Charge Control
High voltage unit 1 (HV1), which controls charging, operates by
means of control signals from the control board (CB), and
outputs a high voltage to the charge wires.
OperationCharging
A scorotron charging method is used. 24 VDC input from the
CB is raised to a negative DC high voltage which is then
discharged.
Charging correction by means of the grid voltage
The grid voltage is output from HV1 to the charge plate.
Signal
Input signal• F SIG (HV1 −> CB)
[L] is output when the spark detection circuit operates
and forcibly turns OFF the charge output.
Output signals
• C CONT (CB −> HV1)
This is the charge and grid voltage ON/OFF control
signal.
[L]: Charge and grid voltage ON
[H]: Charge and grid voltage OFF
• C SHIFT (CB −> HV1)
The charge corona unit output level is controlled by
means of analog signals from the CB.
• G SHIFT (CB −> HV1)
The charge grid voltage output level is controlled by
analog signals from the CB.
C SHIFT output range 4 to 10 V
Charging output range -600 to -900 µA
G SHIFT output range 4 to 10 V
Grid voltage output range -500 to -900 V
Transfer/Separation Control
S SHIFT (AC)
T SHIFT
Transfer and separation is controlled by the CB and highvoltage unit 2 (HV2).
OperationTransfer
A positive DC high voltage is used for transfer.
Separation
An AC high voltage is used for separation.
SignalsInput signals
• T SIG (HV2 −> CB)
[L] is output when the transfer spark detection circuit
operates.• S SIG (HV2 −> CB)
[L] is output when the separation spark detection
circuit operates.
Output signals
• T CONT (CB −> HV2)
This is the signal that turns the transfer corona unit ON/
OFF.
When this signal is [L], the transfer corona unit is ON.
• T SHIFT (CB −> HV2)
This is the transfer corona unit output level control
signal.
This signal controls the transfer corona unit output
level using analog signals from the CB.
Transfer shift output range 4 to 10 V
Transfer current voltage
output range50 to 600 µA
• S CONT (CB −> HV2)
This is the separation corona unit ON/OFF control
signal.
When this signal is [L], the separation corona unit is
ON.
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 83/290
MAIN BODY
2-67
• S SHIFT (AC) (CB −> HV2)
This is the separation corona unit output level control
signal.
This signal controls the separation corona unit output
level (AC component) using analog signals from the
CB.
• S SHIFT (DC) (CB −> HV2)
This is the separation corona unit output level control
signal.
This signal controls the separation corona unit output
level using analog signals from the CB.
S SHIFT (AC) output range 4 to 10 V
Separation AC voltage
output range4.0 to 5.7 kV
S SHIFT (DC) output range 4 to 10 V
Separation DC bias current
output range0 to -400 µA
M7 (Charge Wire Cleaning) Control
M7 (charge wire cleaning) is driven by the drum drive board
(DCDB) via the drum relay board (DB). The DCDB is controlled
by the CB.
Operation• M7 is used to drive the charge wire cleaning unit. Also,
the drive voltage and rotational speed of M7 are as
follows.
Drive voltage: 12 VDC
• Cleaning of the charge wire takes place if the fusing
temperature is less than 50°C when the machine is
switched ON.
• Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front sideof the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.
Forward stroke of cleaning operation
The forward stroke takes place when the M7 F/R signa
from the CB is [L] (forward rotation) and also the M7
CONT signal is [L].
Return stroke of cleaning operation
The return stroke of the cleaning operation takes place
when the M7 F/R signal from the CB is [H] (reverse
rotation) and also the M7 CONT signal is [L].
Home position Rear
Cleaning (forward)
Cleaning (return)
Home position (forward
stroke)Home position (return stroke)
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 84/290
2-68
M7 stop conditions
The M7 CONT signal becomes [H] and M7 stops when
the M7 LD signal becomes [L], regardless of whether M7
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
SignalsOutput signals
• M7 F/R (CB −> DCDB)This is the signal that determines the rotational direction
of M7.
L: Forward direction (home position −> rear)
H: Reverse direction (rear −> home position)
• M7 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the signal that controls the ON/OFF state of M7.
L: M7 ON
H: M7 OFF
• M7 DRIVE (DCDB −> DB −> M7)
This is the M7 drive signal.
Input signal
• M7 LD (DCDB −> CB)
If M7 locks, this signal becomes [L], and the CB changesthe direction of rotation of M7, or stops it.
M8 (Transfer/Separation Wire Cleaning)Control
M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) is driven by the drum
drive board (DCDB) which is controlled by the control board
(CB).
Operation• M8 is used to drive the transfer/separation wire cleaning
unit. The drive voltage and rotational speed of M8 are as
follows.
Drive voltage: 12 VDC
• Cleaning of the transfer/separation wire takes place if the
fusing temperature is less than 50°C when the machine is
switched ON.
• Cleaning operation
The home position of the cleaning unit is on the front side
of the machine. The cleaning unit operates as follows.
Forward stroke of cleaning operation
The forward stroke takes place when the M8 F/R signal
from the CB is [L] (forward rotation), and also the M8CONT signal is [L].
Return stroke of cleaning operation
The return stroke of the cleaning operation takes place
when the M8 F/R signal from the CB is [H] (reverse
rotation), and also the M8 CONT signal is [L].
M8 stop conditions
The M8 CONT signal becomes [H] and M8 stops when
the M8 LD signal becomes [L], regardless of whether M8
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
SignalsOutput signals
• M8 F/R (CB −> DCDB)
This is the signal that determines the rotational direction
of M8.
L: Forward direction (home position −> rear)
H: Reverse direction (rear −> home position)
• M8 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the signal that controls the ON/OFF state of M8.
L: M8 ON
H: M8 OFF
• M8 DRIVE (DCDB −> DB −> M8)
This is the M8 drive signal.
Input signal
• M8 LD (DCDB −> CB)If M8 locks, this signal becomes [L], and the CB changes
the direction of rotation of M8, or stops it.
Home position Rear
Cleaning (forward)
Cleaning (return)
Home position (forward stroke)
Home position (return stroke)
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 85/290
MAIN BODY
2-69
DEVELOPING UNIT
Composition
Mechanism
Mechanism
Developing
Developing biasDeveloper agitation
Method
2-component developer
DC negativeMain agitation;
Auxiliary agitation
Developing unit driveThe drive for the developing unit is divided into the drive for
the developing sleeve and that for the agitating section.
These parts are driven by the developing drive motor (M3)
and the agitator screw motor (M35), respectively.
Flow of developerThe developer inside the developing unit is supplied to the
developing sleeve by the agitator wheel, and maintained at
a constant thickness by the developing regulation plate
(bristle height regulation plate). The developer remainingon the developing sleeve is returned to the agitator screw.
Developing sleeve
Developing unit cover
Drum
Agitator screw
Toner density sensor(TDS)
Agitator screw
Developing sleeve
Toner absorption duct
Developing regulating plate
Separation coronabridge (upper)
Agitator wheel
Toner absorption duct
Developerregulation plate Agitator wheel
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 86/290
2-70
Disassembly/AssemblyScrews that must not be removed
(1) The two screws of the developer regulation plate
(2) The set screw for adjusting the magnet angle
Removing and Reinstalling the Developing UnitProcedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Release the developing push pressure levers (front
and rear). Then, disconnect the density sensor
connector.
(3) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
Replacing the developerCaution:
• When replacing the developer, take care that dirt does
not become mixed with it.
• If the developing sleeve is rotated, the developing
gear rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Never
rotate the developing gear in the clockwise
direction.Screws that must not be removed
Screws that must not be removed
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the developing unit from the drum unit.
(3) Release the hooks on the developing unit cover, then
lift up and remove the cover.
Hooks
(4) Reinstall the developing unit in the opposite sequence
to removal.
Developing gear
Developing sleeve
Developing unit
Developing push pressure lever
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 87/290
MAIN BODY
2-71
(4) Tilt the developing unit, then rotate the developing
gear in the counterclockwise direction until all of the
developer adhering to the inside of the developing unit
and the magnet roller is discharged.
(5) Add fresh developer evenly from the top of the agitator
screw.
(6) Rotate the agitator gear counterclockwise until all of
the developer enters the developing unit.
(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) until all of the developer has
been supplied to the developing unit.
(8) Rotate the developing gear in the counterclockwise
direction, and confirm that the developer bristles along
the entire length of the developing sleeve.
(9) Install the developing cover, then install the developing
unit on the drum unit.
Removing and Reinstalling the Toner ControlBoard Unit
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit from the main body.
(2) Remove the drum from the drum unit.
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the board
cover.
Developer
Developing gear
Developing gear
Developing sleeve
Agitator gear
Board coverScrews
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 88/290
2-72
M3 (Developing Drive) Control
M3 (developing drive) is controlled by the CB via the DC driverboard (DCDB).
OperationM3 is a 40 V drive DC motor which drives the developing
sleeve. M3 is PLL-controlled by feedback signals from a
speed sensor installed inside M3 itself, maintaining it at a
constant speed.
M3 goes ON after the specified time from when the start
print button is pressed, and goes OFF again after the
specified time from the completion of charge control.
Signals
Input signal• M3 LD (M3 −> DCDB −> CB)
This signal becomes [L] when M3 reaches the specified
speed.
Output signals
• M3 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 drive control signal.
[L]: M3 ON
[H]: M3 OFF
• M3 CLK (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 rotational speed control reference clock
signal.
• M3 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 rotational speed control gain switchingsignal.
[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm
[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm
(4) Remove the three screws, then remove the toner
control board unit.
(5) Disconnect the connector (CN19) from the toner control
board.
(6) Reinstall the toner control board unit in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Connector (CN19)
Toner control board unit
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 89/290
MAIN BODY
2-73
[5] M35 (Agitator Screw) Control
M35 (agitator screw) is controlled by the CB via the DC driverboard (DCDB).
OperationM35 is a 24 V DC motor which drives the agitator screw and
the agitator wheel. M35 is PLL-controlled using feedback
signals from the speed sensor installed inside M35,
maintaining it at a constant speed.
M35 goes ON when the start print button is pressed, and
goes OFF again when the last copy has been exited.
If the upper fixing roller does not reach the set temperature
within the specified time from the start of warmup, M35
goes ON/OFF in synchronism with M1 (main) until it goes
OFF at the completion of warmup.
SignalsInput signal
• M35 LD (M35 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M35 reaches the specified speed.
Output signal
• M35 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M35)
This is the M35 drive control signal.
[L]: M35 ON
[H]: M35 OFF
Developing Bias Control
The developing bias is controlled by the CB via high voltagepower supply 1 (HV1).
OperationThe developing bias is applied to the sleeve in synchronism
with M3 (developing drive).
Signals
Output signals• B CONT (CB −> HV1)
This is the developing bias ON/OFF control signal.
When this signal is [L], the developing bias goes ON,
and a high voltage is output.
• B SHIFT (CB −> HV1)This signal controls the output level of the developing
bias by means of analog signals from the CB.
B SHIFT output range 2 to 8 V
Bias voltage output range -400 to -700 VDC
ß
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 90/290
2-74
SignalsInput signals• TDS ANG (TDS −> CB)
An analog voltage proportional to the toner density is
output.
• M10 LD (M10 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M10 reaches the specified speed.
• M35 LD (M35 −> DCDB −> CB)[L] is output when M35 reaches the specified speed.
Output signals
• TDS CONT (CB −> TDS)
This is the TDS output voltage adjustment signal.
Output voltage adjustment: 4.9 to 9.8 V
• M10 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M10)
This is the M10 drive control signal.
Toner is supplied when M10 is ON.
[L]: M10 ON
[H]: M10 OFF
• M35 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M35)
This is the M35 drive control signal.
Toner is supplied when M35 is ON.
[L]: M35 ON
[H]: M35 OFF
Toner Density Control
The toner density is controlled by the toner density sensor
(TDS), M35 (agitator screw), M10 (toner supply) and the CB.
OperationToner density detection
The TDS detects the density of the toner in the developing
unit using an L detection method, and outputs an analog
voltage signal that is proportion to the density to the CB.
The CB compares the detected voltage with the reference
voltage corresponding to the initial density of the developer,
and judges the necessity of supplying toner.
Toner supply operation
M10 is driven by 24 VDC supplied from the DC driver board
(DCDB).
• When the power is switched ON
M35 (agitator screw) starts to rotate as soon as the
machine is switched ON, then after 3 minutes the toner
density is read. This density is compared with the initial
density of the developer, and if the density is low, toner
supply takes place.
• During a copy operation
The relationship between the TDS output voltage and
the toner supply time is as follows.
Sensor output voltage Supply time2 V or less 0 sec
2 to 2.11 V 0.24 sec
2.12 to 2.19 V 0.48 sec
2.20 to 2.29 V 0.72 sec
2.30 to 2.37 V 0.96 sec
2.38 to 2.45 V 1.20 sec
2.46 V or more 1.80 sec
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 91/290
MAIN BODY
2-75
Dmax Control/Drum Jam Control • Implementation timing
• When the power is switched ON
• Every 1000 copies
SignalsInput signals
• Dmax sig (TCSB −> CB)
This is the output voltage of the Dmax value detectionsensor on the TCSB.
Reference voltage: 1.5 V
• Dmax MONI (TCSB −> CB)
This signal monitors the light reflected from the surface
of the drum (without toner), and corrects the voltage
applied to the Dmax detection LED (calibration).
Reference voltage: 6 V (reflection from clean drum)
• DRUM JAM (TCSB −> CB)
This signal detects a jam caused by paper wrapping
around the drum. If it is more than 4.3 V, the CB judges
that a jam has occurred.
Implementation timing
Calibration takes place before Dmax correction.
• M3 LD (M3 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M3 reaches the specified speed.
• M4 LD (M4 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M4 reaches the specified speed.
Output signal
• Dmax LED CONT (CB −> TCSB)
DC voltage is supplied to the LED of PD1 by this line.
CB changes this voltage until Dmax MONI signal
becomes 6V.
• M3 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 drive control signal.
[L]: M3 ON
[H]: M3 OFF
• M3 CLK (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 rotational speed control reference clock
signal.
• M3 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 rotational speed control gain switching
signal.
[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm
[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm
• M4CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M4)
This is the M4 drive control signal.
[L]: M4 ON
[H]: M4 OFF• M4 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M4)
This is the M4 rotational speed switchover signal.
Normally [H]: 280 mm/sec
• DRUM JAM CONT (CB −> TCSB)
This signal controls the ON or OFF state of the wrapping
jam detection LED.
[L]: LED ON
[H] LED OFF
Dmax control is done by the toner control sensor board
(TCSB), M4 (drum), M3 (developer sleeve), and so on. These
parts are controlled by the CB.
OperationDmax control is intended to control the maximum density
for each machine based on the reference level.
• Contents of implementation
Latent images are created several times at the
maximum exposure, the images are developed whilethe rotational speed of the sleeve is varied, then each
density is read by the PDI on the TCSB.
The rotational speed of the sleeve when the density
reaches the reference level is stored in memory as the
optimum sleeve speed, then subsequently developing
is carried out at this sleeve speed until Dmax correction
takes place next.
Revised 3/9
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 92/290
2-76
Gray Scale Correction Control
Gray scale correction control is done by the toner control
sensor board (TCSB), M4 (drum), M3 (developer sleeve), and
so on. These parts are controlled by the CB.
OperationThe gray scale characteristics of the toner density versus
exposure amount at the image forming section of eachmachine is detected, and gradation correction processing
carried out in order to obtain a linear relation between the
original density and the copy density.
C o p y d e n s i t y
Original density
• Contents of implementation
Exposure is performed while the laser exposure is
varied over several steps, and development is
performed at the sleeve speed resulting from Dmax
correction.
Subsequently, each density is read by PD2 on the
TCSB, and the toner density and the gradation
characteristics of the toner density is detected.The gradation characteristics obtained here are used
as the correction values for the laser exposure amount.
• Implementation timing
• When the power is switched ON
SignalsInput signal
• γ signal (TCSB −> CB)
This is the output voltage from the gray scale detection
sensor (PD2) on the TCSB.
• M3 LD (M3 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M3 reaches the specified speed.
• M4 LD (M4 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when M4 reaches the specified speed.
Output signal
• γ LED CONT (CB −> TCSB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for the gray scale
detection LED.
[L]: LED ON
[H]: LED OFF
• M3 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 drive control signal.
[L]: M3 ON
[H]: M3 OFF
• M3 CLK (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 rotational speed control reference clock
signal.
• M3 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M3)
This is the M3 rotational speed control gain switching
signal.
[L]: 1000 to 2000 rpm
[H]: 532 to 1000 rpm
• M4CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M4)
This is the M4 drive control signal.
[L]: M4 ON
[H]: M4 OFF
• M4 H/L (CB −> DCDB −> M4)
This is the M4 rotational speed switchover signal.Normally [H]: 280 mm/sec
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 93/290
MAIN BODY
2-77
FM30 (Developing Suction) Control
FM30 (developing suction) is controlled by the CB via the DCdriver board (DCDB).
OperationFM30 is a 24 V DC motor.
It goes ON and OFF in synchronism with M1 (main).
SignalsInput signals
• FM30 LD (FM30 −> DCDB −> CB)
[L] is output when FM30 reaches the specified speed.
Output signals
• FM30 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for FM30.[L]: FM30 ON
[H]: FM30 OFF
• FM30 DRIVE (DCDB −> FM30)
This is the drive control signal for FM30.
[L]: FM30 OFF
[H]: FM30 ON
• FM30 H/L (DCDB −> FM30)
This is the FM30 rotational speed control signal.
This signal is always [L].
24VDC
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 94/290
2-78
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Composition
Mechanism
Toner supply
Toner level detectionToner agitating
Toner box
Toner leakageprevention
Mechanisms
*1
*2
Method
Screw conveyance
Piezoelectric method 185g±50gAgitator plate
Capacity 1330g
Toner supply shutter
*2: Toner supply shutterWhen installing the toner cartridge, move the toner supply
unit forward. This causes the toner supply port to close,
preventing leakage of toner. When you return the toner
supply unit to the main body (normal position), the toner
supply port coincides with the developing unit.
*1: Toner supply• The rotational force of the toner supply motor is
transmitted via gears to the toner conveyance screw
and the toner agitator shaft, causing the shaft to rotate.
• The toner that has been agitated by the plate installed
on the toner agitator shaft is supplied to the developing
unit.
Toner supply motor
Toner supply door
Toner box
Toner level detecting sensor (TLD)
Shutter
Toner conveyance screw
Shutter
Toner supply port
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 95/290
2-79
MAIN BODY
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Toner Supply Unit
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, loosen the screw, release the lock
of the toner supply unit, then pull forward the toner
supply unit.
(2) Loosen the screw shown at top left of the figure, and
remove the screw shown at bottom right, then removethe cover of the toner supply unit.
(4) Close the toner supply unit, then remove the e-ring.
(5) Pull out the shutter toward the bottom, then remove the
toner supply unit.
E-ring
Shaft
(3) Disconnect the two connectors (CN17 and 14).
Connector (CN17)
Connector (CN14)
(6) Reinstall the toner supply unit in the opposite se-
quence to removal.Toner supply unit cover
Screw
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 96/290
2-80
Toner Level Detection Control
Toner level detection control is done by the toner level detecting
sensor (TLD) and the CB.
OperationToner level detecting sensor
A piezoelectric device is used as the TLD.
When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low, the
supply toner signal is output to the CB. As a result, a
message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VRD2) con-
nected to OB2 (operation board 2).
Detection timing
The detection timing is as follows.
• When the machine is switched ON
• When the front door is opened and closed
• During a copy operation
SignalsInput signal
• TLD (TKD −> CB)
When the level of toner in the toner box becomes low,
this signal becomes [L], and a message is displayed on
the LCD connected to OB2.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 97/290
MAIN BODY
2-81
CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE UNIT
Composition
Mechanism
Drum cleaning
Toner recycle
Toner collection
Method
Cleaning blade
(weight type)Screw conveyance to the
developing unit
Toner guide roller
Mechanisms • Once the drum has been coated with setting powder,
carry out the following work before installing the drum
unit on the main body.
1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before
installing the drum in the drum unit, discharge the
the surface of the γ detecting sensor and the
Dmax sensor on the control board by using a
piece of cloth moistened with alcohol, thus
preventing toner from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing the drum in the drum unit, with the
charging corona unit and the developing unit
removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides
of the drum, then turn the drum one revolution.
This prevents setting powder from scattering onto
the charging corona unit and also prevents image
defects.
• Take care that the blade spacer mounted on the
cleaning blade shaft at the back does not drop out.
Note: Before removing the drum, in order to prevent the
toner from dropping, rotate cleaner gear (B)
counterclockwise and remove the toner remaining
between the drum and the guide roller. If the toner
cannot be removed, rotate the drum clockwise a bit,
then detatch the drum keeping the toner in place.
Cleaning blade
Toner conveyancescrew
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Cleaning BladeCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Caution:
• Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade with bare
hands.
• When installing the drum, the cleaning blade and theguide roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and the
cleaning blade with setting powder, regardless of
whether the drum and cleaning blade are new or old.
Also, apply toner to both edges of the cleaning blade.
guide roller
Cleaning blade
Toner conveyance screw
Toner recycle screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 98/290
2-82
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit.
(2) Remove the charging corona unit.
(3) Remove the two set screws, then remove the cleaner
cover.
Cleaner cover
Set screws
(6) Remove the screw, then remove the cleaning blade
from the blade mounting plate.
(7) Remove the blade spacer from the cleaning blade.
Blade spacer
Cleaning blade
Blade mountingplate
(4) Remove the blade rotation shaft.
Caution: Take care that the blade spacer does not drop out.
(5) Lift out the blade mounting plate.
Blade spacer
(8) Reinstall the cleaning blade in the opposite sequence
to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Guide RollerCaution:
• When installing the guide roller, it is necessary to set
the drum accurately in the center position. When the
drum used in this machine is removed, the drive shaft
remains in the main body, hence it is necessary to
center the drum using the two jigs inside the drum
cover.
Jig (large)Jig (small)
Drum cover
Blade rotationshaft bearing
Screw
Blade mounting plate
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 99/290
MAIN BODY
2-83
• When installing the drum, the cleaning blade and the
guide roller, coat the entire surface of the drum and
also the cleaning blade with setting powder, regard-
less of whether the drum and cleaning blade are new
or old. Also, apply toner to both edges of the cleaning
blade.
• Once the drum has been coated with setting powder,
carry out the following work before installing the drumunit on the main body.
1) To ensure that the toner density is correct, before
installing the drum in the drum unit, discharge the
surface of the γ detecting sensor and the Dmax
sensor on the control board by using a piece of
cloth moistened with alcohol, thus preventing
toner from adhering to the sensors.
2) After installing hte drum in the drum unit, with the
charging corona unit and the developing unit
removed, insert the centering jigs into both sides
of the drum, then turn the drum one revolution.
This prevents setting powder from scattering onto
the charging corona unit and also prevents image
defects.
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit.
(2) Remove the charge corona unit, the blade mounting
plate, the developing unit and the drum from the drum
unit.
Note: Before removing the drum, rotate cleaner idler gear
(B) counterclockwise in order to prevent toner from
dropping to the bottom of the unit, and also remove
any toner between the drum and the guide roller. If
the toner cannot be removed, rotate the drum
clockwise a bit, then detatch the drum keeping the
toner in place.
(3) Remove cleaner idler gear (B) and the two springs.
(4) Remove the left and right screws (one each), then
remove the left and right shaft positioning pieces.
(5) Lift out the guide roller.
Shaft positioning piece
(6) Remove any toner that has dropped off the guide
roller.
(7) Install the guide roller and the two shaft positioning
pieces, then secure them temporarily with the two
screws.
Shaft positioning piece
(8) Install the drum, then insert the centering jigs into both
sides of the drum.
(9) Install the two springs, bring the guide roller into
contact with the drum, then secure the guide roller
securely by fully tightening the two screws that you
secured temporarily.
(10)Install the cleaning blade.
(11)Rotate the drum one revolution.
(12)Remove the centering jigs from both sides of the drum
and store them inside the drum cover.
(13)Install the charging corona unit and developing unit.
(14) Install the drum unit in the main body.
Screw
Screw
Springs
Clean idler gear (B)
Drum
Jig (small)
Jig (large)
Guide roller
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 100/290
2-84
Mechanism
Paper stack
Paper lift pressure
reduction
Paper lift-up
Double feed prevention
Cassette loading1st paper feed
PAPER FEED UNIT
Composition
*1
*2
*3
Method
Tray (2-stage)
Swivel roller
Paper lift-up plate
Torque limiter
Front loadingFeed roller, 1st paper feed sole-
noid
Mechanisms
*4
*5
Method
Registration roller, 2nd paper feed
clutch
Feed roller, bypass paper feed sole-
noid
Cassette detection switch
(upper cassette: tact switch,(lower cassette: write paper size to
memory.)
Index sheet
Mechanism
2nd paper feed
Multi tray paper
feed
Paper size
detection
Remaining paper
indication
Double feed prevention roller
Bypass feed rollerDouble feed prevention roller
Feed roller
Paper feed roller
Paper feed roller
Feed roller
Double feedprevention roller
Paper feed motorBypass plate
1st paper feed solenoid(upper)
1st paper feed solenoid(lower)
Paper lift-up plate
Paper lift-up plate
Paper feed
clutch (lower)
Conveyanceclutch
Paper feedclutch (upper)
Bypassclutch
Bypasspaper feedsolenoid
Bypass feed roller
Upper traymotor
Lower traymotor
2nd paper feed clutch
2nd paper feed
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 101/290
MAIN BODY
2-85
*1: Swivel rollerThe paper feed direction and the cassette loading direction
are at right angles to each other. Consequently, if the feed
roller is fixed, it will touch the paper when the cassette is
removed, resulting in possible paper jamming. To prevent
this, the swivel roller (paper feed roller) is designed so that
it drops down and touches the paper only when paper feed
is taking place.
*3: Paper up/down base release operationWhen the tray is being removed, the projection on the right
side of the tray strikes the paper up/down base release
lever, causing the paper lift-up gear to be disengaged by
the gear coupling lever. As a result, the up/down base falls
under its own weight.
Paper feed roller
Paper feed swivel plate
Paper feed solenoid
*2: Paper lift-upWhen the paper feed tray is installed, the paper lift-up plate
is moved by the tray motor, paper feed idler gear and the
paper lift-up gear, causing the paper in the tray to be fed
automatically to the paper feed position.
Paper
Swivel roller
Paper lift-up plate
Tray projection
*4: Paper size detectionThe side guide and rear guide of the upper tray move,
causing the paper size detection knob to move as well. As
a result, the switch on the detection board is turned ON/
OFF. In this way, paper size detection takes place auto-
matically.
Paper size detection knob
Up/downbase releaselever
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 102/290
2-86
*5: Remaining paper indicationThe amount of paper remaining in the tray can be checked
by looking through the remaining paper indicator window.
The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the
up/down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused
to slide by a tension spring.
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Paper Feed UnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door; then pull out the upper/lower tray
in the forward direction.
(2) Loosen the five screws; then remove the right sideupper cover.
(3) Loosen the two screws; then remove the right side
lower cover.
(4) Disconnect the two connectors (CN7 and CN144)
connected to the control board, and also the
intermediate connector (CN33); then remove the paper
feed wiring from the cord clamp.
(5) Remove the four screws; then remove the paper feedunit.
(6) Reinstall the paper feed unit in the opposite sequence
for removal.
Index sheet
Tension spring
Tray
Remaining paperdetection lever
Right side lower cover
Screws
Screws
Connector(CN7)
Screws
Connector(CN144)
Paper feed andconveyance door
Connector (CN33)
Screws
Right sideupper cover
Screw (behindbypass feed)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 103/290
MAIN BODY
2-87
Removing and Reinstalling the Bypass Feed Basea. Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the screw and bypass feed base shaft bear-
ing, then remove the bypass feed base.
(4) Remove each e-ring, then pull out each roller from the
shaft.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller (paper feed rubber
and paper supply rubber).
Paper feed rubberBypass paperfeed MC
(3) Reinstall the bypass feed base in the opposite se-
quence to removal.
Replacing the Rubber of the Bypass Feed Roller/
Bypass Paper Feed RollerProcedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Disconnect the connectors of the bypass paper feed
MC and the bypass no paper detecting PS (CN233
and 47).
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the bypass paperfeed unit.
(6) Reinstall each rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on each rubber.)
Replacing the rubber (paper supply rubber) of thebypass feed double feed prevention roller
Procedure
(1) Remove the bypass paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the bypass feed base.
(3) Cut the three wiring bands so as to free the wiring.
(4) Remove the e-ring, then remove the bypass feed lift-
up gear.
Wiring
Wiring bands
Bypass feed top plate
E-ring
Bypass feed lift-up gear
Bypass paper feed roller
E-ring
Paper supply rubber
Bypass feed roller
Paint mark
Bypass feed base
Bypass feed baseshaft bearing
Screw
Bypass feed roller
Bypass no paper detecting PS
Bypass paper feed MC
CN47
CN233
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 104/290
2-88
(5) Remove the spring, then remove the e-ring, and
remove the actuator.
(6) Pull out the pin.
(7) Remove the four screws, then remove the bypass feed
top plate.
(8) Remove the four screws, then free the bypass feed
bottom plate.
(9) Lift the bypass feed bottom plate using the shaft side
as a pivot.
(10)Remove the e-ring.
(11)Open the guide plate to the bottom, then remove thedouble feed prevention roller.
(12)Remove the paper supply rubber from the double feed
prevention roller.
(13)Reinstall the bypass double feed prevention roller
rubber. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark on
the rubber.)
Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Paper Feed
Roller and the Feed RollerProcedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the three screws, then remove the upper
cassette rail (front).
Screws
Cassette rail (front)
Actuator
Bypass feed topplate
Shaft
Bypass feed bottom plate
E-ring
Spring
Guide plate
Bypass feed bottom plate
E-ringPaint mark
Double feedprevention roller
Paper supply rubber
Pin
Screws (at opposite side as well)
Screws (at opposite side as well)
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 105/290
MAIN BODY
2-89
Replacing the Rubber of the Upper Stage PaperFeed Double Feed Prevention Roller (double feed
prevention rubber)Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the upper cassette rail (front).
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the double feed
prevention roller unit.
Double feed prevention roller unit
(4) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft and
remove the double feed prevention roller.
(5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
double feed prevention roller.
E-rings
Shaft
Double feedprevention roller
Double feed rubber
(6) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on the rubber.)
Paint mark
(3) Remove the two e-rings, then shift the left and right
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the upper
stage 1st paper feed roller unit.
E-ring
Paper feed roller
Shaftbearing
Feed roller
Shaft bearing
E-ring
(4) Pull out the three e-rings, the three shaft bearings, the
paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the
paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber (A)
and the double feed prevention rubber).
E ring
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearing
Paper feedreferenceactuator
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller
(feed rubber (A))
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearingFeed roller(double feedprevention rubber)
Shaft bearing
Paint mark
(6) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on each rubber.)
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 106/290
2-90
Replacing the Rubber for the Lower Paper FeedRoller and the Feed Roller
Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the upper cassette rail (front).
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the lower
cassette rail (front).
(5) Pull out the three e-rings, the three shaft bearings, the
paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the
paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(6) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber (A)
and the double feed prevention rubber).
(7) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on each rubber.)
Replacing the Lower Stage Paper Feed DoubleFeed Prevention Roller (Double Feed PreventionRubber)
Procedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the upper and lower cassette rails (front).
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the double feedprevention roller unit.
(4) Remove the three e-rings, then shift the left and right
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the lower
stage 1st paper feed roller unit.
Screws
Cassette rail (front)
Set screw
E-ring
Shaftbearing
Paper feed roller
E-ring
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearing
Paper feedreferenceactuator
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller(feed rubber (A))
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearingFeed roller(double feedprevention rubber)
Shaft bearing
Paint mark
Double feed prevention roller unit
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 107/290
2-91
MAIN BODY
(4) Reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch in the
opposite sequence to removal. (Do not forget to insert
the pin inside of clutch.)
(4) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft and
remove the double feed prevention roller.
(5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
double feed prevention roller.
Removing and Reinstalling the 2nd Paper FeedUnitCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been
unplugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Remove the drum unit, transfer/separation unit, and
paper feed unit.
(2) Remove the flywheel.(3) Disconnect the connector (CN86).
(4) Remove the screw, then remove the rotation stopper
of the 2nd paper feed clutch (MC3).
Caution: DO NOT touch the drum drive gear with a screw-
driver when removing the screws.
(5) Loosen the screw, then remove the 2nd paper feed
clutch and the gear. (Clutch and gear are one part.)
E-rings
Shaft
Double feedprevention roller
Double feed rubber
Connector (CN86)2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)
(6) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on the rubber.)
Replacing the Intermediate Conveyance ClutchProcedure
(1) Remove the paper feed unit.
(2) Disconnect the connector (CN234).
(3) Remove the e-ring, then remove the intermediate
conveyance clutch (MC8).
Connector (CN234)
E-ringsintermediate conveyanceclutch (MC8)
2nd paper feed clutch (MC3)
Gear
Screw
Rotationstopper
Drum drive gear
Screw
Paint mark
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 108/290
2-92
(6) Remove the three intermediate connectors (CN42, 71
and 85).
(7) Remove the two screws on the front and back, thenpull out and remove the 2nd paper feed unit.
Connector (CN42)
Connector (CN71)
Connector (CN85)
(8) Reinstall the 2nd paper feed unit in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Upper TrayProcedure
(1) Withdraw the upper tray, then remove the three screws.
(2) Withdraw the upper tray further, then lift it out.
2nd paper feed unit
Screw
Upper trayScrew
Screws
(3) Reinstall the upper tray in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Lower TrayProcedure
(1) Withdraw the lower tray, then remove the three screws.
(2) Withdraw the lower tray further, then lift it out.
Lower tray
Screws
Screw
(3) Reinstall the upper tray in the opposite sequence to
removal.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 109/290
2-93
MAIN BODY
The 1st paper feed takes place as a result of the transmission
of drive force from M13 (paper feed) via MC5 (1st paper feed(upper)), MC6 (1st paper feed (lower)) and MC7 (bypass paper
feed) to the respective paper feed rollers. At this time, the
paper feed rollers are not touching the paper, hence the swivel
roller and the by-pass plate are moved up and down by SD1
(1st paper feed (upper), SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)) and SD3
(bypass paper feed), causing each roller to touch the paper.
Control of each roller is done by the control board (CB). The
2nd paper feed is done by MC3. Related signals are PS11
(conveyance door), PS14 (registration), PS18 (no feed), PS19
(optics sync), PS20 (pre-feed (upper)), PS21 (pre-feed (lower))
and PS30 (bypass).
Operation
1st paper feed operation timing• 1st copy start
Timing that is determined by the P counter from when
the charging corona unit goes ON
• 2nd copy start
After the specified period from when PS14 (registra-
tion) goes ON for the 1st copy
• OFF timing
Specified count on the P counter
Intermediate conveyance control
The paper fed from the upper and lower trays is conveyed
by the rotational power of M13 to the 2nd paper feed section
by MC8 (conveyance). This conveyance section is alsoused for feeding paper from the ADU and LCT. However,
it not used for bypass paper feed.
• MC8 ON timing
When PS20 or PS21 is ON
• MC8 OFF timing
After the specified period from when PS14 goes ON.
Paper Feed Control
DCPS1
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 110/290
2-94
2nd paper feed control
The paper conveyed to the 2nd paper feed section stops
after the specified period from when PS14 goes ON (loop
formation).
• MC3 ON timing
• Direct exposure scan copying
(When supefine mode is selected.)
(1st copy in either normal or fine mode withplatenmode or RADF (1-1) mode.)
After the specified period from when PS4 (paper
feed restart) goes ON
• Copying in the E-RDH mode
(2nd and subsequent copies in either normal or
fine mode with platen mode or RADF (1-1).)
(All copies in RADF (1-2, 2-1, 2-2) mode)
After the specified period from when PS18 goes
ON, or after the specified period from when MC7
(bypass paper feed) goes ON
Signals
Input signals
• PS11 (PS11 −> CB)
This is the conveyance door open/close detection
signal.
[L]: Door is closed
[H]: Door is open
• PS18 (PS18 −> CB)
When the tray, LCT, or ADU is used, the image data
from the E-RDH determines the laser write timing.
Laser write starts after the specified period from when
PS18 goes ON.
Also, during LCT or ADU paper feed, when the paper
turns PS19 (optics sync) ON, the CB checks the ON or
OFF state of PS18, and if PS18 was turned ON by the
previous sheet of paper, the CB stops the paper
momentarily at the predetermined position after PS19
ON. After the paper has passed PS18, paper feed
restarts.
[L]: Paper is detected
[H]: Paper is not detected
• PS14 (PS14 −> CB)
The paper detection signal is used for detecting the
paper feed temporary stop position.
PS14 goes ON and outputs [L] when paper is detected
at the paper feed temporary stop position.
• PS30 (PS30 −> CB)This is the jam detection sensor.
[L]: Paper is detected
[H]: Paper is not detected
• PS20/21 (PS21/21 −> CB)
This is the sensor which determines the operation
timing of MC8 (conveyance CL) (paper is conveyed as
far the 2nd paper feed section).
MC8 goes ON when PS20 or PS21 is ON.
• PS19 (PS19 −> CB)
During continuous paper feed from the LCT/ADU, the
CB checks the state of PS18 (no feed) when the paper
reaches the specified position past PS19, and if the
previous sheet of paper is still at PS18, the CB tempo-
rarily stops paper feed.
Paper feed restarts after the trailing edge of the previ-
ously fed paper has passed PS18 (no feed).
• M13 FB (M13 −> DCDB)This is a feedback signal from the rotational speed
sensor contained in M13. This signal is compared with
the M13 CLK signal input from the CB, and the differ-
ence used to control the rotational speed of M13.
Output signals
• SD1 DRIVE (CB −> SD1)
This is the SD1 drive control signal.
[L]: SD1 ON
[H]: SD1 OFF
• SD2 DRIVE (CB −> SD2)
This is the SD2 drive control signal.
[L]: SD2 ON
[H]: SD2 OFF
• SD3 DRIVE (CB −> SD3)
This is the SD3 drive control signal.
[L]: SD3 ON
[H]: SD3 OFF
• MC5 DRIVE (CB −> MC5)
This is the MC5 drive control signal.
[L]: MC5 ON
[H]: MC5 OFF
• MC6 DRIVE (CB −> MC6)
This is the MC6 drive control signal.
[L]: MC6 ON
[H]: MC6 OFF
• MC7 DRIVE (CB −> MC7)
This is the MC7 drive control signal.
[L]: MC7 ON
[H]: MC7 OFF
• MC8 DRIVE (CB −> MC8)
This is the MC8 drive control signal.
[L]: MC8 ON
[H]: MC8 OFF
• M13 DRIVE (DCDB −> M3)
This is the power supply line to M13.
• M13 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the M13 ON/OFF control signal.[L]: M13 ON
[H]: M13 OFF
• M13 CLK (CB −> DCDB)
This is the M13 rotational speed control reference
clock signal.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 111/290
2-95
MAIN BODY
Paper Up/Down Control
When a paper feed tray is inserted, M17 (upper tray) or M18
(lower tray) goes ON for a fixed period, raising the bottom plate
in the tray.
Related signals are PS16 (upper tray upper limit detection),
and PS17 (lower tray upper limit detection).
OperationON timing
M17 or M18 is turned ON by the paper size detecting
sensor.
OFF timing
M17 or M18 is turned OFF by PS16 or PS17 going ON.
SignalsInput signals
• PS16 (PS16 −> CB)
This is the upper tray upper limit detection signal.
The paper in the upper tray is raised by M17, and when
it reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes
[L].
• PS17 (PS17 −> CB)
This is the lower tray upper limit detection signal.
The paper in the upper tray is raised by M18, and whenit reaches the upper limit position this signal becomes
[L].
Output signals
• M17 DRIVE (CB −> M17)
This is the M17 drive control signal.
[L]: M17 ON
[H]: M17 OFF
• M18 DRIVE (CB −> M18)
This is the M18 drive control signal.
[L]: M18 ON[H]: M18 OFF
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 112/290
2-96
The size of the paper in the upper tray is detected as a result
of the matrix circuit in the CB detecting the signal from the
paper size detection board.
OperationTray (upper) paper size detection
The paper size detection board has four switches which
detect the position of the rear guide in the tray (upper). The
paper size is detected according to the particular ON-OFF
combination of these switches.
The relation between the state of the switches on the paper
size detection board and the paper size is shown below.
Paper Size Detection Control
D
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
B
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
A
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Paper size
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11
8.5x5.5
-
8.5x11R
8.5x5.5R
SignalsInput signals
• PAPER SIZE RETURN 0 to 3 (paper size detection
board −> CB)
This is the paper size detection switch ON/OFF signal.
b. Output signals
• TEMP 1 (CB −> paper size detection board)These are the upper tray paper size detection timing
pulses.
• TEMP 2 (CB −> paper size detection board)
These are the lower tray detection timing pulses.
Tray (lower) paper size settingThe size of paper in the tray (lower) is set in the 25 mode.
(Refer to the adjustment section.)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 113/290
2-97
MAIN BODY
No Paper Detection Control
No paper detection takes place by PS12 (upper tray no paper
detection), PS13 (lower tray no paper detection) and PS15
(bypass no paper detection) which are controlled by the CB.
OperationNo paper detection control
When a paper feed tray or the bypass feed tray becomes
empty, PS12, PS13 or PS15 goes ON. As a result, the
corresponding LED on operation board 1 (OB1) lights, and
a message is displayed on the LCD (VFD1, VFD2) con-
nected to operation board 2 (OB2).
SignalsInput signals
• PS12 (PS12 −> CB)
This is the upper tray no paper detection signal.
[L]: No paper in tray
[H]: Paper in tray
• PS13 (PS13 −> CB)
This is the lower tray no paper detection signal.
[L]: No paper in tray
[H]: Paper in tray
• PS15 (PS15 −> CB)
This is the bypass feed tray no paper detection signal.[L]: No paper in tray
[H]: Paper in tray
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 114/290
2-98
LCT 1000 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION
Composition
Mechanism
Feed
1st paper feed
Double feed prevention
No paper detection
Paper size detection
Paper conveyance
Conveyance drive
*1
Method
Roller swiveling
1st paper feed roller; paper feedsolenoid, paper feed clutch
Torque limiter
Photosensor
None
Roller conveyance
Timing belt
*1: Roller swivelingTo prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper
and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being
removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops
down and touches the paper only when paper feed is takingplace.
This operation takes place as a result of the LCT paper feed
solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.
Mechanisms
Paper feed swivel plate
Upper limit detection actuator
Conveyance roller (upper)
Feed roller
LCT paper feed SD (SD141)
Paper feed roller
No paper detecting actuator
LCT 1st paper feed CL (CL1)
LCT conveyance PS (PS144)
Feed roller
LCT paper feedSD (SD141)
Paper feed roller
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 115/290
2-99
MAIN BODY
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the 1000 Tray/Conveyance SectionCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then withdraw the LCT1000 tray/
LCT1500 tray in the forward direction.(2) Loosen the four screws, then remove the right side
upper cover.
(3) Loosen the two screws, then remove the right side
lower cover.
(4) Disconnect the two intermediate connectors (CN722,
728).
(5) Remove the four screws, then remove the LCT1000
paper feed/conveyance section.
LCT1000 tray paper feed/ conveyance section
LCT1500 tray
CN722
CN728
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Paper feed rollerE-ring
Shaft bearing
LCT 1000 tray
(6) Reinstall the 1000 tray paper feed/conveyance sec-
tion in the opposite sequence to removal.
Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller and
the Feed RollerProcedure
(1) Remove the LCT1000 paper feed/conveyance sec-
tion.
(2) Remove the two e-rings, then shift the left and right
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the paper
feed roller unit.
(3) Pull out the three e-rings, the three shaft bearings, thepaper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the
paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(4) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber (A)
and the double feed prevention rubber).
E-ring
Shaft bearing
Shaft bearing
Paper feedreferenceactuator
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller(feed rubber (A))
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearingFeed roller(double feedprevention rubber)
Shaft bearing
Paint mark
(5) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on each rubber.)
E-ring
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 116/290
2-100
Replacing the Rubber of the Double Feed
Prevention RollerProcedure
(1) Remove the four screws, then remove the LCT1000
paper/conveyance section.
(2) Loosen the two screws, then remove the LCT convey-
ance door.
(4) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft, and
remove the double feed prevention roller.
(5) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
double feed prevention roller.
Screw
LCT conveyance door
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the double feed
prevention roller unit. (When reinstalling the roller,
push it downward and secure it.)
Double feed prevention roller unit
(6) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on the rubber, and also the direction in which you push
down the double feed prevention roller unit.)
Paint mark
E-ring
Double feed preventionroller
Shaft
Double feedprevention roller
Push-downdirection
Screw
Screws Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 117/290
2-101
MAIN BODY
1000 Tray Paper Feed/No PaperDetection Control
The 1st paper feed from the 1000 tray takes place as a result
of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper
feed) by means of CL1 (LCT 1st paper feed (1000)). The paper
feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD141 (LCT
1st paper feed (1000)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller
into contact with the paper.
M140, CL1 and SD141 are driven by the DC driver board
(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB. Related signals arePS141 (LCT no paper detection (1000)), PS144 (LCT
conveyance (1000)), and PS210 (LCT pre-feed (1000)).
Operation1st paper feed operation timing
• Start of paper feed for 1st copy
Timing determined by the P counter from when the
charging corona unit goes ON
• Start of paper feed for 2nd copy
After the specified period from when PS14 (registra-
tion) goes ON during the 1st copy operation.
• OFF timing
Specified count on the P counter
No paper detection control
When the copy paper in the LCT1000 tray runs out, PS141
goes ON, the corresponding LED on operation board 1
(OB1) lights, and a message appears on the LCD (VFD1,
VFD2) connected to operation board 2 (OB2).
SignalsInput signals
• M140 brake state signal
[H]: Brake ON
[L]: Brake OFF
• PS141 (PS141 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the no paper detection signal from the 1000
tray.[H]: No paper in tray
[L]: Paper in tray
• PS144 (PS144 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the paper passage detection signal from the
1000 tray conveyance section.
This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the
1000 tray conveyance section.
• PS210 (PS210 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the 1st paper feed detection signal from the
1000 tray.
This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
Output signals
• M140 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M140)
This is the M140 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: M140 OFF
[L]: M140 ON
• M140 PLL (CB −> DCDB −> M140)
This is the PLL control clock signal for M140.
• CL1 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for CL1.
[H]: CL1 OFF
[L]: CL1 ON
• SD141 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for SD141.
[H]: SD141 OFF
[L]: SD141 ON
• CL1 DRIVE (DCDB −> CL1)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for CL1.
[H]: CL1 OFF
[L]: CL1 ON
• SD141 CONT (DCDB −> SD141)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for SD141.
[H]: SD141 OFF
[L]: SD141 ON
CL1
CL1 CONT
CL1
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 118/290
2-102
LCT 1500 TRAY PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION
Composition
Mechanism
Feed
1st paper feed
Double feed prevention
No paper detection
Paper size detection
Paper conveyance
Conveyance drive
*1
Method
Roller swivel
1st paper feed roller, paper feedsolenoid
Torque limiter
Photo sensor
None
Roller conveyance
Timing belt
Feed roller
Mechanisms
Horizontal conveyance rollers
Paper feed rollerLCT paper feed SD (SD140)
No paper detection actuator
Upper limit detection actuator
LCT 1st paper feed CL (CL2)
*1: Roller swivelingTo prevent the 1st paper feed roller from touching the paper
and causing a paper jam when the paper tray is being
removed, the paper feed roller is designed so that it drops
down and touches the paper only when paper feed is takingplace.
This operation is takes place as a result of the LCT paper
feed solenoid driving the paper feed swivel plate.
Paper feed roller
Feed roller
Paper feed swivel plateLCT paper feed SD(SD140)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 119/290
MAIN BODY
2-103
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the 1500 Tray PaperFeed/Conveyance SectionCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the LCT1000 tray/LCT1500 tray in the for-
ward direction.(2) Withdraw the LCT1500 tray paper feed/conveyance
section in the forward direction, then withdraw it further
and lift it out.
(3) Remove the two e-rings, then shift the left and right
shaft bearings to the outside, and remove the upper
stage 1st paper feed roller unit.
LCT1500 trayconveyance section
(3) Reinstall the 1500 tray paper feed/conveyance sec-
tion in the opposite sequence to removal.
Replacing the Rubber of the Paper Feed Roller and
Feed RollerProcedure
(1) Remove the LCT1500 paper feed/conveyance sec-
tion.
(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the conveyance
cover.
Conveyance cover
Feed roller
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Paper feed roller
Shaft bearing
E-ring
(4) Pull out the three e-rings, the three shaft bearings, the
paper feed reference actuator and the two shafts of the
paper feed roller unit, then remove each roller.
(5) Remove the rubber from each roller (feed rubber (A)
and the double feed prevention rubber).
E-ring
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearing
Paper feedreferenceactuator
Shaft bearing
Paper feed roller(feed rubber (A))
Shaft bearing
E-ring
Shaft bearingFeed roller(double feedprevention rubber)
Shaft bearing
Paint mark
(6) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on each rubber.)
Screw
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 120/290
2-104
Replacing the Rubber of the Double FeedPrevention Roller
Procedure
(1) Remove the LCT 1500 paper feed/conveyance sec-
tion.
(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the double feed
prevention roller. (When reinstalling the roller unit,
push it against the rear and secure it.)
1500 Tray Paper Feed/No PaperDetection Control
The 1st paper feed from the 1500 tray takes place as a result
of the transmission of the rotational force of M140 (LCT paper
feed) by means of CL2 (LCT 1st paper feed (1500)). The paper
feed roller does not touch the paper at this time, so SD140 (LCT
1st paper feed (1500)) swivels, bringing the paper feed roller
into contact with the paper.
M140, CL2 and SD140 are driven by the DC driver board
(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB. Related signals arePS140 (LCT no paper detection (1500)), PS146 (LCT
conveyance (1500)), and PS200 (LCT pre-feed (1500)).
Operationa. 1st paper feed operation timing
• Start of paper feed for 1st copy
Timing determined by the P counter from when the
charging corona unit goes ON
• Start of paper feed for 2nd copy
Specified period after PS14 (registration) goes ON
during the 1st copy operation
• OFF timing
Specified count on the P counter
Double feed prevention roller unit
(3) Remove the three e-rings, then pull out the shaft and
remove the double feed prevention roller.
(4) Remove the double feed prevention rubber from the
double feed prevention roller.
Paint mark
E-ring
Double feed preventionroller
Shaft
Double feedprevention roller
(5) Reinstall the rubber in the opposite sequence to
removal. (Be careful of the direction of the paint mark
on the rubber, and also the direction in which you push
the double feed prevention roller unit.)
Pushing direction
Screws
CL2
CL2 CONT
CL2
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 121/290
MAIN BODY
2-105
No paper detection control
When the copy paper in the LCT1500 tray runs out, PS140
goes ON, the corresponding LED on operation board 1
(OB1) lights, and a message appears on the LCD (VFD1,
VFD2) connected to operation board 2 (OB2).
2. Signals
a. Input signals• M140 BRAKE (M140 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the M140 brake state signal.
[H]: Brake ON
[L]: Brake OFF
• PS140 (PS140 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the no paper detection signal from the 1500
tray.
[H]: No paper in tray
[L]: Paper in tray
• PS146 (PS146 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the paper passage detection signal from the
1500 tray conveyance section.
This signal is [L] while paper is passing through the
1500 tray conveyance section.
• PS200 (PS200 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the 1st paper feed detection signal from the
1500 tray.
This signal becomes [L] when paper is detected.
Output signals
• M140 CONT (CB −> DCDB −> M140)
This is the M140 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: M140 OFF
[L]: M140 ON
• M140 PLL (CB −> DCDB −> M140)
This is the PLL control clock signal for M140.
• CL2 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for CL2.
[H]: CL2 OFF
[L]: CL2 ON
• SD140 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for SD140.
[H]: SD140 OFF
[L]: SD140 ON
• CL2 DRIVE (DCDB −> CL2)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for CL2.
[H]: CL2 OFF
[L]: CL2 ON
• SD140 CONT (DCDB −> SD140)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for SD140.
[H]: SD140 OFF
[L]: SD140 ON
Rev. 4/96
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 122/290
2-106
LCT PAPER TRAY
Composition
Mechanism
Paper lift-up
Paper lift-upCassette loading
Remaining paper indication
*1
*2
Method
Tray 1 stage
Wire driveFront loading
Index sheet
*1: Paper lift-upThe paper tray is suspended by four up/down drive wires
(wires (A) and (B) — two each).
When paper is supplied to the tray, the tray drops under the
weight of the paper, however the weight of the paper is
balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive spring.
When the paper tray is loaded, the tray motor (M402, M403)
rotates, and the wire is wound up on the drive reel, causing
the tray to rise.
When the paper tray is withdrawn from the pedestal, the
coupling between the tray and the tray drive section is
released, hence the tray falls to a position where the weight
of the paper is balanced by the tension of the auxiliary drive
spring.
*2: Remaining paper indicationThe LCT can hold a large amount of paper; it has a
remaining paper indicator window to enable the user to
obtain a rough indication of the amount of paper remaining
in the tray.The remaining paper detection lever moves along with the
up/down motion of the tray, and the index sheet is caused
to slide by a tension spring.
Mechanisms
1500 tray
Remaining paper indicator window
Side guideRear stopper
Tray
Front cover
Remaining paperindicator window
Rear stopper
Tray
Side guides
1000 trayFront cover
Wire (A)
Tray motor(M141, M142)
Drive pulley
Drive pulley
Auxiliary drive pulley
Coupling gear
Auxiliary wire
Wire (B)
Tray
Wire (B)
Wire (A)
Index sheet
Remaining paperindication lever
Tray
Tension spring
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 123/290
MAIN BODY
2-107
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the 1000 TrayCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the 1000 tray, then remove the four screws.
(2) Lift out the 1000 tray.
Removing and Reinstalling the 1500 trayCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the 1500 tray, then remove the four screws.
(2) Lift out the 1500 tray.
(3) Reinstall the 1500 tray in the opposite sequence to
removal. In this case, however, install the front left and
right screws first.
(3) Reinstall the 1000 tray in the opposite sequence to
removal. In this case, however, install the front left and
right screws first.
1000 trayScrews
Screws
1500 tray
Screws
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 124/290
2-108
Replacing the WiresCaution: The method of installing the tray up/down drive
wires is the same for both the front and rear. For this
reason, the description of the method of replacing
the wires is based on the rear side only.
Install the front wires in exactly the same way as the
rear wires.
Caution:
• After replacing or reinstalling the wires, move the tray
up and down by hand, and confirm that it rises and falls
smoothly.
• Take care that wires do not cross each other or ride up
the sides of the pulleys.
• Adjust the tilt of the tray after installing the wires.
Wire (B)
Auxiliary drive spring
Auxiliary wire
Wire protection cover
Set screws
Detach the auxiliary wirefrom the auxiliary drivespring.
E-ring
Drive pulley
Wire (A)
Auxiliary wire
4 Remove the e-ring,then withdraw thedrive pulley.
Wire (A)
Wire restraining cover
Wire (B)
Wire (A)
Tray
Method of removing the wires
3 Remove therestraining covers.
1 Remove the wireprotection cover.
2
Wire (A)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 125/290
MAIN BODY
2-109
Method of installing the wires
Wire (A)
Attach the wire to theauxiliary drive spring.
7
8
Pass wire (B)through the groovein the pulley, theninstall the wirerestraining cover.
2
Wire (B)
Pass wires (A)and (B) throughthe grooves inthe pulleys,then install thewire restraining
covers.
3
Wire (B)
Auxiliary wire
Wind the auxiliary wireclockwise around thedrive pulley. (1000 tray:4 turns; 1500 tray: 5 turns)
6
E-ring
Set screws
Install the wireprotection cover.
Push in the drive pulley,and secure it with the e-ring.
5
Tray
Wire adjustmentpiece
Wire (A)
Pass wires (A) and(B) at the front sideover the wireadjustment pieces.
Wire restrainingcover
Wire restraining cover
Auxiliary drivespring
Auxiliary wire
Auxiliarywire
Drive pulley
Wire (B)
Pass the wiresthrough here.
1
Wire (B)
Wire protection cover
Wire (B)
Wire (A)
Wire (A)
Wire (A)Wire (B)
Wire length343±0.4mm (1500 tray)236±0.4mm (1000 tray)
543±0.4mm (1500 tray)355±0.4mm (1000 tray)
214±0.5mm (2500 tray)157±0.5mm (1000 tray)
Wire (A)
Wire (B)
Auxiliary wire
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 126/290
2-110
SignalsInput signals
• PS142 (PS142 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the 1500 tray upper limit detection signal.
This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is de-
tected.
• TRAY (15) ADD (MS141 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the 1500 tray loaded detection signal.This signal is the TMP4 signal which is input via MS141
when the tray is detected.
• PS143 (PS143 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the 1000 tray upper limit detection signal.
This signal becomes [L] when the upper limit is reached.
TRAY (10) ADD (MS142 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the 1000 tray loaded detection signal.
This signal is the TM4 signal which is input via MS142
when the tray is detected.
• PS160 (PS160 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the LCT conveyance door open/close detection
signal.
[H]: LCT conveyance door open[L]: LCT conveyance door closed
Output signals
• M141 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the M141 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: M141 OFF
[L]: M141 ON
• M142 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the M403 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: M142 OFF
[L]: M142 ON
• TMP4 (CB −> DCDB −> MS141, MS142)
This is a pulse signal which detects the fact that the
1500 tray and the 1000 tray are loaded.
• M141 DRIVE (DCDB −> M141)
This is the M141 ON/OFF drive signal.
[H]: M141 OFF
[L]: M141 ON
• M142 DRIVE (DCDB −> M142)
This is the M142 ON/OFF drive signal.
[H]: M142 OFF
[L]: M142 ON
Tray Up/Down Control
The tray rises as a result of the transmission of the rotational
force of M141 (tray (1500)) and M142 (tray (1000)) by means
of the drive wires (four wires each).
M141 and M142 are driven by the DC driver board (DCDB)
which is controlled by the CB.
Related signals are MS141 (LCT interlock (1500)), MS142
(LCT interlock (1000)), PS142 (LCT upper limit detection
(1500)), PS143 (LCT upper limit detection (1000)), and PS160
(LCT conveyance open/close detection).
OperationWhen MS141 or MS142 detects a paper tray, M141 or
M142 goes ON, causing the corresponding tray to rise.
The tray rises until PS142 or PS143 detects the upper limit
of the paper and goes ON, then M141 or M142 goes OFF,
and the tray stops rising.
The paper is fed until PS142 or PS143 goes OFF, then
M414 or M142 goes ON once again, and the tray rises.
The lowering operation of both the 1500 tray and 1000 tray
takes place mechanically.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 127/290
MAIN BODY
2-111
ADU PAPER EXIT/CONVEYANCE SECTION
Composition
Mechanism
Paper path selection
Paper conveyance
*1
Method
Selector guide
Conveyance roller
*1: Selecting the paper pathThe paper that is exited from the fusing unit of the main
body is either exited from the machine or sent to the ADU
paper exit/conveyance section depending upon the setting
of the selector guide.
The selector guide operates according to the ON/OFF state
of the ADU gate solenoid (SD152).
ADU gatesolenoid (SD152)
Selector guide
Mechanisms
ADU conveyance open/close doorTiming belt
Paper exit roller
Selector guide
ADU gatesolenoid(SD152)
ADU cooling fan(M152)
Conveyanceroller
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 128/290
2-112
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving the ADU Paper Exit Conveyance
Section
Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Remove the cover at top left of the main body.
(2) Disconnect the two connectors (CN94, 530), then
remove the six screws, and remove the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section.
Selector Guide
The selector guide is driven by SD152 (ADU gate).
SD152 is driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is
controlled by the CB .
Related signals are PS157 (ADU gate) and PS158 (ADU
conveyance door open/close detection).
OperationSelector guide control
When the face side copy is made, SD152 goes ON after the
specified time from when MC3 (2nd paper feed) goes ON,
causing the selector guide to open. As a result, the paper
exited from the fusing unit is conveyed to the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section.
SD152 goes OFF after the specified time from when PS25
(paper exit) detects the trailing edge of the paper and goes
ON, then the selector guide closes.
Paper exit/conveyance control
The paper exit roller and conveyance roller are driven by
M1 (main), and the paper exited from the fusing unit is
conveyed to the ADU paper exit/conveyance section.
SignalsInput signals
• PS157 (PS157 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the signal which detects the passage of paper
through the entrance of the stacker.
This signal becomes [H] when paper is detected.
View in A direction
Paper exit/
conveyancesection
A
CN94
CN530
Screws
SD 152 CONT
PS158
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 129/290
MAIN BODY
2-113
• PS158 (PS158 −> DCDB −> CB)
This is the signal which detects the open/closed state
of the ADU conveyance door.
[H]: ADU conveyance door open
[L]: ADU conveyance door closed
ADU DB output signals
• SD152 CONT (CB −> DCDB)
This is the SD152 ON/OFF control signal.[H]: SD152 OFF
[L]: SD152 ON
M152 (ADU Cooling Fan) Control
M152 (ADU cooling fan) is installed in the paper exit/convey-
ance section in order to prevent curling of the paper.
M152 is driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is
controlled by the CB.
OperationON timing
After the specified time from when MC3 (2nd paper feed)
goes ON
OFF timing
When M4 (drum) goes OFF
SignalsInput signals
• M152 LD (M152 −> DC DB −> CB)
[L] is output when M152 reaches the specified speed.
Output signals
• M152 CONT (CB −> DC DB)
This is the M152 ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: M152 ON
[H]: M152 OFF
• M152 DRIVE (DC DB −> M152)
This is the M152 ON/OFF drive signal.
[L]: M152 ON[H]: M152 OFF
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 130/290
2-114
ADU PAPER FEED/CONVEYANCE SECTION
Composition
ADU paper feed motor (M151)
Mechanisms
Mechanism
Paper feed
Paper path
Paper conveyance
Conveyance drive
Jam clearance
Method
Non-stack selection
Selector gate
Conveyance roller (one)
Reversal roller (one)
Paper exit rollers (four)
Timing belts (four) + gear
Selector gate, conveyance
guide plate (B), opening/
closing of conveyance
guide plate (upper)/(lower)
*1: Non-stack paper feed mechanismThe paper in the paper exit/conveyance section is fed to the
paper feed unit by the conveyance rollers. When the
trailing edge of the paper is completely inside the paper
feed unit, it is exited to the conveyance unit by the reversalroller without being stacked. At this time, the paper is exited
from the trailing edge side; the face side and reverse
side are inverted in the conveyance unit.
ADU timing clutch (CL153)
Conveyance guide plate (lower)
Paper exit roller
Paper exit roller
Paper exit rollers
Paper exit rollers
ADU reversal clutch (CL152)
ADU paper feed clutch (CL151)
Conveyance guide plate (upper)
Conveyance roller Face side
Drum Reverse side
Reversal roller
Reversal roller (at bottom)
*1
*2
*3
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 131/290
MAIN BODY
2-115
*2: Paper path selectionThe selector gate switches the path of the paper exit/
conveyance between the paper advance path from the
paper exit/conveyance section to the paper feed section,
and the paper exit path from the paper feed section to the
conveyance section. The selector gate does not have a
drive mechanism. The paper path is determined by the
shape of leading edge of the gate.
• Selector gate
• Paper feed unit
• Conveyance unit
Selector gate
Conveyance guide plate (B)
Conveyance guide plate (upper)
Conveyance guide plate (lower)
During paper feed
Paper
Selector gate
During paper exit
*3: Jam clearance mechanismThere is a jam clearance mechanism on each of the
selector gate, the paper feed unit and the conveyance unit.
Jammed paper can be removed by opening and closing the
selector gate, conveyance guide plate (B) or conveyance
guide plate (upper)/(lower), depending upon where the jam
occurred.
Paper
Selector gate
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 132/290
2-116
Disassembly and AssemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Paper Feed/Conveyance SectionCaution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Withdraw the ADU unit, then remove the four screws.
(2) Withdraw the ADU unit completely and lift it out.
Paper Feed/Reversal Control
The paper feed and reversal operations take place as a result
of the transmission of rotational force from M151 (ADU paper
feed) to the conveyance roller and the reversal roller by means
of CL151 (ADU paper feed) and CL152 (ADU reversal).M151, CL151 and CL152 are driven by the DC drive board
(DCDB) which is controlled by the CB.
Related signals are PS151 (ADU no paper detection), PS152
(ADU paper feed),PS153 (ADU reversal detection) and
PS157(ADU gate).
OperationPaper feed control
M151 goes ON after the specified time from when MC3
(2nd paper feed) goes ON. When PS152 detects the
leading edge of the paper conveyed from the ADU paper
exit/conveyance section and goes ON, CL151 goes ON,
causing the rotational force of M151 to be transmitted to theconveyance roller. As a result, paper is fed to the stacker
from the bottom of the selector gate. CL151 goes OFF after
the specified time from when PS152 detects the trailing
edge of the paper and goes OFF.
For the second sheet of paper, CL151 goes ON again after
the specified time from when CL152 is turned OFF by the
passage of the 1st sheet. The same operation is repeated
for the subsequent sheets as well.
ADU paper feed/ conveyance section
Screws
Screws
(2) Reinstall the paper feed/conveyance section in the
opposite sequence to removal. In this case, however,install the front left and right set screws first.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 133/290
MAIN BODY
2-117
M151 goes OFF 80 ms after PS19 (optics sync) goes OFF
when the series of control operations in the ADU is com-
pleted.
Reversal control
When CL151 goes OFF, CL152 goes ON after the specified
time, and the rotational force of M151 is transmitted to the
reversal roller. As a result, the paper in the ADU paper feedsection is reversed and conveyed, then exited from the top
of the selector gate to the conveyance section. CL152 is
turned OFF after the specified time from when PS153 goes
OFF as a result of detecting the trailing edge of the paper.
SignalsInput signals
• PS151 (PS151−>DCDB−>CB)
This is the no paper in stacker detection signal
[H]: Paper in stacker
[L]: No paper in stacker
• PS152 (PS152−> DCDB−>CB)
This is the paper at entrance of ADU paper feed/
conveyance section detection signal.
This signal becomes [H] when paper is detected.
• PS153 (PS153−>DCDB−>CB)
This is the paper at entrance of ADU paper feed
section detection signal.
This signal becomes [H] when paper is detected.
• PS157 (PS157−>DCDB−>CB)
This is the paper jam at border section (paper exit side)
of main body and ADU” detection signal.
[H]: Paper in stacker
[L]: No paper in stacker
• M151 LD (PS153−>DCDB−>CB)
This signal becomes [L] when M151 reaches the
specified speed.
Output signals
• M151 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the M151 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: M151 OFF
[L]: M151 ON
• M151 CLOCK (CB−>DCDB−>M151)
This is the PLL control clock signal for M151.
• CL151 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for CL151.
[H]: CL151 OFF
[L]: CL151 ON
• CL152 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for CL152.
[H]: CL152 OFF
[L]: CL152 ON• M151 DRIVE (DCDB−>M151)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for M151.
[H]: M151 OFF
[L]: M151 ON
• CL151 DRIVE (DCDB−>CL151)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for CL151.
[H]: CL151 OFF
[L]: CL151 ON
• CL152 DRIVE (DCDB−>CL152)
This is the ON/OFF drive signal for CL152.
[H]: CL152 OFF
[L]: CL152 ON
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 134/290
2-118
Conveyance Control
Conveyance takes place as a result of the transmission of
rotational force from M151 (ADU paper feed) by means of theCL153 (ADU timing).
M151 and CL153 are driven by the DC driver board (DCDB)
which is controlled by the CB.
Related signals are PS154 (ADU paper exit 1), PS155 (ADU
paper exit 2) and PS156 (ADU paper exit 3).
Operation
CL153 goes ON as soon as PS19 goes ON, and conveys
the reversed and conveyed paper from the stacker to the
main body paper feed unit. CL153 goes OFF as soon as
PS18 (no feed) goes OFF.
SignalsInput signals
• PS154 (PS154−>DCDB−>CB)
This is the jammed paper at entrance of ADU
conveyance section detection signal.
This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.
• PS155 (PS155−> DCDB−>CB)
This is the jammed paper inside ADU conveyance
section detection signal.
This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.
• PS156 (PS156−>DCDB−>CB)
This is the jammed paper at exit of ADU conveyance
section detection signal.This signal becomes [ L ] when paper is detected.
Output signals
• CL153 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the CL153 ON/OFF control signal.
[H]: CL153 ON
[L]: CL153 ON
• CL135 DRIVE (DCDB−>CL153)
This is the CL153 ON/OFF drive signal.
[H]: CL153 OFF[L]: CL153 ON
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 135/290
MAIN BODY
2-119
ADU Mis-centering Detection Control
The mis-centering detection board (IPDB) detects the rear
edge of the paper fed from the ADU, and outputs the paperpassage position via the CB to the image processing board
(IPB). During a write operation, the IPB performs mis-centering
adjustment of the paper based on this position data.
OperationLED1 consists of a horizontal row of LEDs which light when
a paper from the ADU turns PS19 (optics synchronizing)
ON. (Invisible light because of infrared LED.) IPDB is
installed opposite LED1. The paper passage position is
detected by counting the number of LEDs 1 being blocked
off by the passage of the paper.
SignalsInput signal
• SO 0 to 6 (IPDB−>CB)
This is the paper passage position detection signal.
Output signals
• DEI 0 to 2 (CB−>IPDB)
This is the data send request signal.
• LED1 DRIVE (CB−>IPDB)
[L]: Lit
[H]: Out
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 136/290
2-120
CONVEYANCE SECTION
Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Paper conveyance One conveyance belt
*1: Paper conveyanceThe paper fed from the 2nd paper feed section is conveyed
to the fusing unit by the conveyance belt. The conveyance
belt is driven by the main motor. When paper is being
conveyed, it is sucked onto the conveyance belt by the
conveyance suction motor (FM14) installed beneath the
conveyance unit, in order to improve the conveyance
performance.
Conveyance unit
Conveyance belt
Corona unit release lever
*1
Conveyance roller
Fusing unit Drum unit
Conveyance belt
Conveyance guide plate
1] Composition
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 137/290
MAIN BODY
2-121
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Conveyance Unit
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then remove the drum unit and the
fixing unit. (For the method of removing the drum unit,
refer to the sub-sections concerning the drum unit and
the fixing unit.)
(2) Detach the hook from the left side of the conveyanceguide plate, then remove the guide plate while tilting it
as shown in the figure below.
Replacing the Conveyance BeltCaution: When removing the conveyance belt, take care not
to damage it on the edge of the conveyance unit.
Procedure
(1) Remove the conveyance unit.
(2) Remove the e-ring, then remove the shaft bearing
(front).
(3) Pull out the conveyance drive shaft from the convey-ance unit, then remove the conveyance belt.
Shaft bearing (front)
(4) Reinstall the conveyance unit in the opposite se-
quence to removal.
Conveyance drive shaft Conveyance roller
E-ring
Conveyance belt
Hook
Conveyance guide plate
Conveyance unit
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the conveyance unit.
Screw
(4) Install the conveyance unit in the opposite sequence
to removal.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 138/290
2-122
Replacing the Conveyance Suction Motor (FM14)Caution: Be sure that the power cord has been un-
plugged from the power outlet.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then remove the upper/lower tray
and the paper feed unit.
(2) Open the CB toward you, then grasp the latch of the
connector (CN15) with radio pliers, and push it towardthe front of the main body.
FM14 (Conveyance Suction) Control
Connector latch
Connector (CN15)
(3) Remove the three screws, then remove the convey-
ance suction motor.
Conveyance suctionmotor (FM14)
Screws
(4) Reinstall the suction motor in the opposite sequence
to removal.
FM14 (conveyance suction) is controlled by the CB via the DC
driver board (DCDB).Operation
FM14 is a 24 V drive DC motor. It goes ON and OFF in
synchronism with M4 (main).
SignalsInput signal
• FM14 LD (FM14−>DCDB−>CB)
This signal becomes [L] when FM14 reaches the
specified speed.
Output signals
• FM14 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the FM14 ON/OFF control signal.
[L]: FM14 ON
[H]: FM14 OFF
• FM14 DRIVE (DCDB−>FM14)
This is the FM14 drive control signal.
[L]: FM14 OFF
[H]: FM14 ON
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 139/290
MAIN BODY
2-123
FUSING UNITComposition
Mechanisms
Mechanism Method
Fusing Pressure + heat roller
Heat source Heater lamp (one upper and one lower
lamp) Cleaning Fusing cleaning roller (silicone oil)
Upper roller Aluminum + PFA coating
Lower roller Silicone rubber + PFA tube
Separation Separation claws (6 upper and 3 lower
claws)
Temperature Contact type thermistor (uses a control
detection and spare sensor)
Overheating Non-contact type thermostat
prevention 1 each for upper and lower
Neutralizing Neutralizing brush
Pressure release Pressure release cam, spring
*1: Fusing heater lampsThe fusing heater lamps consists of two halogen lamps
(one for the upper fusing roller and one for the lower fusing
roller). They are intended to reduce the warmup time from
when the machine is switched ON.
*2: Lower roller pressing and releaseWhen you move the pressure release lever in the fusing or
release direction, the pressure cam pushes the pressure
spring up or down, causing the lower roller to be pressu-
rized or released.
Lower fusing roller
Pressure release lever
Pressure spring
Pressure cam
Upper fusingroller
Fusing heaterlamp (upper)
Lower fusing rollerLower fusing claw
Paper exit roller
(lower)
Paper exitroller (upper)
Upper fusing claw
Oil application roller
Oil pad
Cleaning pad
Upper fusing cover
Pressure release lever
*1
*2
Fusing heaterlamp (lower)
Fusing cleaning roller
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 140/290
2-124
Disassembly and ReassemblyRemoving and Reinstalling the Fusing UnitCaution:
• Be sure that the power cord has been unplugged
from the power outlet.
• Do not touch the fusing unit immediately after
turning OFF the main switch because it is very hot
and you may receive a burn. Wait until the fusingunit has cooled down sufficiently before working
on it.
Procedure
(1) Open the front door, then move the pressure release
lever to the release side.
(2) Grasp the pressure release lever, then pull it output
until it locks.
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lock piece.
(4) Pull out the fusing unit further, and remove it.
Procedure
(1) Remove the fusing unit.
(2) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp terminal
cover.
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp terminal.
(4) Pull out the fusing heater lamp (upper) from the upper
fusing roller.
(5) Reinstall the fusing lamp (upper) in the opposite se-
quence to removal.
Lamp terminal screw
Fusing heater lamp (upper)
Pressure release lever
Lock piece
(5) Reinstall the fusing unit in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Replacing the Fusing Heater Lamp (Upper)Caution: Do not touch the fusing heater lamp (upper)
with the bare hands.
Caution:
• Install the fusing heater lamp with the makers mark
facing the drive gear side.
• When installing the fusing heater lamp, ensure that the
ends of the lamp are facing the correct direction.
• After replacing the fusing heater lamp, check to ensure
that the ends of the lamp are properly inserted in the
terminals.
Lamp terminal
Screw
Screw
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 141/290
MAIN BODY
2-125
Replacing the Fusing Heater Lamp (Lower)Caution: Do not touch the fusing heater lamp (lower)
with bare hands.
Caution: When disconnecting the faston of the fusing heater
lamp, be sure to use pliers and take care not to
apply an unreasonable force.
Procedure
(1) Remove the fusing unit from the main body.(2) Remove the screw, and then remove the lamp terminal
cover.
Caution: A lock pin is inserted in the pressure release lever,
so take care not lose it.
(5) Disconnect the faston from the fusing heater lamp
(lower).
(6) Remove the screw, then remove the lamp holder.
(7) Pull out the fusing heater lamp (lower) from the lower
fusing roller.
(8) Reinstall the fusing heater lamp (lower) in the opposite
sequence to removal.
Fusing heaterlamp (lower)
ScrewFaston
Lamp holder
Faston
(3) Disconnect the faston from the fusing heater lamp
(lower).
(4) Loosen the screw, then remove the e-ring, and remove
the pressure release lever.
E-ring
Lamp terminal cover
Lock pinScrew (loosen)
Pressure release lever
Screw
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 142/290
2-126
Replacing the Oil PadProcedure
(1) Remove the fusing unit.
(2) Remove the e-ring, then remove the upper paper exit
roller unit.
(3) Remove the four screws, then remove the upper
fusing cover.
(4) Open the oil pad to the upper side, then slide it left and
right, and remove it.
(5) Reinstall the oil pad in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Replacing the Fusing Cleaning Roller and OilApplication RollerCaution: When reinstalling the fusing cleaning roller and oil
application roller, tighten the hex screws more than
normal.
Procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing cover
and oil pad.(2) Remove the two hex screws, then pull out the shaft to the
outside, and remove the fusing impregnated roller.
(3) Loosen the four bearing casing screws ( two for front and
back side) to remove the two hex screws. Then pull the shaft
to the outside, and remove the fusing cleaning roller.
Upper paper exitroller unit
E-ringUpper fusing cover
Oil pad
Screw
Screw
Screws
Hex screws
Oil applicationroller
Hex screws
Bearing casing(back side)
Fusing cleaning roller
Bearing casing(front side)
(4) Reinstall the rollers in the opposite sequence to
removal.When reinstalling, be careful of the following items.
• The shaft must be inserted into the fusing cleaning
roller until the shaft collar reaches the roller core;
then tighten the hex screw.
• Secure the bearing casing screw after confirming
that the bearing casing reaches the flat metal edge
on the fusing roller side.
• The cleaning roller shaft holder must be positionedso that the hex screws are located at the upper limit
of the sloted holes in the shaft holder.
Revised 12/97
Push the cleaning roller shaft holders in
the direction of the arrows
Correct Incorrect
Front Rear
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 143/290
MAIN BODY
2-127
Removing and Reinstalling the Upper Fusing
RollerCaution: When replacing the heat insulation sleeves, coat
the inside of the sleeves with lubricant, then fit the
sleeves onto the roller shaft.
Procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller, upper fusing
cover, oil pad, fusing heater lamp (upper), fusingcleaning roller, and oil application roller.
(2) Remove the lamp terminal cover at the rear, then
remove the c-ring, collar and gear from the upper
fusing roller.
(3) Remove the two screws at the front, then remove the
two bearing holders.
(4) Remove the bearing, then pull out the upper fusing
roller from the front.
(5) Remove the two heat insulation sleeves from the
upper fusing roller.
(6) Reinstall the upper fusing roller in the opposite se-quence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Lower FusingRoller
Procedure
(1) Remove the fusing heater lamp (upper), fusing heater
lamp (lower) and upper fusing roller.
(2) Remove the two screws, then remove the fusing
entrance cover.
Fusing entrance cover
Screws
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the entrance
guide plate (upper).
(4) Remove the two screws, then remove the entrance
guide plate (lower).
Heat insulation sleeve
Heat insulation sleeve
Upper fusing roller
Bearing holder
Bearing
Upper fusing roller
Bearing holder screw
Gear
Collar
Lamp terminal cover
C-ring
Screw
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 144/290
2-128
Note: When installing the lower fusing roller, lower the
entrance guide plate (upper) to the bottom and
secure it. Lower the entrance guide plate (lower) to
the bottom and ensure that it is touching the fusing
bottom plate, then secure it.
(5) Remove the two screws, then remove the paper exit
plate.
Screws
Paper exit plate
(6) Raise the lower fusing roller, then remove it from the
paper exit side.
(7) Remove the two bearings from the lower fusing roller.
Entrance guide plate (upper)Screws
Screws
Fusing lower plate
Entrance guide plate (lower)
(8) Reinstall the lower fusing roller in the opposite se-
quence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Lower FusingClaws
Procedure
(1) Remove the paper exit plate.
(2) Remove the three springs supporting the lower fusing
claws.
(3) Remove the two screws, then remove the claw guide
plate.
(4) Remove the three lower fusing claws.
(5) Reinstall the lower fusing claws in the opposite se-
quence to removal.
Bearing
Lower fusing roller
Bearing
Paper exit plate
Screw
Claw guide plate
Screw
Lower fusing claws
Springs
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 145/290
MAIN BODY
2-129
Removing and Reinstalling the Upper Fusing
ClawsProcedure
(1) Open the upper paper exit roller unit.
(2) Remove the six springs attached to the upper fusing
claws.
(3) Pull out the two shafts, each of which has three upper
claws secured to it, to the outside, and remove the sixupper fusing claws.
(4) Reinstall the upper fusing claws in the opposite se-
quence to removal.
Removing and Reinstalling Fusing TemperatureSensors 1 and 2Caution:
• After reinstalling fusing temperature sensors 1
and 2, check to ensure that the sensor wires are
not touching the upper fusing roller.
• After reinstalling fusing temperature sensor 2,
check to ensure that the sensor is touching the
upper fusing roller.
• Be sure to coat the screws of the sensors with
screw lock agent after reinstalling the sensors.
Removal procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing
cover, oil pad, oil application roller and entrance guide
plate (lower).
(2) Remove the two screws, then release the connector(CN98).
(3) Cut the two wiring bands, then remove pins 1 to 4 of
CN98 with tweezers.
Upper fusing claws
Upper fusing claws
(4) Remove the two screws, then remove fusing tempera-
ture sensor 1.(5) Remove the screw, then remove fusing temperature
sensor 2.
Shaft
Springs
Springs
Upper paper exitroller unit
Shaft
Wiring band
Connector (CN98)
Screw
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 2
Pin 1
Fusing temperature sensor 1
Fusing temperaturesensor 2
Connector(CN98)
Wiring band
Screw
Screw
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 146/290
2-130
Installation procedure
(1) Secure fusing temperature sensor 2 with the screw,
then place the sensor element in contact with the
upper fusing roller.
(2) Set the fusing temperature sensor positioning jig be-
tween fusing temperature sensor 1 and the upper
fusing roller, then secure fusing temperature sensor 1
with two screws so that the clearance between thesensor and the upper fusing roller is within the standard
value.
Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat (Upper)Caution:
• After reinstalling the thermostat (upper), check to
ensure that the wiring is not touching the upper
fusing roller.
• Be sure to coat the screw of the thermostat (upper)
with screw lock agent after reinstalling the
thermostat.Removal procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing
cover, oil pad and fusing impregnated roller.
(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (up-
per).
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the thermostat (up-
per).
(a) Set the distance ‘a’ between the upper fusing
roller and fusing temperature sensor 1 so that it
is equal to the thickness of the fusing temperature
sensor positioning jig.
Standard: a =0.75±0.1mm (when pressure is applied)
Fusing temperature sensor 1
Upper fusing roller
a
(3) Coat the screw of each sensor with screw lock agent.
(4) Insert the connector pins on the end of the cable of
each sensor to a position that corresponds to CN98.
(5) Reinstall the other parts in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Fastons
Thermostat (upper)
Screw
Installation procedure
(1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the upper fusing
roller) between the thermostat (upper) and the upper
fusing roller, then secure the thermostat (upper) with
the screw so that the clearance between the thermostat
(upper) and the upper fusing unit is the standard value.
Fusing temperature sensorpositioning jig
Fusing temperature sensor 1
Screws
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 147/290
MAIN BODY
2-131
(a) Set the distance ‘a’ between the upper fusing
roller and the thermostat (upper) so that it is
equal to the thickness of thermostat positioning jig A .
(2) Coat the screw of the installed thermostat (upper) with
screw lock agent.
(3) Connect the two fastons.
(4) Install the other parts in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Removing and Reinstalling the Thermostat
(Lower)Caution:
• After installing the thermostat (lower), ensure that
the wiring is not touching the lower fusing roller.
• Be sure to coat the screw of the installed thermostat
(lower) with screw lock agent.
Removal procedure
(1) Remove the upper paper exit roller unit, upper fusing
cover and paper exit plate.
(2) Disconnect the two fastons from the thermostat (lower).
(3) Remove the screw, then remove the lower thermostat
(lower).
Upper fusing roller
Thermostat positioning jig (for upper roller) Thermostat (upper)
Thermostat (lower)
Faston (rear)
Standard: a = 3.75 ± 0.25mm (when pressure is applied)
(b) When adjusting the above clearance, take care
that the thermostat does not ride up jig B .
Upper fusing roller
Thermostat(upper)
a
B
A
Screw
Screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 148/290
2-132
Installation procedure
(1) Set the thermostat positioning jig (for the lower fusing
roller) between the thermostat (lower) and the lower
fusing roller, then secure the thermostat (lower) with
the screw so that the clearance between the thermostat
(lower) and the lower fusing unit is the standard value.
(b) When adjusting the above clearance, take care
that the thermostat (lower) does not ride up jig
B .
(2) Coat the screw of the installed thermostat (lower) with
screw lock agent.
(3) Connect the two fastons.
(4) Reinstall the other parts in the opposite sequence to
removal.
Thermostat positioning jig(for lower roller)
(a) Set the distance “b” between the lower fusing
roller and the thermostat (lower) so that it is equal
to the thickness of thermostat positioning
jig A .
Thermostat (lower)
Standard: b = 1.75 ± 0.2mm (when pressure is applied)
Lower fusing roller
b
Screw
Jig AJig B
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 149/290
MAIN BODY
2-133
Fusing Temperature Control
MS4
Protection against abnormality
The upper thermostat (TS1) is used to protect the machine
if the temperature of the upper fusing roller rises abnormally,
and the lower thermostat (TS2) is used to protect the
machine if the temperature of the lower fusing roller rises
abnormally.
The operating temperature of each thermostat is shown
below.TS1: Approx. 180°C
TS2: Approx. 110°C
MS4 (fusing set MS4)
The fusing heater remains energized even if the main door
is opened, however if the fusing pressure lever is moved to
the release side MS4 goes OFF and the flow of current to
the fusing heater is cut OFF.
SignalsInput signals
• TH1 ANG 1, 2 (TH1−>CB)
This is the TH1 output signal.
This signal outputs a voltage that is proportional to the
surface temperature at the center of the upper fusing
roller. This signal is used for temperature control and
also for detecting an abnormally high temperature or
other abnormality.
• TH2 ANG 1, 2 (TH->CB)
This is the TH2 output signal.
This signal outputs a voltage proportional to the sur-
face temperature at the end of the upper fusing roller.
It is not directly related to temperature control but is
used for detecting an abnormality.
• PS24 (PS24−>CB)
This is the fuser detect PS signal.
[H]: Lever is up (non-operating position)
[L]: Lever is down (operating position)
Output signals
• L2 CONT (CB−>DCPS2)
This signal controls the ON/OFF state of L2.
[L]: L2 ON
[H]: L2 OFF
• L4 CONT (CB−>DCPS2)
This signal controls the ON/OFF state of L4.
[L]: L4 ON
[H]: L4 OFF
• L2 DRIVE (DCPS2−>L2)
This is the L2 AC(N) supply line.The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L2
CONT.
• L4 DRIVE (DCPS2−>L4)
This is the L4 AC(N) supply line.
The AC supply is switched ON or OFF according to L4
CONT.
• RL1 DRIVE (CB−>DCPS2−>RL1)
This signal controls RL1.
This signal becomes [H] if an abnormality occurs in the
machine, causing RL1 to go OFF.
The upper fusing roller is heated by fusing heater lamp 1 (L2),
and the lower fusing roller by fusing heater lamp 3 (L4). The
CB detects the temperature of the upper fusing roller by means
of the middle fusing temperature sensor (TH1), and controls L2
and L4 via DCPS2.
OperationTemperature control
• Warmup
The CB turns ON the fusing heater lamp circuit in DC
power supply unit 2 (DCPS2) as soon as the main
switch is turned ON, causing L2 and L4 to go ON until
the upper fusing roller reaches the specified
temperature. Upon completion of warmup, L4 goes
ON and OFF in synchronism with L2. If the upper
fusing roller does not reach the specified temperature
within a certain time from the start of warmup, L2, L4,
and M1 (main) remain ON until the completion of
warmup.
Set temperature = 200°C; warmup time = approx. 7 min.;
room temperature = 20°C
S. GNDPS24 L
5VDC
6-A9
6-B86-B9
CB
PS24
MODELamp
L2 L4
In copying
Warming up ON/OFFON/OFF
ON/OFF ON
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 150/290
2-134
OTHER KINDS OF CONTROLParts Through Which Current FlowsWhen the Main Switch is Turned OFF
OperationCurrent flows through the following parts if the power cord
is plugged into the power outlet, regardless of whether or
not SW1 (main) is ON or OFF.
Circuit breaker (CBR)
If an internal part short circuits, causing a current of more
than 8 A to flow, the breaker goes OFF, cutting off the
power to the machine.
Noise filter (NF)
The noise filter is used to reduce noise entering the ma-
chine via the power line, and also external leakage of noise
generated in the machine.
Internal heaters 1, 2 and 3 (HTR1, 2, 3)
These heaters are used to remove humidity from the paper
feed tray and the inside of the LCT.
Weekly timer (optional)) (W.T.)
This timer uses various time control functions to switch the
machine ON and OFF.
Parts That Operate When the MainSwitch is Turned ON
OperationPower supply
When SW1 (main) is turned ON, AC power is supplied to
DC power units 1, 2 and 3 (DCPS1, 2 and 3). As a result,
DCPS1 supplies DC power to the CB, DC driver board
(DCDB) and A/D converter board (ADB). The CB starts
controlling the internal circuits and also starts the following
operations.
• Initial operation of operation board (OB)
• Warmup of the fusing rollers
• Low speed operation of the various fans
DCPS2 supplies 24VDC to RL1, FS-102, and DF-306. RL1
turns ON after a certain period by a signal from the CB, then
supplies AC power to the AC-driven parts.
AC (C)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 151/290
MAIN BODY
2-135
DC output voltages and corresponding symbols
SignalsOutput signal
• RL1 DRIVE (CB−>DCPS2)
This is the signal which controls RL1.
If an abnormality occurs in the main body, this signal
becomes [H], causing RL1 to go OFF.
Cooling Fan Control
FM11 (polygon cooling fan), FM22 (E-RDH cooling fan), FM16
(main body cooling fan) and FM2 (optics cooling fan) are
driven by the DC driver board (DCDB) which is controlled by
the CB.
OperationA 24 V DC motor is used for each cooling fan.
Operation of FM11
During idling: low speed rotation
During a copy operation: High speed rotation
Operation of FM22
During idling: low speed rotation
During a copy operation: High speed rotationOperation of FM16
During idling: low speed rotation
During a copy operation: High speed rotation
Operation of FM2
ON only during a copy operation.
SignalsOutput signals
• FM2 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the ON/OFF control signal for FM2.
[L]: FM2 ON
[H]: FM2 OFF
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 152/290
2-136
• FM11 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the rotational speed control signal for FM11.
[L]: Low speed rotation
[H]: High speed rotation
• FM22 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the FM22 rotational speed control signal.
[L]: Low speed rotation
[H]: High speed rotation• FM16 CONT (CB−>DCDB)
This is the rotational speed control signal for FM16.
[L]: Low speed rotation
[H]: High speed rotation
• FM11 H/L (DCDB−>FM11)
This is the rotation drive signal for FM11.
[L]: High speed drive
[H]: Low speed drive
• FM16 H/L (DCDB−>FM16)
This is the rotation drive signal for FM11.
[L]: High speed drive
[H]: Low speed drive
• FM22 H/L (DCDB−>FM22)
This is the rotation drive signal for FM22.
[L]: High speed drive
[H]: Low speed drive
• FM2 DRIVE (DCDB−>FM2)
This is the drive control signal for FM2.
[L]: FM2 OFF
[H]: FM2 ON
Input signal
• FM11 LD (FM11−>DCDB−>CB)
This signal becomes [L] when FM11 reaches the set
speed.
• FM16 LD (FM16−>DCDB−>CB)
This signal becomes [L] when FM16 reaches the set
speed.
• FM22 LD (FM22−>DCDB−>CB)This signal becomes [L] when FM22 reaches the set
speed.
• FM2 LD (FM2−>DCDB−>CB)
This signal becomes [L] when FM2 reaches the set
speed.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 153/290
MAIN BODY
2-137
Operation Panel Control
The operation panel consists of three operation boards which
comprise the following three circuits.
• LED drive circuit
• LCD display circuit
• Input circuit for the various buttons
OperationLED drive operation
The various LEDs are turned ON and OFF by ICs (shift
register/latch driver).
Each IC turns ON/OFF the LED connected each output
terminal, according to serial data from the control board
(CB).
LCD display operation
The LCD (VFD1, VFD2) on operation board 2 (OB2)
displays various messages according to the LCD control
signal (serial data) output from the CB.
Various kind input operations
A matrix circuit is used for processing key inputs from the
operation panel. In this circuit, there are 12 key return
terminals for four timing pulses output from the CB, and a
total of 48 key inputs are output to the CB.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 154/290
2-138
Indication and state after the initial operation
Function Initial state
Start print button Lit green (ready state)
Copy quantity 01
ADF Flashing (auto priority mode) *
AES Lit (auto priority mode) *
APS Lit (auto priority mode) *
1:1 Lit
Magnification Fixed
Paper size The LEDs corresponding to all of
the set paper sizes are lit.
Caution: Items marked * can be selected in the 25 mode.
Initial operation of the operation panel
When the machine is in one of the following states, the
various set conditions are in the initial conditions.
• When the power is switched ON (SW1 OFF−>ON)
• When the auto reset operates
• When the auto shutoff is canceled
• When the auto button is pressed
• When the key counter of a machine that uses a key
counter is inserted
• When originals are placed in the ADF in the non-ADF
mode
• When the bypass feed tray is returned in the bypass
feed mode
KEY
RTN O
KEY
RTN 1
KEY
RTN 2
KEY
RTN 3
KEY
RTN 4
KEY
RTN 5
KEY
RTN 6
KEY
RTN 7
KEY
RTN C
KEY
RTN D
KEY
RTN E
KEY
RTN F
KEY
SEL 0
SW001
“1”
SW009
“5”
SW005
“9”
SW013,014
“Copy”
SW004
“Enlarge”
SW005
“Reduce”
SW013
“2 IN 1/4 IN 1”
SW001
“Copy Mode”
SW009
“F2”
SW014
“Image Read”
SW012
“Memory”
SW014
“Timer Setting”
KEY
SEL 1
SW015
“2”
SW010
“6”
SW006
“0”
SW002
“Interrupt”
SW007
“Magnification”
SW015
“Spare”
SW013
“Text/Photo”
SW018
“Preheat”
SW008
“Set F1”
SW006
“Independent Magnification Change”
SW009
“Repeat”
SW011
“Intersheet”
KEY
SEL 2
SW016
“3”
SW011
“7”
SW007
“P”
SW003
“Auto Reset”
SW002
“Copy Density Д
SW007
“Reduction Shift/Shift”
SW015
“Book Copy”
SW004
“Thick Paper/Thin Paper”
SW010
“F3”
SW013
“Single Step”
SW010
“Reversed black and white mode”
SW008
“OHP intersheet”
KEY
SEL 3
SW017
“4”
SW008
“8”
SW012
“Stop/Clear”
SW004
“Super Size”
SW003
“Copy Density ”
SW021
“Output”
SW006
“erasure outside original area”
SW003
“Memory”
SW011
“F4”
SW012
“Insertion Page/Chapter Demarcation”
SW005
“Fold erasure/frame erasure”
SW001
“Timer Cancel”
: OB1, : OB2, : OB3,
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 155/290
MAIN BODY
2-139
Counter Control
This machine contains the following counters.
Total counter (C(T))
Key counter (C(K))
These counters are controlled by the CB.
PS25 (paper exit detection) is a signal related to this
control.
OperationThis machine counts copies by means of two software
counters.
• Paper feed counter
The count increases by 1 each time the 1st paper feed
goes ON.
• Paper exit counterThe count increases by 1 each time PS25 goes ON
OFF.
Operation of each counter
Copy quantity display counter on OB
Normal Paper jam
Indicates the count on the ndicates the count on
paper feed counter. I the paper exit counter.
C(K)
This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit
counter.
C(T)This counter counts in synchronism with the paper exit
counter.
SignalsInput signals
KEY RTN 0 to F (OB1−>CB)
This is the signal returned from the button signal input
section.
Output signals
• KEY SEL 0 to 3 (CB−>OB1)
These are the timing pulses to the button signal inputsection.
• OB DATA (CB−>OB1)
This is the LED display data.
• OB CLOCK (CB−>OB1)
This is the clock signal used to read OB DATA. Data
is read in synchronism with this signal.
• OB LATCH (CB−>OB1)
This is the data latch signal. When this signal becomes
[L], the read data is displayed on the LED.
• LCD1 SIG (CB−>OB2)
This is the VFD1 ON/OFF control signal.
When this signal is [L], VFD1 is ON.
• LCD1 DATA (CB−>OB2)This is the VFD1 display data.
• LCD1 CLOCK (CB−>OB2)
This is the clock signal for reading LCD1 DATA. Data
is read in synchronism with this signal.
• LCD1 LATCH (CB−>OB2)
This is the data latch signal. When this signal is [L], the
read data is displayed on VFD1.
• LCD2 SIG (CB−>OB2)
This is the VFD2 ON/OFF control signal.
When this signal is [L], VVFD1 is ON.
• LCD2 DATA (CB−>OB2)
This is the VFD2 display data.
• LCD2 CLOCK (CB−>OB2)
This is the clock signal for reading LCD2 DATA.
Data is read in synchronism with this signal.
• LCD2 LATCH (CB−>OB2)
This is the data latch signal. When this signal becomes
[L], the read data is displayed on VFD2.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 156/290
2-140
SignalsInput signals
• C(K) JOINT (C(K)−>CB)
This signal informs the CB that the count on C(K) has
increased.
• PS25 (PS25−>CB)
This is the PS25 state signal.
When this signal is [L], PS25 goes ON, indicating thatthe paper has been exited.
Output signals
• C(T) DRIVE (CB−>C(T))
This is the C(T) drive signal.
When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of
C(T) increases by 1.
• C(K) DRIVE (CB−>C(K))
This is the C(K) drive signal.
When this signal changes from [L] -> [H], the count of
C(K) increases by 1.
Option Control
In this machine, the weekly timer and memory card options are
controlled by the CB.
OperationThe weekly timer, memory card, and FNS contain a CPU
which controls the flow of data with the main body CB.
(Refer to the option manual for details of each option.)
Power is supplied to the FNS by DCPS2 (DC power supply
unit). The weeklt timer has its own power supply and power
is supplied to the memory card via the CB.
(FS-103)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 157/290
MAIN BODY
2-141
Operation/output timing of coin vender signal
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Signal name
Vender copy
Vender copy
Paper size
0 to 3
Vender two-
sided copy
N.C.
N.C.
P.GND
Output timing
Output from when the copy button is pressed
until the copy is exited.
100 ms L signal that is synchronized with the
main body tray/LCD
Output only while a copy is being made.
Signal output only while a copy is being
made.
—
—
—
Kind of signal
Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
Open collector 35 V, 200 mA
—
—
—
Description
Copy in progress
signal
Paper feed signal
Paper size signal
Two-sided copy
select signal
Spare terminal
Spare terminal
Power ground
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 158/290
2-142
This page left blank intentionally.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 159/290
3-1
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 160/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 161/290
3-3
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 162/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 163/290
3-5
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 164/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 165/290
3-7
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 166/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 167/290
3-9
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 168/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 169/290
4-1
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 170/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 171/290
JAM LIST
5-1
JAM LISTThis section contains paper jam operating conditions.
Paper Jam
Jam
codeMethod of clearing jam
A copy is made, a jamoccurs, and the copier
stops after the copy
exits.
Remove the original pa-per from bypass tray then
remove the jammed pa-
per.
Open the main body con-
veyance door and remove
the jammed paper, then
close it.
Open the tray and remove
the jammed paper, then
close it.
Open the LCT conveyancedoor and remove the
jammed paper, if any, and
close it.
Open the tray and remove
the jammed paper, if any,
and close it.
J10-2
J10-4
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J11-4
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
Classifica-
tion
M a i n b
o d y a n d L C T
PS14 (register) is not turned ONwithin 2 seconds from ON of SD3
(bypass feed).
PS30 (bypass) is ON at the time of
ON of SD3 (bypass feed).
PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON dur-
ing idling.
PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is not turned
ON within 400 msec from ON of an
SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)).
PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON
within 650 msec from ON of an SD1
(1st paper feed (upper)).
PS20 (pre W try (upper)) is ON for
ON of SD1 (1st paper feed (upper)).
PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON dur-
ing idling.
PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is not turned
ON within 400 msec from ON of SD2
(1st paper feed (lower)).
PS18 (no feed) is not turned ON
within 820 msec from ON of SD2
(1st paper feed (lower)).
PS21 (pre W try (lower)) is ON for
ON of SD2 (1st paper feed (lower)).
PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) is ONduring idling.
PS210 (LCT pre W try (1000)) not
turned ON within 420 msec from ON
of SD141 (LCT paper feed (1000)).
PS144 (LCT conveyance (1000)) is
not turned ON within 2 seconds from
ON of SD141 (LCT paper feed
(1000)).
PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is ON
during idling.
PS200 (LCT pre W try (1500)) is not
turned ON within 370 msec from ON
of SD140 (LCT paper feed (1500)).PS146 (LCT conveyance (1500)) is
not turned ON within 2.4 seconds
from ON of SD140 (LCT paper feed
(1500)).
CausesOperation when jam
occurs
Whenoperating
When
stationary
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
Whenstationary
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
Main bodypaper feed
jam
LCTpaper feed
jam
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 172/290
5-2
The main body is
stopped immediately.
A copy is made, a jam
occurs, and the copier
stops after the copy
exits.
The main body is
stopped immediately.
PS14 (register) is ON during idling.
PS14 (register) is not turned OFF
within 1300 msec from completion
of exposure.PS18 (no feed) or PS19 (optics sync)
is ON during idling.
PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON
within 280 msec from start of copy-
ing.
PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON
within 560 msec from ON of PS157
(ADU gate).
PS19 (optics sync) is not turned ON
within 430 msec from the start of
reconveyance in right lengthwise
transport in LCT paper feed.
PS18 (no feed) is not turned ONwithin 390 msec from the start of
reconveyance in right lengthwise
transport in LCT/ADU reverse side.
A loop is not completed within 400
msec from ON of a PS18 (no feed).
PS146 (LCT pass detection) or
PS144 (LCT feed) is ON during idling.
PS146 (LCT pass detection) has
not turned ON within 300ms after
the 1st feeder of LCT1 was ON.
PS144 (LCT feed) has not turned
ON within 440ms after 1st feeder of
LCT2 was ON.Drum jam sensor is ON.
PS14 (register) is not turned OFF
within paper size length + 20 mm
from ON of MC3 (2nd paper feed).
PS14 (register) is not ON when MC3
(2nd paper feed) is ON.
PS25 (paper exit) is not turned ON
within 2000 msec from ON of MC3
(2nd paper feed).
PS25 (paper exit) was turned ON
within 280 msec from copy start.
PS25 (paper exit) is ON during idling.
PS25 (paper exit) is not turned OFF/
ON within 2000 msec from comple-
tion of exposure.
Jam
codeMethod of clearing jam
Classifica-
tionCauses
Operation when jam
occurs
Open the front door and
remove the jammed pa-
per, then close it.
Open the conveyance
door and remove the
jammed paper, then close
it.
Open the front door and
remove the jammed
paper, then close it.
Open the paper exit and
the front door and remove
the jammed paper, then
close them.
When
stationary
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
J16
J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J17-4
J17-5
J17-6
J19
J21
J30-1
J30-2
J31
J32
Conveyance
jam
Revised 3/99
M a i n b o d y a n d L C T
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 173/290
JAM LIST
5-3
F S - 1 0 3
ADF was opened during ADF
operation.
PS304 (original passage) is ON dur-
ing idling in ADF mode.
PS304 (original passage) is notturned ON within a certain period
from the start of ADF original.
PS304 (original passage) is not
turned OFF within a certain period
from its ON.
PS304 (original passage) ON when
original setting is completed.
PS305 (original exit) is ON during
idling in ADF mode.
PS305 (original exit) is not turned
ON within a certain period from the
start of ADF original exit.
PS305 (original exit) is not turnedOFF within a certain period from its
ON.
PS305 (original exit) is not turned
ON within a certain period from the
start of RADF original reversing.
PS805 (paper pass 1) or PS806
(paper pass 2) are ON during idling.
During operation, the front cover
was opened or a finisher was sepa-
rated from the main body.
PS805 (paper pass 1) or PS806
(paper pass 2) are not turned ON
within a certain period from ON of
PS25 (paper exit).
In finisher, paper conveyance was
not carried out properly.
Papers having different widthwise
sizes were delivered on a staple
tray.
Stapler did not operate correctly.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
detected paper.
PS5 (stacker conveyance passage)
detected paper.PS4 (FIN entrance passage) and
PS5 (stacker conveyance passage)
detected paper.
PS6 (paper exit 1) detected paper.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) and
PS6 (paper exit 1) detected paper.
PS5 (stacker conveyance passage)
and PS6 (paper exit 1) detected
paper.
J61
J62
J63
J72
J74
J75
J72-01
J72-02
J72-03
J72-04
J72-05
J72-06
ADF
paper exit
jam
FNS
conveyance
jam
FNS
paper exit
jam
FNS
stapler jam
FS-103
Jam
codeMethod of clearing jam
ADF is stopped imme-
diately.
When there is paper in
or after transfer, the
main body stops afterpaper exit.
Finisher/main body is
stopped immediately.
FS-103/main body is
stopped immediately.
Open ADF and remove the
jammed paper, then close
it.
If there is jammed paper
on a conveyance unit inthe main body, remove it.
If there is a jammed paper
in finisher/main body, re-
move it.
Open finisher and remove
jammed paper, then
close it.
Remove jammed staple
from a stapler unit.
Remove the jammed
paper from the finisher/
main body.
Classifica-
tionCauses
Operation when jam
occurs
When
stationary
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
When
stationary
Whenoperating
A D F
F S - 1 0 2
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 174/290
5-4
J72-07
J72-08
J72-09
J72-0A
J72-0B
J72-0C
J72-0D
J72-0E
J72-0F
J72-10
J72-11
J72-12
J72-13
J72-14
J72-15
J72-16
J72-17
Jam
codeMethod of clearing jam
Classifica-
tionCauses
Operation when jam
occurs
When
stationary
FS-103/main body are
stopped immediately.
Remove the jammed
paper from the finisher/
main body.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage), PS5
(stacker conveyance passage), and
PS6 (paper exit 1) detected paper.
PS1 (printer paper exit) is ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit) and PS4(stacker conveyance passage) are
ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit) and PS5
(stacker conveyance passage) are
ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage), and PS4 (FIN
entrance passage) are ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit) and PS6
(paper exit 1) are ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS4 (FIN
entrance passage), and PS6 (paper
exit 1) are ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS5
(stacker conveyance passage), and
PS6 (paper exit 1) are ON.
PS1 (printer paper exit), PS6 (paper
exit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage), and PS4 (FIN entrance
passage) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0) is ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0) and PS4
(FIN entrance passage) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0) and PS5
(stacker conveyance passage) are
ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage), and PS4 (FIN
entrance passage) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0) and PS6
(paper exit 1) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS4 (FIN
entrance passage), and PS6 (paper
exit 1) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS5
(stacker conveyance passage), and
PS6 (paper exit 1) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS6 (paperexit 1), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage), and PS4 (FIN entrance
passage) are ON.
Note: For several of the jam conditions listed in this section, the jam codes for FS-103A equipped machines differ from those
of FS-103 equipped machines. For example, if both finishers are experiencing the same exact jam condition, such as: PS4
(FIN entrance passing) is not turned ON after the copy is conveyed throught the main body paper exit photosensor, code
“J72-41” would appear on FS-103A equipped machines – however, code “J72-21” would appear on FS-103 equipped
machines. This service manual provides FS-103 codes only. For this reason, a table has been included at the end of this
paper jam section which provides cross-reference information to determine the corresponding FS-103 jam codes for
FS-103A equipped machines.
Revised 3/99
FS-103
F S - 1 0 3
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 175/290
JAM LIST
5-5
PS20 (stacker paper 0) and PS1
(printer paper exit) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit), and PS4 (FIN entrance
passage) are ON.PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit), and PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit), PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage), and PS4 (FIN
entrance passage) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit) and PS6 (paper exit 1 )
are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit), PS4 (FIN entrance
passage), and PS6 (paper exit 1)
are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit), PS5 (stacker
conveyance passage), and PS6
(paper exit 1) are ON.
PS20 (stacker paper 0), PS1 (printer
paper exit), PS4 (FIN entrance
passage), PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage), and PS6 (paper exit 1)
are ON.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) does
not turn ON after paper goes past
main body paper exit PS.
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn ON
after paper goes past PS4 (FIN
entrance passage) (only in offset
mode).
PS5 (stacker conveyance passage)
does not turn ON after paper goes
past PS4 (FIN entrance passage).
PS5 (stacker conveyance passage)
does not turn OFF within a certain
period from when it turned ON.
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn ON
within a certain period from whenM7 (paper exit roller) turned ON. (In
staple mode only.)
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) does
not turn OFF within a certain period
from when it turned ON.
After PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
turns ON, it does not turn OFF. (Sub-
tray exiting only.)
After PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
turns ON/OFF, PS12 (paper exit)
does not turn ON/OFF.
J72-18
J72-19
J72-1A
J72-1B
J72-1C
J72-1D
J72-1E
J72-1F
J72-21
J72-22
J72-23
J72-24
J72-26
J72-27
J72-28
J72-29
F S - 1 0 3
Jam
codeMethod of clearing jam
Classifica-
tionCauses
Operation when jam
occurs
FS-103/main body are
stopped immediately.
Remove the jammed
paper from the finisher/
main body.
When
stationary
When
operating
Revised 3/99
FS-103
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 176/290
5-6
PS17 (stapler F HP) does not turn
ON within a certain period from
when M10 (stapler F) turned ON.
PS15 (stapler R HP) does not
turn ON within a certain periodfrom when M9 (stapler R) turned
ON.
PS15 (stapler R HP) and PS17
(stapler F HP) do not turn ON
within a certain period from when
M9 (stapler R) and M10 (stapler
F) turned ON.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage) does
not turn ON after paper goes past
main body paper exit PS
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn
ON after paper goes past PS4
(FIN entrance passage) (Only inoffset mode.)
PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage) does not turn ON after
paper goes past PS4 (FIN
entrance passage).
PS5 (stacker conveyance
passage) does not turn OFF
within a certain period from when
it turned ON.
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn
ON within a certain period from
when M7 (paper exit roller)
turned ON.
PS6 (paper exit 1) does not turn
OFF within a certain period from
when it turned ON.
PS4 (FIN entrance passage)
does not turn OFF within a certain
period from when it turned ON.
PS152 (ADU paper feed) is not
turned ON within 2000 msec from
ON of PS25 (paper exit).
During idling, PS152 (ADU paper
feed), PS153 (ADU reversal) or
PS157 (ADU gate) is ON.PS157 (ADU gate) is turned ON
within 280 msec from the copy start.
CL151 (ADU paper feed) is not
turned OFF within 1500 msec from
ON of PS152 (ADU paper feed).
PS154 (ADU paper exit 1) is not
turned ON within 640 msec from
OFF of PS152 (ADU paper feed).
PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) is not
turned ON within 900 msec from ON
of PS154 (ADU paper exit 1).
Jam
codeMethod of clearing jam
Classifica-
tionCauses
Operation when jam
occurs
F S - 1 0 3
FS-103/main body are
stopped immediately.
Remove the jammed
paper from the finisher/
main body.
J72-31
J72-32
J72-33
J72-41
J72-42
J72-43
J72-44
J72-45
J72-46
J72-47
When
operating
A D U
ADU
paper feed
jam
ADU
paper exit
jam
J92
J93
J94
When
operating
When
stationary
When
operating
The main body is
stopped immediately.
Open ADU/main body
front door/lengthwise
conveyance door and
remove jammed paper,
then close it.
Revised 3/99
FS-103
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 177/290
JAM LIST
5-7
Jam
codeMethod of clearing jam
The main body is
stopped immediately.
Open ADU/main body
front door/lengthwise con-
veyance door and remove
jammed paper, then close
it.
J95
J96
Classifica-
tion
A
D U
During idling, PS154 (ADU paper
exit 1), PS155 (ADU paper exit 2),
PS156 (ADU paper exit 3) or PS151
(ADU no paper) is ON.
PS153 (ADU reversal) is OFF after
140 msec from OFF of PS152 (ADU
paper feed).
CausesOperation when jam
occurs
When
stationary
When
operating
ADU
paper exit
jam
FS-103/FS-103A Paper Jam Code Cross-Reference TableFor FS-103A equipped machines, refer to this table to determine the corresponding FS-103 code for those FS103A codes listed below
If this FS-103A code is displayed:
J72-41
J72-42
J72-43
J72-44
J72-46
J72-47
J72-48
J72-49
The corresponding FS-103 code is:
J72-21
J72-22
J72-23
J72-24
J72-26
J72-27
J72-28
J72-29
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 178/290
5-8
Warning
Machine warnings appear as flashing jam codes (3 digits) on the magnification display LED..
CausesOperation in case of warning
Releasing method
Paper feed
door (upper)open
Paper feed
door (lower)
open
Paper exit
door open
Front door
open
Key counter
not mounted
L detection
connector
coming off
Electronic
RDH
memory
overflow
ADU open
Tray 3 over
loading of
transfer
papers
Tray 4 over
loading of
transfer
papers
Paper feed door (upper) of the main body
was opened.
Paper feed door (lower) of the main body
was opened.
Paper feed door was opened.
Front door was opened.
When a key counter is not mounted on a
machine to be equipped with the key
counter.
When L detection output does not vary
after a certain period from the start of copy
operation.
In the case of overflow of memory in a
mode of using E-RDH.
When ADU is drawn out.
When tray 3 is mounted, upper limit
detection sensor is ON (overloading) from
the beginning.
When tray 4 is mounted, upper limit
detection sensor is ON (overloading) from
the beginning.
The main body is stopped
immediately if it is in the copyprocess.
When a key counter is drawn
out during book copying, paper
in copying stops at paper exit.
However, when a key counter
instant cut mode is selected,the main body is stopped
immediately.
Before the start of copying, a
warning appears. After the start
of copying, the main body stops
after ejecting all papers, and a
warning is displayed.
In the case of collective reading,
a warning appears and MSG
functions are conducted. When
ADF is used, an original is
ejected when the machine
stops.
In the case of real time output, a
warning appears and MSG
functions are conducted after
completion of partial output.
The main body is stopped
immediately if it is in process of
copying.
Only in idling, "draw out tray 3”
and “remove paper” are
displayed on detection MSG.
Close paper feed door
(upper).
Close paper feed door
(lower).
Close paper exit door.
Close front door.
Mount a key counter.
Reset to initial set state.
In the case of instant cut
mode, remove jammed
paper.
Insert connector after
turning main switch OFF,
then turn it ON.
Change the number of
originals and read again.
Set ADU.
Pull out corresponding
tray, or reduce the number
of papers.
P17
P19
P33
P51
P81
P27
P45
Classifica-
tion
Warning
code
P91
M a i n b o d y
P13
P14
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 179/290
JAM LIST
5-9
Classifica-
tionCauses
Operation in case of warningReleasing method
A D F
P61
P64
P68
F i n i s h e r
Warning
code
Reversal
enclosure
open
Leaving an
original
*1
Drawing out
of original
*1
No feed
Paper
remaining
on tray
No staple in
stapler
Stapler unit
not mounted
Reversal enclosure of RADF was opened
during idling.
After non-ADF copying, ADF mode was
selected without removing original byopening/closing ADF.
Original was drawn out during book copy-
ing.
Original no feed was caused in ADF mode.
During idling or copying, tray paper detec-
tion or staple tray detection detected pa-
per.
Staples in a staple cartridge were used
up.
Stapler unit is not mounted.
–
–
The main body detects that job
set has been completed, and
ADF and the main body stop
after the copy sets are finished,
and then a warning is displayed.
The main body detects no
original feed, and ADF and the
main body stop after the copies
are finished, and then a warning
is displayed.
After receiving from finisher the
signal showing excessive
sheets loading, a warning is
displayed at a pause in the copy
sets.
In staple mode, copying is
continued until the number of
sheets to be stapled is reached.
–
Close reversal enclosure.
Remove original by
opening and closing ADF.
Set original after drawing
it once.
Recovery is not
conducted.
Set original after drawing
it once.
Conduct JOB recovery
operation. (Remaining
paper process is
necessary when papers
remain in the main bodyduring book copying.)
Remove paper from tray.
(Continue remaining
output operation with copy
ON.)
Load a new staple
cartridge.
Set a stapler unit.
*1: During copy operation, when an ADF original is removed or inserted, P68 or P69 occurs, depending on timing. When thishappens the recovery method is different.
P69
P74
P76
P78
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 180/290
5-10
Classifica-tion
CausesOperation in case of
warning
The main body is stopped
immediately if it is in copy
process, and main relayis turned OFF.
Main relay is turned OFF
and all keys are not
accepted.
The main body is stopped
immediately if it is in copy
process, main relay is
turned OFF, and all keys
are not accepted.
Main relay is turned OFF,
and all keys are not
accepted.
Releasing
method
Main switch
OFFà ON
Main switch
OFFà ON
R e m o v e
jammed paper.
Change a key
word at address
of P47 to 0 in 25
mode.
PS16 (upper limit (upper)) is not
turned ON within 7.5 seconds from
ON of M17 (upper try).PS17 (upper limit (lower)) is not
turned ON within 7.5 seconds from
ON of M18 (lower try).
PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000)) is
not turned ON within 7.5 seconds
from ON of M142 (LCT try (1000)).
PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500)) is
not turned ON within 7.5 seconds
from ON of M141 (LCT try (1500)).
Operation for charging corona
wire cleaning was tried, but
either it was locked, or it waslocked half way.
Operation for transfer and sepa-
ration corona wire cleaning was
tried, but either it was locked,
or it was locked half way.
When charging output is read
as an abnormal discharge.
When transfer output is read
as an abnormal discharge.
When separation output is read
as an abnormal discharge.
Fusing temperature is exceed-
ing approx. 220°C. (Fusing high
temperature detection circuit
operates.)
Fusing temperature is exceed-
ing approx. 220°C. (Fusing high
temperature detection circuit
operates.)
Warmup is not completed
within a certain period from the
start of the warmup. (Fusing
low temperature trouble detec-
tion software operates.)
After completion of warmup,fusing temperature is lower
than a prescribed temperature.
(Fusing low temp. trouble
detection software operates.)
Estimated defective parts
F22-2
F28-1
F22-1
CB (control board)
M17 (upper try)
PS16 (upper limit (upper))CB (control board)
M18 (lower try)
PS17 (upper limit (lower))
CB (control board)
M142 (LCT try (1000))
PS143 (LCT upper limit (1000))
CB (control board)
M141 (LCT try (1500))
PS142 (LCT upper limit (1500))
Charging corona unit
DCDB (DC driver board)
Transfer/separation unit
DCDB (DC driver board)
Charging corona unit
HV1 (high voltage unit 1)
Transfer unit
HV2 (high voltage unit 2)
Separation unit
HV2 (high voltage unit 2)
TH1 (fusing temperature sensor 1)
TH2 (fusing temperature sensor 2)
TH1 (fusing temperature sensor 1)
TH2 (fusing temperature sensor 2)
L2 (fusing heater lamp (upper))
L4 (fusing heater lamp (lower))
Fusing unit insertion failure
Paper feed
lifting
trouble
Wire
cleaning
trouble
High voltage
power
source
trouble
Fusing high
temperature
trouble
Fusing low
temperature
trouble
F28-2
F28-3
Warning
code
F18-4
(15)
F18-3
(10)
F18-2
(lower)
F18-1
(upper)
M a i n b o d y
Trouble
F34-1
F34-2
F35-1
F35-2
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 181/290
JAM LIST
5-11
M a i n b o d y
Classifica-
tionCauses
Change a key
word at address
of P47 to 0 in 25
mode.
Main switch
OFFà ON
R e m o v e
jammed paper.
Set original
glass, and OFF
à ON of main
switch .
OFF of main
switchà ON
Remove
jammed paper,
if any.
CB (control board)
TH1 (fusing temperature sensor 1)
TH2 (fusing temperature sensor 2)
Fusing unit insertion failure
OPMDB (optics drive motor drive board)
PS3 (shading position)
PS4 (paper feed restart)
PS5 (optics return)
PS7 (optics timing)
Exposure unit
OPMDB (optics drive motor drive board)
CB brake data
PS8 (glass)
Original glass mounting
failure
CB (control board)
DCPS2 (DC power supply unit 2)
L1 (exposure lamp)
Exposure temperature fuse
F36-1 Main relay is turned OFF,
and all keys are not ac-
cepted.
The main body is stopped
immediately, the main
relay is turned OFF, and
all keys are not accepted.
The main body is stopped
immediately if it is in copy
process, the main relay is
turned OFF, and all keys
are not accepted.
A prescribed temperature is not
reached within 40 seconds from
the start of warmup. (Fusing
sensor snapping detection soft-
ware operates.)A prescribed temperature is not
reached within 40 seconds from
the start of warmup. (Fusing
sensor snapping detection cir-
cuit operates.)
Each PS in optics is not turned ON
within 5 seconds from the start of
optics returning in initial search.
(PS3 (shading position),PS4 (pa-
per feed restart),PS5 (optics
return),PS7 (optics timing))
Home position sensor is not
turned ON when optics stops inoptics return.
Optics return signal is not turned
ON within 120 msec from start
of brake when optics return.
Original glass detection is OFF.
PS8 (glass) is OFF.
During copying, FB signal of
L1 (exposure lamp is ON or is
snapped) is ON for 20 seconds
or more.
Software detects that FB signal
of L1 (output when exposure
lamp is ON or is snapped) is
not turned ON 1 second after
the outputting of L1 lighting sig-
nals.
FB signal of L1 is ON for 45
seconds in a self-diagnostic
mode and for 21 seconds in all
other cases.
FB signal of L1 (output when
exposure lamp is ON or is
snapped) is ON for 21 seconds
or more during idling.
Snapping
of fusing
sensor
Optics re-
turning trou-
ble
Glass open
trouble
CVR trouble
F36-2
F41-1
Estimated defective partsWarning
code
Releasing
method
Operation in case of
warning
F41-3
F41-4
F43-1
F43-2
F43-3
F43-4
F41-2
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 182/290
5-12
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON. If there is
jamming paper,
remove it.
E46-0
E46-1
E46-2
E46-6
E46-8
E46-9
E47-0
E47-1
E47-2
E48
F49-0
F49-1
F49-2
F49-3
F49-4
F49-5
CausesOperation in case of
warning
Releasing
method
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON. If there is
jamming paper,
remove it.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON. If there is
jamming paper,
remove it.
During APC, when LDB1 (la-
ser diode board 1) or LDB2
(laser diode board 2) sensed
an error.
(Not used).
An error of the FIFO of the E-
RDH.
An error of the extension of the
E-RDH.
An error in the INDEXSB (in-
dex sensor board).
When no change is observed
in outputting the NDEXSB in
executing the APS.
Compression IC error.
When DTACK is not returnedfrom the compression IC.
Communication is not returned
from the CPU of the IPB (image
processing board).
Paper arrived at the 2nd paper
feed position too early.
AD board. During shooting.
Auto gain control.
A sub-scanning beam correc-
tion error occurs when a
complete command is not
returned within 10 seconds.
The E- RDH is not connected.
ADB (AD conversion board) is
not connected.
The laser driver board/1 is not
connected.
The laser driver board/2 is not
connected.
The index-sensing board is notconnected.
The sub-scanning correction
board is not connected.
Classifica-
tionEstimated defective parts
Warning
code
M a i n b o d y
Image
processing
error
Image
processing
CPU error
Sub -scan -
ning
beam correc-
tion error
Image
processing
connection
error
During copying the main
body is stopped
immediately. The main
relay is turned OFF and
all keys are not accepted.
During idling the pro-
cess is immediately
interrupted.
During copying the
process is immediately
interrupted.
May occur only when
AGC is carried out during
idling.
During idling the pro-
cess is immediately
interrupted.
When the power supply is
charged, it is sensed. The
main relay is turned OFF
and all keys are not
accepted.
IPB (image processing board)
LDB1 (laser diode board 1)
LDB2 (laser diode board 2)
Laser interlock
E-RDH (electronic RDH control board)
E-RDH (electronic RDH control board)
INDEXSB (index sensor board)
PB (image processing board)
LDB1 (laser diode board 1)
LDB2 (laser diode board 2)
Laser interlock
DCPS3 (DC power supply unit 3)
E-RDH (electronic RDH control board)
IPB (image processing board)
Bundle
MC8 (conveyance), IPB
(image processing board)
IPB (image processing
board, ADB (A/D board)
IPB (image processing board)
LDB1 (laser diode board 1)
LDB2 (laser diode board 2)
M40 (laser revise)
E-RDH (electronic RDH control board)
ADB (AD conversion board)
LDB1 (laser diode board 1)
LDB2 (laser diode board 2)
INDEXSB (index sensor board)
M40 (laser revise)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 183/290
JAM LIST
5-13
CausesOperation in case of
warning
Releasing
method
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON.
Turn the main
switch from
OFF to ON. If
there is jam-
ming paper,
remove it.
Estimated defective partsClassifica-
tion
Warning
code
M a i n b o d y
Motor speed
abnormality
Fan lock
abnormality
ADF
abnormality
The main body is stopped
immediately. The main
relay is turned OFF and
all keys are not accepted.
During copying, after all
papers exit, the main body
stops, and all keys are not
accepted.
The main body is stoppedimmediately during
shading correction and all
keys are not accepted.
After set JOBs are com-
pleted, the warnings are
displayed.
The main body and the
ADF are stopped imme-
diately. The main relay is
turned OFF and all keys
are not accepted.
The ADF is stopped im-
mediately. With regard to
the main body, after com-pleting copying, the main
relay is turned OFF.
Speed error in M35
(developing screw).
Speed error in M1 (main).
Speed error in M10 (tonersupply).
Speed error in M3 (developing
drive).
Speed error in M4 (drum).
Speed error in M5 (polygon).
Speed error in M151 (ADU
paper feed).
Speed error in M140 (LCT
paper feed).
Speed error in M12 (opticsdrive).
Locking error in FM16 (main
body cooling fan).
Locking error in FM14 (conveyance
suction fan).
Locking error in FM30 (developing
suction fan).
Locking error in FM2 (optics
cooling fan).
Locking error in FM15 (E-RDH
cooling fan).
Locking error in FM11 (polygon
cooling fan).
Locking error in M152 (ADU
fan).
Communication between the
main body CB and the ADF is
discontinued for a certain time.
During the ADF working, a sig-
nal from PS307 (ADF encoder)
is not sent in a certain time.
A D F
F51-1
F51-2
F51-3
F51-4
F51-5
F51-6
F51-7
F51-8
F51-9
F52-1
F52-2
F52-3
F52-4
F52-5
F52-6
F52-7
E60
E67
M35 (developing screw)
DCDB (DC drive board)
M1 (main)
DCDB (DC drive board)
M10 (toner supply)DCDB (DC drive board)
M3 (developing drive)
DCDB (DC drive board)
M4 (drum)
DCDB (DC drive board)
M5 (polygon)
PBDB (polygon drive board)
DCDB (DC drive board)
M151 (ADU paper feed)
DCDB (DC drive board)
M140 (LCT paper feed)
DCDB (DC drive board)
M12 (optics drive)OPMDB (optical drive motor drive board)
FM16 (main body cooling fan)
FM14 (conveyance suction fan)
FM30 (developing suction fan)
FM2 (optics cooling fan)
FM15 (E-RDH cooling fan)
FM11 (polygon cooling fan)
M152 (ADU fan)
CB (control board)
ADF CB (ADF control board)
ADF CB (ADF control board)
M301 (ADF drive)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 184/290
5-14
CausesOperation in case of
warning
Releasing
methodEstimated defective parts
Classifica-
tion
Warning
code
F S - 1 0 2
Communication error
M801 (conveyance) error
M802 (1st exiting) error
M803 (2nd exiting) error
M804 (tray elevation upward/
downward) error
M805 (tray shift) error
M806 (staple guide) error
M807 (staple) error
M808 (oscillating unit) error
<When copying>
After the roller starts
transfering, it does not reach
the shift position. (PS18 (roller
shift HP) is not turned ON.
After the roller starts returning,
PS18 (roller shift HP) is not
turned ON.
<When the power is ON/When
the door opens or closes>
After M2 starts operating, PS18
(roller shift HP) is not turned
ON.
After M3 (tray UP/DOWN) starts
moving, PS2 (tray upper limit)
or PS7 (stapled paper exit
upper limit) is not turned ON.
After M5 (register plate) starts
operating, PS8 (register plate
HP) is not turned OFF within a
certain period, or it is not turned
ON after it's turned OFF.
After M7 (paper exit roller) starts
moving, PS9 (paper exit beltHP) is not turned ON. (Only in
staple mode.)
After M8 (paper exit) starts
moving, opening/closing
action does not stop within a
certain period. (PS12 (paper
exit) is not turned ON or OFF.)
E70
F77-1
F77-2
F77-3
F77-4
F77-5
F77-6
F77-7
F77-8
E77-01
E77-02
E77-03
E77-04
E77-05
Finisher
abnormality
M2 (roller
shift)
abnormality
M3 (tray UP/
DOWN)
abnormality
M5 (register
plate)
abnormality
M7 (paper
exit roller)abnormality
M8 (paper
exit)
abnormality
The main body and the
finisher are stopped
immediately. The main
relay is turned OFF,
rejecting any key input.
The main body is stopped
immediately and the main
relay is turned OFF,
rejecting any key input.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON. Remove
any jammed
paper.
FNS CB (FNS control board)
Connector
FNS CB (FNS control board)
M801 (conveyance)
FNS CB (FNS control board)M802 (1st exit)
FNS CB (FNS control board)
M803 (2nd exit)
FNS CB (FNS control board)
M804 (tray elevation upward/
downward)
FNS CB (FNS control board)
M805 (tray shift)
FNS CB (FNS control board)
M806(staple guide)
FNS CB (FNS control board)
M807(staple)
FNS CB (FNS control board)M808 (oscillating unit)
M2 (roller shift), PS18
(roller shift HP)
M3 (tray UP/DOWN), PS2
(tray upper limit), PS7
(stapled paper exit upper
limit)
M5 (register plate), PS8
(register plate HP)
M7 (paper exit roller), PS9
(paper exit belt HP)
M8 (paper exit), PS12
(paper exit)
F S - 1 0 3
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 185/290
JAM LIST
5-15
CausesOperation in case of
warning
Releasing
methodEstimated defective parts
Warning
code
F S - 1 0 3
M11 (stapler
transfer
abnormality
M12 (stapler
rotary
abnormality
PS20
stacker
paper zero
sensor
abnormality
M10
(stapler F)
abnormality
M9 (stapler R)
abnormality
Weekly timer
abnormality
Power supply
abnormality
E77-06
E77-07
E77-08
E77-09
E77-11
E77-12
E80
F83-1
F83-2
F83-3
F83-4
F83-5
F83-7
After M11 (stapler) starts
operating, PS11 (stapler
transferHP) is not turned OFF,
or it is not turned ON after it's
turned OFF.After two places are stapled
and M12 (stapler rotary)
rotates, PS21 (stapler rotary
HP1) and PS22 (stapler rotary
HP2) are not turned ON.
(Diagonal rotation is not
properly completed.)
After MS12 (stapler rotary)
starts moving, the stapler
vertical rotation is not properly
completed while selecting two
staple places.
PS20 actuator is stuck and does
not return.
PS17 (stapler F HP) is not
truned ON after M10 started
reverse rotation by detecting
J72-31/J72-33.
PS15 (stapler R HP) is not
turned ON after M9 started
reverse rotation by detecting
J72-32/J72-33.
Communication error between
the weekly timer and the main
body.
40V has not arrived from the
DCDB (DC drive board).
24V (for the main body) has not
arrived from the DCDB (DC
drive bd.). (The door is closed.)
24V (for option use) has not arrived from the DCPS2
(DC power supply unit 2).
12V has not arrived.
8V has not arrived.
Processing system 5V has not
arrived.
The main body is stopped
immediately and the main
relay is turned OFF,
rejecting any key input.
Stop communication, The
main relay is turned OFF
and all keys are not ac-
cepted.
When the power supply
error is detected in idling,
the main relay is turned
OFF and all keys are not
accepted.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON. Remove
any jammed
paper.
Turn the main
switch from OFF
to ON.
M11 (stapler), PS11
(stapler transfer HP)
M12 (stapler rotary),
PS21 (stapler rotary
HP1), PS22 (stapler
rotary HP2)
PS20 (stacker paper
zero sensor)
M10 (stapler F), PS17
(stapler F HP)
M9 (stapler R), PS15
(stapler R HP)
Weekly timer
DCPS1 (DC power supply unit 1)
DCDB (DC drive board)
CB (control board)
DCPS1 (DC power supply unit 1)
DCDB (DC drive board)
CB (control board)
DCPS2 (DC power supply unit 2)
CB (control board)
DCPS1 (DC power supply unit 1)CB (control board)
DCPS1 (DC power supply unit 1)
CB (control board)
DCPS3 (DC power supply unit 3)
CB (control board)
W e e k l y t i m e r
M
a i n b o d y
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 186/290
5-16
LIST OF CONNECTOR DISCONNECTIONSWhen an error occurs, there is a possibility that the following connectors are disconnected. If the connector is connected conduct
the troubleshooting outlined in the jam list.
Paper Jams
Code Identification numbers of disconnected connectors
CN53(paper feed), CN233(paper feed)
CN33(side of the control board), CN38(paper feed), CN80(paper feed), CN91(DC drive board), CN122(paper feed),
CN230(paper feed), CN234(paper feed), CN327(paper feed),
CN33(side of the control board), CN38(paper feed, CN80(paper feed), CN91(DC drive board), CN123(paper feed),
CN231(paper feed), CN234(paper feed), CN328(paper feed),
CN13(paper feed), CN203(rear of the control board), CN204(rear of the control board), CN705(DC drive board),
CN720(LCT vertical conveyance), CN721(LCT vertical conveyance), CN726(LCT vertical conveyance)
CN203(rear of the control board), CN204(rear of the control board), CN705(DC driveboard), CN712(LCT horizontal
conveyance), CN714(LCT horizontal conveyance), CN716(LCT horizontal conveyance)
CN64(paper feed), CN73(optical), CN141(paper feed)
CN703(DC drive board), CN713(LCT horizontal conveyance), CN722(LCT relay), CN725(lower left of the rear),
CN727(LCT horizontal conveyance)
CN34(drum), CN62(control board), CN85(on the control board), CN87(2nd paper feed)CN86(2nd paper feed)
CN32(2nd paper feed), CN42(upper portion of the control board), CN46(2nd paper feed)
CN6(control board), CN40(fusing), CN98(above the DC drive board), CN392(fusing drawer)
CN555(ADU), CN562(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN551(ADU), CN556(ADU)
CN532(ADU), CN534(ADU), CN550(ADU), CN553(ADU), CN557(ADU), CN559(ADU)
CN552(ADU)
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
J17
J19
J21J30
J31
J32
J92
J93
J94
J96
Warning
Code Identification number of disconnected connectors
CN7(control board), CN17(paper feed)CN5(control board), CN50(above the drum drawer), CN51(drum), CN63(upper left of the rear)
CN530(ADU vertical conveyance), CN561(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN381(upper left of the front), CN395(power supply at the lower right of an exit paper surface)
CN2(power supply at the lower right of an exit paper surface), CN61(control board)
P17P27
P33
P51
P81
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 187/290
JAM LIST
5-17
Warning
Code Identification number of disconnected connectors
CN8(control board), CN54(upper left of the front surface)
CN396(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface), CN401(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface),
CN425(image processing board), CN430(image processing board), CN481(control board)
CN413(control board), CN471(weekly timer), CN472(weekly timer)
CN23(paper feed)
CN24(paper feed)
CN732(lower left of the rear surface)
CN731(lower right of the rear surface)
CN21(drum), CN39(drum), CN50(above the drum drawer), CN63(upper left of the rear surface)
CN42(above the control board), CN168(2nd paper feed)
CN81(lower right of the DC drive board), CN399(lower of the paper exit surface)
CN98(above the DC drive board), CN392(fusing drawer)
CN66(optical)
CN22(control board), CN67(optical), CN142(left of the optical rear surface)
CN385(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface)
CN428(image processing board), CN450(electronic RDH board)
CN411(A/D board), CN420(image processing board)CN421(image processing board), CN440(writing)
CN422(image processing board), CN441(writing)
CN423(image processing board), CN442(writing)
CN424(image processing board), CN443(writing)
CN161(upper left of the rear surface)
CN16(above the DC drive board), CN65(control board), CN75(DC drive board), CN96(DC drive board), CN202(DC
drive board), CN203(DC drive board), CN204(above the DC drive board), CN205(above the DC drive board)
CN9(control board), CN72(rear of the optical motor), CN74(rear of the optical motor), CN76(rear of the optical motor),
CN92(rear of the optical motor)
CN97(optical)
CN12(lower right of the front surface), CN14(toner replenishing)
CN48(upper left of the front surface), CN329(DC drive board)CN11(above the control board), CN15(above the control board)
CN49(above the exit paper surface), CN93(above the exit paper surface)
CN94(upper right of the DC drive board), CN521(DC drive board), CN554(ADU), CN564(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN124(upper left of the rear surface), CN125(upper left of the rear surface), CN200(DC drive board), CN201(upper left
of the rear surface)
CN421, CN422, CN423, CN424 (IP board)
E46
E47
E80
F18-1
F18-2
F18-3
F18-4
F22-1
F22-2
F35-1
F36-2
F41-2
F41-4
F43-2
F49-0
F49-1F49-2
F49-3
F49-4
F49-5
F50
F51
F51-9
F52
F53
F55F56
F57
F58
F59
E48-2
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 188/290
5-18
Power supply was not turned ON.
All LED were not lit.
LEDs for special functions were not
lit.
LEDs on the left side were not lit.
The area above the fluorescent
display tube was not lit.
The area below the fluorescent
display tube was not lit.
All keys were not accepted.
The weekly timer display did not
appear.
Special function keys were not
accepted.Density was faint.
White paper
Slight dirt on white paper
Faded image on white paper
Entirely black
Front surface and rear surface were
slipped.
Code Identification number of disconnected connectors
CN28(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN382(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface)
CN30(control board), CN88(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN90(DC drive board), CN99(DC drive
board)
CN88(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN99(DC drive board), CN150(control board), CN151(DC
drive board)CN29(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN60(control board)
CN476(weekly timer), CN477(weekly timer)
F67
F83-1
F83-2
F83-3
FJ3
Others
Classification Conditions
CN383(upper left of the front surface), CN390(lower right of the rear
surface), CN393(lower of the rear surface), CN397(lower right power
supply of the paper exiting surface), CN398(weekly timer), CN475(weekly
timer), CN479(weekly timer), CN752(lower right of the rear surface)
CN1(lower right power supply of the paper exit surface), CN3(controlboard), CN4(control board), CN212(operation unit)
CN211(operation unit), CN222(operation unit), CN221(operation unit),
CN227(operation unit)
CN220(operation unit), CN232(operation unit)
CN8(control board), CN213(operation unit), CN215(operation unit),
CN300(operation unit), CN500(operation unit)
CN8(control board), CN213(operation unit), CN215(operation unit),
CN301(operation unit), CN501(operation unit)
CN10(operation unit)
CN414(operation unit)
CN211(operation unit), CN222(operation unit)
CN17(toner replenishing), CN216(DC drive board), CN217(upper left of the
front surface)
CN62(control board)
CN84(upper of the rear surface)
CN85(above the control board), CN87(2nd paper feed)
CN380(lower left power supply of the paper exit surface), CN384(optical),
CN388(optical), CN400(power supply at the lower right of the rear surface),
CN410(A/D board), CN412(optical)
CN68(paper feed), CN144(control board), CN145(paper feed), CN147(paper
feed)
Identification number of disconnected connectors
Power supply
error
Operation uniterror
Image
error
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 189/290
JAM LIST
5-19
Classification Conditions
CN337(lower left of the front fusing), CN81(lower right of the DC driving
board), CN82(upper left of the front), CN399(lower of exited paper surface)
CN78(power source of the lower right of the exit paper surface), CN95(writing
portion of the paper feed surface), CN223(control board), CN224(optical
drive board), CN225(optical drive board), CN226(optical drive board),CN228(optical drive board), CN320(writing), CN321(writing)
CN381(lower left of the front surface), CN384(optical), CN385(power
source of the lower right of the exited paper surface), CN388(optical)
CN81(lower right of the DC drive board), CN399(lower of exit paper surface)
CN29(power source of the lower left of the exit paper surface), CN81(lower
right of the DC drive board), CN380(power source of the lower left of the exit
paper surface)
CN20(drum), CN31(upper of the rear surface), CN70(upper left of the rear
surface)
CN31(upper of the rear surface), CN71(upper of the control board)
CN73(optical), CN77(optical)CN25(paper feed), CN58(paper feed), CN59(paper feed), CN79(paper
feed)
CN701(DC drive board), CN711(1500LCT), CN724(1000LCT), CN728(1000
LCT drawer)
CN41(upper left of the front surface)
CN137(optical), CN143(optical), CN146(optical), CN152(left of the rear of
optical)
CN130(optical), CN133(optical), CN134(optical), CN138(optical), CN163(left
of the rear of optical)
CN43(power source of the lower left of the exit paper surface), CN101(right
(lower) of rear surface), CN114(control board)
CN102(right (upper) of the rear surface), CN116(control board)
CN505(ADU drawer), CN510(DC drive board), CN531(ADU)
CN56(rear of the control board)
CN120(control board), CN121(DC drive board), CN706(DC drive board),
CN709(1500LCT drawer), CN733(LCT stand), CN734(LCT stand)
Identification number of disconnected connectors
Error in warm-
up
Lamp
abnormality
Dirt
Operationerror
Recognition
abnormality
Warmup is not completed.
Shading is not completed.
Exposure lamp is not lit.
Upper fusing lamp was not lit.
Lower fusing lamp was not lit.
Adhesion of carrier
Front edge or rear edge was dirty.
Touch the right side of optical.Upward/downward elevation motor
continued to rotate. (Gear is
damaged)
LCT elevation motor continued to
rotate. (Gear is damaged)
Total counter was not operated.
APS did not function.
APS sensed erroneously.
FIN did not recognize (Only G mode
could be selected or not operated.)
ADF was not recognized.
ADF was not recognized.
(Only 1-1 and 2-1 could be
recognized.)
The upper/lower step tray could not
be recognized.
LCT was not recognized.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 190/290
5-20
Classification Conditions
CN44(paper feed), CN45(paper feed), CN47(paper feed)
CN710(1500LCT), CN723(1000LCT)
CN413(control board), CN471(weekly timer), CN472(weekly timer)
-CN560(ADU vertical conveyance)
CN324(upper of the control board), CN325(lower of the drum drawer)
Identification number of disconnected connectors
Recognition
error
Others
Paper on a tray was not detected.
(“There is a paper” display that a
paper will be replaced.)
Weekly timer did not recognize.
-Verticle downward movement
occurred in the vicinity of ADU inlet.
“J21” did not appear during drum-
winding jamming.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 191/290
ADJUSTMENTS
6-1
HOW TO USE THEADJUSTMENT MANUAL
This section details adjustments and procedures. Use this
section for making adjustments and as a checklist before
implementing corrective measures in the field.
1. Does the power supply meet the requirements?
2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is the machine sharing its power source with another high
current consumption machine that draws large currents
intermittently? (e.g. an elevator, air conditioner, or other
source of electrical consumption)
4. Is the installation environment suitable?
a.Keep out of high temperature, high humidity, direct sun
light and poor ventilation.
b.Make sure that the floor where the machine is installed
is level.
5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in the originalitself?
6. Is the density adjusting control at the proper position?
7. Are the platen glass and ADF conveyance belt clean?
8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy?
9. Are the copying materials at the end of their usable life?
(developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.)
10. Is there toner in the machine?
The following items should also be observed when repairing
the machine.
1. Only one side of the AC power line is disconnected when
the main switch of this machine is turned OFF. Always
unplug the machine before beginning work. If it is absolutely
necessary to work with the power ON, exercise care to
avoid being caught in the rear scanning portion of the
exposure unit.
2. Special care should be taken when handling the fusing
unit since it operates at extremely high temperatures.
3. The developing unit is surrounded by a strong magnetic
field. Keep watches and metering equipment away from it.
4. Avoid damaging the drum with tools or similar objects.
5. Do not touch the IC pins with your bare hands.
ADJUSTMENTS WHENREPLACING PARTS
Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not only
required when a defective copy image occurs, but also after
replacing or reinstalling certain parts.
How to Use the Tables
The following items are used in the tables throughout this
section.
ModeIndicates the adjustment mode.
[47] : 47 mode
[25] : 25 mode
[36] : 36 mode
[35] : 35 mode
[ – ] : Normal mode
CodeIt shows the code used in each mode and a copy quantity
setting button.
VR• [–] None
• Indicates the VR number on the CB1 (main body control
board).
• Indicates the board name when neither VR or DSW
applies.
Page
Indicates the page to refer to in the adjustment section.
ConditionsNew: Indicates adjustment (including check) is required
when replacing a new part.
Reset: Indicates adjustment (including check) is required
when a part has been reinstalled.
Symbols used in the tables 1 2 ················· Indicates there is a priority sequence
for adjustments (including checks)
and settings.
(Empty circle): Indicates adjustments (including
checks) and settings that can be car-
ried out independently.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 192/290
6-2
Page
Condition
A d j u s t m e n t a n d s e t t i n g i t e
m
Mode
Code
47
002
7-2
47
003
7-2
47
006
7-3
47
007
7-4
47
011
7-4
47
095
7-6
36
91
7-31
36
98
7-32
36
94
7-30
36
96
7-33
25
67-9
7-19
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
C h a r g e c o r o n a c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t
T r a n s f e r c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t
S e p a r a t i o n ( A C ) c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t
S e p a r a t i o n ( D C ) c u r r e n t a d j u s t m e n t
C h a r g e g r i d v o l t a g e a d j u s t m e n t
D e v e l o p i n g b i a s a d j u s t m e n t
L d e t e c t i o n a d j u s t m e n t
C o p y t y p e f r o n t e d g e t i m i n g a d j u s t m e n t
E l e c t r o n i c R D H
t y p e f r o n t e d g e t i m i n g a d j u
s t m e n t
A d j u s t m e n t t h e a m o u n t o f e r a s i n g t h e f r o n t e d g e o f t h e o r i g i n a l
L e a d - t o - t r a i l m a g n i f i c a t i o n a d j u s t m e n t
P a p e r f e e d i n g l o o p a m o u n t a d j u s t m e n t
O p t i c a l b r a k e a m o u n t a d j u s t m e n t
T r a y
p a p e r s i z e s e t t i n g
L i n e a r i t y e v a l u a t i o n p a t t e r n
A d j u s t m e n t o f g r a d a t i o n
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
-
New
-
Part Name
Drum
Developer
Charge corona wire
Charge corona control plate
Transfer/separation corona wire
High voltage unit 1
High voltage unit 2
Optics wire
Write unit
Memory IC
Setting the lower tray paper size
35
16
7-44
35
80
7-557-56
12
15 16
• New means replace with a new part and reset means to reset the part.
• The circles will have a number when there is an adjustment priority.
47
004
7-3
36
92
7-32
36
93
7-31
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 193/290
ADJUSTMENTS
6-3
SETTING AND CHECKING WITH THE P FUNCTION
The P function is capable of installing and confirming various
settings.
To confirm an item, enter its number using the copy quantity
buttons, while pressing the P button. On the copy quantity
display or the message display, the current value is displayed.
To change an item, refer to the appropriate page.
List of Confirmation Item by Means of theP FunctionThere are 6 items which can be confirmed items using the P
function.
Confirmation of the PM Count andResetting
Confirmation Method
Step
1
2
Operation (display)
While pressing the P button, press
copy quantity button 5.
Confirm the PM count on the
message display.
Operation point
P button,
copy quantity
button
Resetting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation (display)
While pressing the page quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Press “090” using the copy quantity
button.
Press the start print button.
Input a start date using the copy
quantity button.
Press the start print button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
button,
main switch
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Operation button
P + 1
P + 3
P + 4
P + 5
P + 7
P + 9
Item
Total count
Density shift
Developing count
PM count
Drum count
ECM/data control
Remarks
Reinitialization
impossible
Reinitialization
possible (See
the next page.)Reinitialization
possible (See
47-95 mode.)
Reinitialization
possible (See
47-90 mode.)
Reinitialization
possible (See
47-91 mode.)
Reinitialization
possible (See
data control.)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 194/290
6-4
Setting the Density Shift
Setting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation (display)
While pressing the P button, press
copy quantity button 3.
Confirm the density shift display (1
to 5) on the message display (see
*1).
Select a mode by means of a char-
acter/photograph button.
Input a density shift number which
is requested to change by means
of the copy quantity setting button
Press F1 in the menu selection
button.
Operation point
P button,
copy quantity
button
Character/pho-
tograph button
Copy quantity
button
Menu selection
button
*1 : Relation between the copy quantity button and the density
shift.
Copy quantity setting button
1
2
3
4
5
Density shift
Dark 2
Dark 1
Standard
Light 1
Light 2
Confirmation of the Drum Count andResetting
Confirmation Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation (display)
While pressing the page quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Press “091” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Press the start print button.
Input a start date by means of the
copy quantity buttons.
Press the start print button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
button,
main switch
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Step
1
2
Operation (display)
While pressing the P button, press
copy quantity button 7.
Confirm the drum count by means
of a message display.
Operation point
P button,
copy quantity
button
Resetting Method
Service Data Control Operation ModeAccessNote: Mode 25 address 25 must be set to “2” and address 52
to “8” to allow entry into this mode.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation point
Main switch
Copy quantitybutton,
main switch
Copy quantity
button
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
UP/DOWN but-
tons
STOP/CLEAR
buttons
Main switch
Operation (display)
If the unit is ON, turn it OFF.
Press the [P] button while turningthe power ON.
Enter the password - if none has
been set, enter “0000000”. The
display goes to {Service Control
Operation Mode] when a valid
password is entered.
Select one of the desired items:
1: Limit parts count
2: Read parts copy count
3: Parts count reset
4: --------
5: Read jam count
6: --------
7: Read mode copy count
8: Read SC count
Enter the selected item.
Scroll through the entries within
the selected mode.
To return to step 1, above.
Turn the unit OFF and back ON
again to return to normal printer
operation.
Refer to the table on page 6-5 for additional information.
Revised 3/98
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 195/290
ADJUSTMENTS
6-5
Function to Control DataIn order to utilize the data control function, it is necessary to register a master key code in advance. Items capable of being confirmed
or installed with this function are different depending upon the data input in the P05, P25 and P52 addresses in the 25 mode.
Data Control Function ItemThis chart shows the relationship between the data input in the P05, P25 and P52 addresses in the 25 mode and the control item
number.
P05 = 0 : ECM is not selected; 1 : select the ECM (no stop in limit); 2 : select the ECM (stop after copy operation); 3 : select
the ECM (stop immediately)
P25 = 0 : protection; 1 : cancel copy control protection; 2 : cancel service control protection
P52 = 0 : no function; 8 : cancel protection;
Address No.
P05
P25
P52
25
Mode
0
0
0
--
--
--
Displaying copy count for
each size.
Detailed procedure 1
See *1.
--
--
--
0
2
0
Individual spare part
quantity limit setting.
Detailed procedure 3
See *3
Display individual spare
part copy limit.
Detailed procedure 4
See *3.
Copy quantity count re-
set for each spare part.
Detailed procedure 5
See *3.
ADF/RDH paper feed
count.
Detailed procedure 6
See *4.
Jam frequency count by
location.
Detailed procedure 7
See *5.
--
--
0
2
8
Individual spare part
quantity limit setting.
Detailed procedure 3
See *3
Display individual spare
part copy limit.
Detailed procedure 4
See *3.
Copy quantity count re-
set for each spare part.
Detailed procedure 5
See *3.
ADF/RDH paper feed
count.
Detailed procedure 6
See *4.
Jam frequency count by
location.
Detailed procedure 7
See *5.
Copy quantity count for
each mode used.
Detailed procedure 8
See *6.
Counting the number of
SC occurrences.
Detailed procedure 9
See *7.
Setting data
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
C o n t r o l i t e m
n u m b e r .
0
1
0
--
--
--
Displaying copy count for
each size.
Detailed procedure 1
See *1.
Reset of counters.°All reset°Individual resetDetailed procedure 2See *2.
--
--
Revised 3/9
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 196/290
6-6
Operation Procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
5
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
6
7
Operation point
P button,
copy quantity
button
Copy quantity
buttonCopy quantity
button
Start print button
Reduction/mag-
nification button
Reduction/mag-
nification button
Start print button
Reduction/mag-
nification button
Copy quantity
button
Start print button
Start print
button
Stop/clear
button
Red/mag button
Start print button
Stop/clear
button
P button,
stop/clear
button
* : Repeat procedures 3 through 6 if necessary.
* 1 Calling Copy Count for Each Size
No.
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
Paper size
-
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11
8.5x5.55.5x8.5
-
8.5x14
Operation (display)
While pressing the P button, press
copy quantity button 9.
Input a master key code (8 digits).
Input a control item number (*)
Press the start print button. (*)
(*)
In the case of 1, 4, 6, 7 , 8, and 9
Select an item.
In the case of 5
Select a counter number.
Press the start print button.
In the case of 3
Select an item.
Set limit number.
Press the start print button.
In the case of 2 (all reset)
Press the start print button.
In the case 2 (individual reset)
Press the stop/clear button.
Select a counter number
Press the start print button.
Press the stop/clear button. (*)
While pressing the P button, press
the stop/clear button and return to
the normal mode.
9
10 Bypass feed
8.5x11
* 2 Copy Count Reset (Individual Reset) for Each Size
No.
1
2
34
5
6
7
8
9
10
* 3 Copy Quantity Limit Setting for Each Spare Part
Copy Quantity Count Calling for Each Spare Part
Copy Quantity Count Resetting for Each Spare Part
No.
1~20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28~30
Paper size
Counting copy frequency.
Counting frequency of manual paper feeding copy.
Counting frequency of the main body upper step
paper feeding.
Counting frequency of the main body lower step
paper feeding.
Counting frequency of the PFU upper step paper
feeding.
Counting frequency of the PFU lower step paper
feeding.
Counting copy frequency of the ADU paper feeding.
Counting copy frequency of the main body paper
ejecting.
Counting frequency of ADU paper feeding.
Paper size
-
11x17
8.5x148.5x11
8.5x5.5
5.5x8.5
-
8.5x14
8.5x11
Bypass feed
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 197/290
ADJUSTMENTS
6-7
Copy mode
Copy quantity in one side−>one side mode.
Copy quantity in one side−>both side mode.
Copy quantity in both sides−>one side mode.
Copy quantity in both sides−>both side mode.
Copy quantity from one side to one side when usingthe ADF.
Copy quantity from one side to both sides when
using the ADF.
Copy quantity in a staple sort mode.
Copy quantity in a sort mode.
Copy quantity in a group mode.
Frequency of staple.
Copy quantity in the same magnification.
Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 1.41/2.00.
Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 1.22/1.55.
Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 1.15/1.29.
Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 0.86/0.77.
Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 0.82/0.65.Copy quantity in a fixed magnification of 0.71/0.50.
Copy quantity in an arbitrary magnification.
Copy quantity in a zoom magnification.
Copy quantity in the maximum magnification of
2.00.
Copy quantity in the minimum magnification of 0.50.
Copy quantity in the AMS mode.
Copy quantity in the APS mode.
Copy quantity in the AES mode.
Copy quantity in the interruption mode.
Copy quantity in the manual feeding mode.
Copy quantity in the page continuous copying mode.
Copy quantity in the frame erasure mode.
Copy quantity in the folding erasure mode.
Copy quantity in the same magnification image shift
mode.
Copy quantity in the reduction magnification image
shift mode.
Copy quantity in a thick paper mode.
Copy quantity in a thin paper mode.
Copy quantity in an inter-sheet 1.
Copy quantity in an inter-sheet 2.
Copy quantity in an OHP mode.
Copy quantity in a mixed mode.
Reading frequency of a job memory.Frequency of utilizing a pre-heating mode.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 1.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 2 to 5.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 6 to 10.
Copy start frequency when a set quantity is 11 or
more.
Copy start frequency in intersheet 1.
Copy start frequency in intersheet 2.
* 4 Counting the Number of ADF Paper Feeding
No.
1
2
3
4
Paper feed mode
ADF/RDH
RADF/RRDH
RDH(sort, staple sort)
RRDH(sort, staple sort)
* 5 Counting the Frequency of Jamming for Each Origin
Point
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
78
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2021
22
23
24
Jamming
J10
J11
J12
J13
J14
-
J16J17
J19
J21
J31
J32
J61
J62
J63
J72
J75
J92
J93
J94J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J11-4
No.
25
26
27
28
29
30
3132
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
4445
46
47
48
* 6 Counting Copying Number for Each Mode Used
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1617
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
3839
40
41
42
43
44
45
Jamming
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3J13-4
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J14-4
J30
J74
J95
J96
J10-2
J10-4
J17-1
J17-2J17-3
J17-4
J17-5
J17-6
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 198/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 199/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-1
47 MODE AND MULTIMODE
Setting the 47 Mode and Multimode47 Model
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions by activating I/O
(input/output) checks of loads and signals. Various adjustments
are also performed in this mode.
• Setting method
a. Turn the main switch OFF.
b. Turn the main switch back ON while pressing down on the
4 and 7 copy quantity buttons.
c. To check input signals
(1) Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the
desired signal (sensors, etc.) by referring to the I/O
check list.
(2) The level of the signal (Hi or Lo) will appear on the
magnification display.
Note: “Hi” and “Lo” indicate the signal level applied to the CB,
it does not pertain to the mechanical state of the sensor
or switch. The mechanical position of the sensor or
switch with respect to what signal it produces at the CB
is dependent upon its function in the copier.
d. To check outputs loads
(1) Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the
desired output (load, etc.) by referring to the I/O check
list.
(2) Press the start print button.
Depending on the output, a load will be activated or a
signal will be output.
Start print button
Before pressing
After pressing
Description
Input signal level indication
Output load operation/signal
Code
Input
Output
the I/O check code list.
• Setting Method
a. Enter the 47 mode.
b. Enter the code (using the copy quantity buttons) for the
desired I/O. (Only codes that support the multimode can be
used.)
c. Press the P button.
d. The standard mode (existing within the multimode) will
flash on the copy quantity display.
e. Enter the desired multimode number using the copy quantity
buttons.
f. The multimode number will flash on the copy quantity
display.
g. Press the P button.
h. Press the start print button.
i. After setting the multimode, perform the check in accordance
with the requirements of the particular 47 mode I/O check.
j. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 47 multimode.
e. Press the stop/clear button to disable the output.
f. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 47 mode.
2. Multimode
This mode exists within the 47 mode. It enables multiple I/ O checks from a single I/O check code. The functions that
support the multimode are indicated by an ”M“ marked in
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 200/290
7-2
Initializing the NVRAMThis procedure (1) details the steps required to initialize the
7050 NVRAM,(2) specifies the adjustments that MUST be reset
afterward, and (3) presents the steps for storing of the new
adjustment data and restoring the data to previous settings if
required. Initialization is required if the NVRAM becomes
defective and needs to be replaced, if the stored data in memory
becomes corrupted, or in need of a fresh start to reset machineparameters.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all counter values (to factory
settings) within the 25, 35, 36, and 47 modes. It is important to
follow the procedure as given below to properly reset the
copier.
Setting MethodImportant note: Assuming that the developer in the machine is
good and does not need replacing, enter mode 47, code 17, and
record the L-detection reference databefore proceding with the
initialization, which will reset this value. Reenter this recorded
data after the initialization process is completed. If this step is
not performed, new developer will have to be added and the L-
detection adjustment performed.
Adjustments Required after InitializationThe following adjustments must be accomplished in the order
given, in particular, adjustments 2 through 6, after the initialization
procedure.
Adjustment Mode/Code
1. Charge corona grid 47/007
2. Horizontal magnification 36/0933. Lead edge timing (copy) 36/091
4. Lead edge timing (ERDH) 36/098
5. Lead edge erase 36/092
6. Loop timing 36/094
7. L-detection * 47/095
8. Paper size settings for trays 2, 3, and 4 25/069
9. Gradation 35/080/P6 (LD1)
35/080/P7 (LD2)
* Can be omitted if the current value at mode 47, code 17, is
recorded before the initialization process (47/092) is
performed, and this value is reentered after the initialization.
Storing all Settings into MemoryEnter mode 47, code 096, to store the data from the above
adjustments into NVRAM.
To Restore Data Back to Mode 47, Code 096,SettingsIf changes to the setting(s) were made after the data was stored
to NVRAM using mode 47, code 096, enter mode 47, code 093
to restore the setting(s) back to the last mode 47, code 096
memory save.
IMPORTANT NOTE on DMAX
When initialization is performed, the value at mode 47, code
050, which is the control value for both the developer rotation
speed and D-max, is set to a factory default of “2” ...
(1) This value will not cause any problems if the fusing heater
temperature at the time the unit is turned ON is below 50°C
because a D-max correction will automatically be performed;
however...
(2) if the fusing heater temperature is above 50°C at the time
of power ON, D-max correction MUST be accomplished by
placing the unit in mode 47, code 18, and pressing the START/
PRINT button.
If you are not sure about the machine temperature, perform the
D-max manually.
Failure to accomplish this step when requiredwill result in extremely light copies.
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Magnification/
reduction button
or the P and
copy quantity
buttons
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
START PRINT
button, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 2 and 5, turn ON the main
switch.
Select address P00 and enter “0”
at this address.
Turn OFF the machine, then, while
pressing copy quantity buttons 4
and 7, turn ON the main switch.
Input “092” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Press the START/PRINT button
and turn OFF the machine.
Reselect the 25 mode and enter
“9” at address P00 using the normal
procedures.
Exit the mode.
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 201/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-3
Transfer Current Adjustment
Setting Method
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantitybuttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “003” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “3”.
Press the P button.
The existing data will flash on the
display.
Using the copy quantity buttons,
enter the correct value to adjust
the transfer current to within
standards.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Standard value (targeted) : 87
Amount of change per step :
about 0.5 µA
Press the P button.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Entry
Copy quantitybuttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “004” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “4”.
Press the P button.
The existing data will flash on the
display.
Using the copy quantity buttons,
enter the correct value to adjust
the AC separation current to within
standards.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Standard value (targeted) : 100
Amount of change per step :
about 1.5 µA
Press the P button.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Separation (AC) Current Adjustment
Setting Method
Separation (DC) Current Adjustment
Setting Method
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “006” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “6”.
Press the P button.
The existing data will flash on the
display.
Using the copy quantity buttons,enter the correct value to adjust
the DC separation current to within
standards.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Standard value (targeted) : 57
Amount of change per step :
about 0.6 µA
Press the P button.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantitybuttons
P button
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switchCopy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Charge Corona Current Adjustment
Setting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.Enter “002” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “2”.
Press the P button.
The existing data will flash on the
display.
Using the copy quantity buttons,
enter the value necessary to adjust
the charge corona current to within
standards.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Target value = 170
Amount of change per step :
about 1.2µA
Press the P button.
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 202/290
7-4
Charge Grid Voltage AdjustmentSetting Method
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “007” using the copy quantitybuttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “7”.
Press the P button.
The existing data will flash on the
display.
Using the copy quantity buttons,
enter the correct value to adjust
the charging grid voltage to within
standards.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Standard value (targeted) : 137
Amount of change per step :
about 1.6 µA
Press the P button.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantitybuttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
When Replacing the Drum(1) Check the standard of the new drum written on the inside
of the flange.
(2) Set the metter.
+ grid pin
- ground
Range DC1000V
(3) 47-007 mode. (above procedure item 1 and 2)
(4) Start print button ON.
(5) Check the meter value.
(6) Adjust by using steps 3 to 6 in the setting method
procedure.
Developing Bias Adjustment
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “011” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “11”.
Press the P button.
The existing data will flash on the
display.
Using the copy quantity buttons,
enter the correct value to adjust
the developing bias to within
standards.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Standard value (targeted) : 169
Amount of change per step :
about 1.2 volts
Press the P button.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Setting method
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 203/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-5
Test Pattern Density Selection
Setting Method
Adjustment Mode List• This feature displays the adjustment available with this
machine; however, these adjustments are not selectable by
this means.
Setting method
*1: See the adjustment mode list in this section for a complete
listing of these adjustment items.
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantitybuttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “094” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “94”.
Press the start print button. An
item and corresponding data are
displayed.
Press the reduction/magnification
button to select a different
adjustment item (*1).
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantitybuttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
R e d u c t i o n /
magnif ication
button
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.Input “013” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “13”.
Press the P button.
The existing data will flash on the
display.
Using the copy quantity buttons,
enter the value corresponding to
the test pattern desired.
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Note: This setting selects the
desired overall halftone test pattern
that is generated within the mode
35, code 01. The following test
patterns can be selected: 0: white,
70: halftone, 255: black
Press the P button.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switchCopy quantity
buttons
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “093” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “93”.
Press the start print button.
Initial Setting• This setting reinitializes the machine back to the initial
factory settings.
Setting Method
Step
1
2
3
Note: After completing the test pattern output, restore the
value to 255.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 204/290
7-6
L-Detection Adjustment• When performing this adjustment, the toner density is
automatically sensed. The voltage corresponding to the
concentration of toner in the new developer will be memorized.
Note: Perform this adjustment during machine setup or when
replacing developer. If developer that is being used is
adjusted, the toner density of the developer in use will
become the reference value, resulting in an incorrectadjustment value.
Setting Method
Telephone Number Setting• This feature is used to register telephone numbers.
Telephone numbers are displayed on the message display
for generation service calls.
Setting Method
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantitybuttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “180” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Press the start print button. The
following will be displayed:
TEL NO.
XXX-XXX-XXXX
Enter the telephone number using
the copy quantity buttons. Press P
for a dash (-).
Press the set/F1 button.
Press the stop/clear button.
Step
1
2
3
4
56
Entry
Copy quantitybuttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Copy quantity
buttons, start
print button
Set/F1 buttonS t o p / c l e a r
button
Operation (display)
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 4 and 7, turn ON the main
switch.
Input “095” using the copy quantity
buttons.
Confirm that the copy quantity dis-
play indicates “95”.
Press the start print button.
• The sti rr ing screw in thedeveloping unit rotates and the
L-detection sensor detects the
developer density.
• After about 5 minutes, sensing
automatically stops and “ADJ
OK” is displayed.
Step
1
2
3
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons,
main switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 205/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-7
Input Check List
CVR FB signal
Toner level detecting signal
Internal temperature detecting signalTH1 signal
TH2 signal
Humidity sensor signal
Dmax MONI signal
Dmax signal
Drum jamming signal
No-paper detecting signal Contents of M:
Tray upper limit detecting Common to 10, 12, 16, & 19
Paper size signal 1: Main body upper
Display for each paper size 2: Main body lower
11x17:7, 8.5x14:6, 8.5x11R:8, 3: LCT right
8.5x11:5, 5.5x8.5R:C, 5.5x8.5:1 4: LCT left
Only to 10Pre-try detecting 5: Bypass feed
Paper feed sensor signal
1: 2nd paper feed stop signal
2: Intermediate conveyance sensor
3: Optical synchronization sensor
4: LCT conveyance sensor (1000)
5: LCT horizontal conveyance sensor (1500)
Paper exit sensor signal
Interlock signals
1: Paper conveyance door
2: LCT interlock
3: ADU interlock
4: Fuser level detectOptics sensor signals
1: Optics return/home
2: Shading
3: Optics return/home
4: Registration
6: ADF/EE
7: Over run
Main body ROM version
P-001-P to display C1 ROM version
P-002-P to display C2 ROM version
P-003-P to display C3 ROM version
P-004-P to display C4 ROM version
Processing ROM version
P-001-P to display I1 ROM version
P-002-P to display I2 ROM version
H L
State of display and
signal sourceMulti
modeCodeClassification Symbol Name
000
001
002003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
012
016
019
020
022
023
030
048
049
DCPS2
TLD
TH1
TH2
TCSB
TCSB
TCSB
*1
*2
*3
PS14
PS20
PS19
PS144
PS146
PS25
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Analog signal
Paper feed
Normal
Yes
No paper
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Abnormal
No
Paper
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Paper feed
and
conveyance
Optics
Main body
*1 - PS12, PS13, PS15, PS140, PS141 *2 - PS16, PS17, PS142, PS143 *3 - PS20, PS21, PS200, PS210
PS11
PS160
PS158
PS24
PS7
PS3
PS5
PS4
PS2
PS1
Note: 47-197 - START/PRINT displays installed ERDH SIMM
memory in Mbs.
Revised 3/98
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 206/290
7-8
050
060
064
069
079
080
082
089
Checking whether or not a connector is connected
1: A/D board connection (CN420)
2: LD1 board connection (CN421)
3: LD2 board connection (CN422)
4: INDEX board connection (CN423)
5: Sub scanning correction motor connection (CN424)
6: Scanner I/F board connection (CN426)
7: CFF I/F board connection (CN427)
8: Electronic RDH board connection (CN428)
9: Printer I/F board connection (CN429)
Interlock signals
1: ADF open/close interlock
2: Reversal portion interlock
DF306
1: No paper detecting
Signal for connect ADF
1: DF306
Signal for connect finisher
1: FS-102
Interlock signal
Paper detecting signal
1: Paper feed
2: Reversal detect
3: Vertical conveyance
4: Paper exit 1
5: Paper exit 3
6: No paper7: Paper exit 2
Signal for connect ADU
H L
State of display and
signal sourceMulti
modeCodeClassification Symbol Name
MS301
MS302
PS301
PS158
M
M
M
M
M
M
Connect
OPEN
PAPER
ADF
FS
OFF
OFF
ON
Not-
connect
CLOSE
NO
PAPER
NO
ADF
NO FS
ON
ON
OFF
Intrinsic
function
ADF
and
RADF
Sorter
and
Finisher
ADU
PS152
PS153
PS157
PS154
PS156
PS151PS155
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 207/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-9
Output Check List
Exposure lamp
Toner supply motor
Charging
Transfer
Separation (AC)
Transfer + separation (AC + DC)
Separation (DC)
Grid
Dmax / γ LED
JAM detecting LED
Guide plate
Bias
Test pattern density
γ correction level adjustment
L-detection reference data
Dmax level adjustment
1st paper feed solenoid
1: Main body, upper 2: Main body, lower
3: LCT, right (1000) 4: LCT left (1500)
5: Bypass feed
Paper feed motor
1: High speed - paper feeding (main body)
2: Low speed - bypass feed (main body)
3: LCT
1st paper feed clutch
1: Main body, upper 2: Main body, lower
3: LCT, right (1000) 4: LCT, left (1500)
5: Bypass feed
Intermediate conveyance clutch
2nd paper feed clutch
Separation claw solenoid
Optical return trip driving
Polygon motor
Polygon motor + APC
Shading correction + AGC + AOC
Platen AES operation
Laser 1 PWM (pulse width modulation)
Laser 2 PWM
Correction of sub-scanning beam
Multi
modeCodeClassification Symbol Name
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
029
030031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
L1
M10
HV1
HV2
HV2
HV2
HV2
HV1
HV1
HV1
SD1
SD2
SD141
SD140
SD3
M13
M13
M140
MC5
MC6
CL1
CL2
MC7
MC8
MC3
SD4
M12
M5
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
Temporary
Analog signal
Optics
Paper feed
Do not adjust these
settings in the field.
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 208/290
7-10
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
060
064
069
080
084
090091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Main motor (1-31; use 16)
Drum motor
Fan motor
1: Main fan 2: Optical fan
3: Suction fan 4: Image processing fan
5: Electronic RDH fan 6: ADU fan
7: Developing fan
Total counter
Charge cleaning mtr -> Trans./Sep. cleaning mtr (continuous)
Fusing heater lamp
1: Thin paper mode 2: Standard mode
3: Thick paper mode
Charge cleaning motor
Transfer/separation cleaning motor
Operation unit (all are lit)
Buzzer
Setting the rotation number of the developing driving motor in
400 dpiPCL
PSL
Developing screw motor
Toner supply motor
Message test
Charge cleaning motor, returning
Transfer/separation cleaning motor, returning
Drive (DF306)
1: Conveyance belt (forward)
2: Conveyance belt (reverse)
Switch (DF 306)
1: Paper feeding plate solenoid
2: Paper feeding solenoid
3: Reversing solenoid
4: Swing back solenoid
5: Speed reduction paper exiting solenoid
Test mode
1: Single-sided document continuously
2: Single-sided document one by one
3: Double-sided document continuously
4: Double-side document one by one
ADU paper feed motor
ADU load
1: Clockwise clutch 2: Counterclockwise clutch
3: Conveyance clutch
4: Longitudinal conveyance solenoid
PM counter clearProcess counter clear 1: Drum counter
Process initial setting (all settings)
Initial setting (data return in delivery from process) 36 mode
Adjustment mode list display mode* (see page 7-12)
L-detection reference value automatic adjustment (developing
counter reset)
Process delivery completing setting 25/36 mode
Lighting adjustment
1: Mode 1 2: Mode 2
Transfer and separation humidity setting
Unvolatile reference mode
Multi
modeCodeClassification Symbol Name
M1
M4
FM16, FM2
FM14
FM11
FM22
FM152
C(T)
M7, M8
L2,L4
M7
M8
M3
PCL
PSL
M35
M10
M7
M8
M301
M151
X
X
X
RADF
ADU
Main body
Intrinsic
function
Adjustment
process and
others
Do not adjust these
setttngs in the field.
CL151
CL152
CL153
SD152
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 209/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-11
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Transfer
Separation (AC)
Separation (DC)
Grid
Bias
Laser 1 PWM
Laser 2 PWM
Main motor speed
Setting the rotation number of the developing driving motor in
600 dpi
Setting password of the weekly timer (0000 = no password)
Telephone number setting
AGC setting
AOC setting
Setting a targeted value of white correction
Setting a targeted value of black correction
Checking the SIMM volume of the electronic RDH
Checking SIMM of the electronic RDHSetting offset quantity for correcting sub-scanning slip
Adjusts the printer mode to be automatically set in the NOVRAM
for charge, grid, transfer, separation, bias, and laser power.
Starts gamma auto. compensation.
Multi
modeCodeClassification Symbol Name
103
104
106
107
111
136
137
140
150
160
180
190
191
192
193
197
198199
120
114
HV2
HV2
HV2
HV1
HV1
M1
M3
X
X
X
X
X
Special mode
600dpi mode
Do not adjust these
settings in the field.
Additional codes:
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 210/290
7-12
Adjustment Mode List
CHARGE (1) ADJ1. Charge current
2. Transfer current
3. Separation (AC) current
4. Separation (DC) current
5. Grid voltage
6. Developing bias
7. Transfer current
(600dpi)
8. Separation (AC) current(600dpi)
9. Separation (DC) current
(600dpi)
10. Grid voltage (600dpi)
11. Developing bias
(600dpi)
12. Adjusting Dmax level
13. Laser 1 PWM (600dpi)
14. Laser 2 PWM (600dpi)
15. Laser 1 PWM (600dpi)
16. Laser 2 PWM (600dpi)
17. LD1 offset adjustment
(400dpi)
18. LD2 offset adjustment
(400dpi)
19. LD1 offset adjustment
(600dpi)
20. LD2 offset adjustment(600dpi)
21. Separation claw ON
22. Separation claw OFF
23. Adjustment one-sided
24. SGU adjustment one-
sided (table)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Contents of message Data (referential value)
1st line 2nd line Data from 47-92 mode Range of dataList of adjustments
Nonadjustable
47-002+P
47-003+P
47-004+P
47-006+P
47-007+P
47-011+P
47-103+P
47-104+P
47-106+P
47-107+P
47-111+P
47-018+P
47-036+P
47-037+P
47-136+P
47-137+P
35-005+P+3
35-005+P+4
35-005+P+7
35-005+P+8
25-01+P
25-02+P
36-097+P
35-016+P
170
50(87 outside Japan)
100
(100 outside Japan)
67
(57 outside Japan)
145
169
-
-
50
88
88
50
50
20
20
20
20
1
6
0
0
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~99
0~99
0~99
0~99
-64~+64
-64~+64
-64~+64
-64~+64
0~9
0~9
-32~+32
-32~+32
Note: If 47/94 will not display, use 47/96 to turn ON. 47/92 will disable 47/94.
TRANSFER (1) ADJ
SEPARAT (AC)(1)ADJ
SEPARAT (DC))(1)ADJ
GRID (1) ADJ
BIAS (1) ADJ
TRANSFER (2) ADJ
SEPARAT (AC)(2)ADJ
SEPARAT (DC)(2)ADJ
GRID (2) ADJ
BIAS (2) ADJ
Dmax ADJ
LD1 POWER (1)
LD2 POWER (1)
LD1 POWER (2)
LD2 POWER (2)
LD1 OFFSET (1)
LD2 OFFSET (1)
LD1 OFFSET (2)
LD2 OFFSET (2)
SEPARATOR CLAW ON
SEPARATOR CLAW OFF
LD CENTERING (1)ADJ
LD CENTERING (2)ADJ
Revised 3/98
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 211/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-13 Revised 3/9
25. 5.5x8.5R backside is
one-sided
26. Lead edge timing
(first copy)
27. Lead edge timing (E-RDH: second copy)
28. Lead edge timing
(printer)
29. Erased amount of the
lead edge of document
30. Longitudinal magnifica-
tion adjustment
31. SGU longitudinal magnifi-
cation adjustment
32. Adjustment of loop amount
of paper feeding (tray)
33. Adjustment of loop amountof paper feeding (bypass)
34. Adjustment of optical
brake amount
35. Rotation number of
developing motor
36. Rotation number of
developing motor (600dpi)
37. Absolute position of
laser 1
38. Absolute position of
laser 2
39. Sub-scanning slipamount
40. Main-scanning slip
amount
41. AOC1 data
42. AOC2 data
43. AGC1 data
44. AGC2 data
45. Copy quantity in tray 1
46. Copy quantity in tray 2
47. Copy quantity in tray 3
48. Copy quantity in tray 4
See note
below
X
X
Contents of message Data (referential value)
1st line 2nd line Data from 47-92 mode Range of dataList of adjustments
Nonadjustable
35-031+P
36-091+P
36-098+P
36-099+P
36-092+P
36-093+P
35-016+P+2
36-094+P
36-094+P
36-096+P
47-050+P
47-150+P
35-80+P+5
35-80+P+5
-
-
-
-
0
+24
+29
+51
+28
-20
16
+10
+60
7
17
5
00998
01060
62
00524
68
84
44
45
0
0
0
0
-94~+99
(-99~+99)
-100~+99
(-99~+99)
-100~+99(-99~+99)
-99~+99
0~99
-20~+20
-1~31
-20~+90
-20~+90
0~9
(-9~+9)
1~32
1~32
0~999999
0~999999
0~999999
0~999999
-
-
-
REGISTRATION (3)
IMAGE MISSING ADJ
MAGNIFI (1) ADJ
MAGNIFI (2) ADJ
LOOP ADJUST (TRAY)
LOOP ADJUST (BYPASS)
BRAKE ADJUST
DEVELOPING MOTOR (1)
DEVELOPING MOTOR (2)
LD1 POSITION
LD2 POSITION
VERTICAL SHIFT
HORIZONTAL SHIFT
AOC CH1 Vol.
AOC CH2 Vol.
AGC CH1 Vol.
AGC CH2 Vol.
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
TRAY 4
REGISTRATION (2)
REGISTRATION (1)
CENTERING (A5R) ADJ
Note pertaining to adjustments 26, 27, and 28:
Mode 25, address 89 must be set to a number other than “1” before adjustment items #26 and #27 will function. However, the alternatives for these
adjustments located under modes 36 and 35 of this DIAGNOSTICS Section can be used in lieu of resetting 25/89. Note that the registration forSuperfin
mode MUST be accomplished using 35/80 + P5 because ERDH memory is not used. For all other modes , 36/98 or 36/80 + P5 are used.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 212/290
7-14
*1 = Drum monitor does not become 6 volts. *2 = Dmax signal does not become 1.5 volts. *3 = Dmax signal does not
change. *4 = Gamma signal does not become 9 volts. *5 = Gamma signals are higher than programmed values.
47 Mode Input/Output List for FS-103Using mode 47, code 75, enter the appropriate multimode number and press the START PRINT button to select the desired function;
press STOP when completed.
Using mode 47, code 76, enter the appropriate multimode number and press the START PRINT button.
COPY COUNT(BYPASS)
COPY COUNT(ADU)
D-MAX ERROR(1)
D-MAX ERROR(2)
D-MAX ERROR(3)
GAMMA ERROR(1)
GAMMA ERROR(2)
49. Bypass feed copy
quantity
50. ADU copy quantity
51. Dmax error (1) *1
52. Dmax error (2) *2
53. Dmax error (3) *3
54. Gamma error (1) *4
55. Gamma error (2) *5
Contents of message Data (referential value)
1st line 2nd line Data from 47-92 mode Range of dataList of adjustments
Nonadjustable
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0~999999
0~999999
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
0~255
Item
M1
M7
M14
M2
M2
M2
M8
M3
M3
M12
Multi Mode
01
02
03
10
11
12
13
16
17
18
Function/Description
Conveyance motor
Paper exit roller motor
Stacker entrance motor
Roller shift motor (1 rotation)
Roller shift motor (forward)
Roller shift motor (reverse)
Paper exit opening motor
Tray up/down motor (raise)
Tray up/down motor (lower)
Stapler rotation motor (angled)
Multi Mode
19
20
23
26
28
30
31
32
33
34
40
Item
M12
M5
M11
M10
M9
SD1/SD5
SD2
SD4
SD1
SD3
–
Function/Description
Stapler rotation motor (vertical)
Alignment plate motor
Stapler movement motor
Front stapler motor
Rear stapler motor
Gate/bypass solenoid
Printer paper exit solenoid
Paper exit opening solenoid
Gate solenoid
Grip solenoid
Reset/run mode
Multi Mode
01
02
03
04
05
0607
10
12
13
15
16
17
20
21
23
24
25
26
Item
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7PS8
PS9
PS11
PS12
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS20
PS21
PS22
MS1
Function/Description
Tray upper limit sensor
Tray lower limit sensor
Finisher entrance passage senor
Stacker conveyance passage sensor
Paper exit - 1 sensor
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensorAlignment plate home position sensor
Paper exit belt home position sensor
Stapler movement home position sensor
Paper exit opening sensor
Rear stapler empty sensor
Rear stapler home position sensor
Front stapler empty sensor
Front stapler home position sensor
Roller shift home position sensor
Stacker empty sensor
Stapler rotation home position 1 sensor
Stapler rotation home position 2 sensor
Finisher door interlock
Intication When High
Upper limit detected
Lower limit detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detected
Paper detectedHome position detected
Home position detected
Home position detected
Opening is closed
Staples remaining
Home position detected
Staples remaining
Home position detected
Home position detected
Paper detected
Home position detected
Home position detected
Door is open
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 213/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-15
25 MODEThe 25 mode is used exclusively for rewriting the contents of the
memory and therefore does not support normal copy operations.
Data entered into memory is used by the microprocessor to
establish certain parameters.
Setting Method1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Turn the main switch back ON while pressing buttons 2 and
5. This will enable the 25 mode.
3. Select the address where the data is to be changed.
There are two ways to select the address:
a. Using the reduction/magnification buttons. The address
(P.**) will appear on the display.
b. Using the copy quantity buttons.
(1) Press the P button. The current address selected
will flash on the display.
(2) Enter the desired address by pressing the copy
quantity buttons. The selected address will flash onthe display.
(3) Press the P button. The display will change from a
flashing address number to one that is constantly lit.
4. The data currently stored in that address will appear in the
display (tens digit).
5. Enter the new data by pressing the copy quantity buttons.
The newly entered data will appear in the display (ones
digit).
6. Press the start print button. This will rewrite the data and
change the display to show the new data in the tens digit
position.
7. Turn the main switch OFF to cancel the 25 mode.
ECM SettingThis selects the function of the ECM mode.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P05.
Enter the required data:
0: ECM is not selected.
1: ECM is selected
(without stop)
3: ECM is selected
(with natural (soft) stop)
5: ECM is selected
(with forced (hard) stop)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Copy Control/Service Control Mode EnableThis feature selects whether the copy control mode access is
enabled, the service control mode access is enabled, or both
modes are disabled.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P25.
Enter the required data:
0: Protect
1: Copy control is enabled
2: Service control is enabled
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P52.
Enter the required data:
0: No function
8: Cancel protection.
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantitybuttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Data Control Function SelectThis feature sets the protection for the service control operator
mode.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 214/290
7-16
Pre-heat Mode Temperature SelectionThis feature selects the fusing temperature for the pre-heat
mode.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P12.
Enter the required data:
0: 160°C1: 170°C2: 180°CPress the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switchMagnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Pre-heat Mode Shut-off TimeThis feature selects the shut-off time for the pre-heat mode.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P19.
Enter the required data:
0~3: 1 hour
4~6: 2 hour
7~9: 3 hour
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Selection of Fusing Control During AutoShut OffThis feature enables/disables continued control of the fusing
unit during an auto shut off.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P49.
Enter the required data:
0: No
1: Yes
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, mainswitch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Setting of Auto Shut-off and Auto Pre-heat TimingSets auto shut off and auto pre-heat timing.
Note: To enable this selection to function, address 49 in the 25
mode must be set to “1” (default is “0”).
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P62.
Enter the required data:Auto shut off
0: No
1: 2 minutes
2: 6 minutes
3: 10 minutes
Auto pre-heat
4: 2 minutes
5: 6 minutes
6: 10 minutes
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantitybuttons
Start print button
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 215/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-17
Selecting Outside Erasing the OriginalAPS sensors are used to determine image area with document
feeder open. Based on standard size paper
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P70.
Enter the required data:
0: Erase outside the original.
1: Entire image in the platen
mode.
2: Transfer paper prior any time
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Selecting Preliminary Rotation of PolygonMotorA combination of 25/90 and 25/91 is used to set the low speed
idle of the polygon motor.
If set to “0” (default), 25/90 prevents the polygon motor from
stopping or rotating at low speed when at idle. (The motor wil
continuously operate at a normal copying speed of 16,535 rpm.
Noise during idle operation can be prevented by using 25/90 to
either decrease its idle speed or stop it (see table below).
Polygon Motor Low Speed Rotation TimingThe 25/91 setting sets the time duration at which the polygon
motor will run at copying speed before reverting to the speed
selected in 25/90 (see table below).
Note: 1. Both factory defaults at “0” have the motor running
16,535 rpm at all times.
2. Reducing the idle speed to minimize noise level wi
result in the delay of the copy cycle start due to the
additional time required to attain operating speed.
* When data 1 is selected, whole image determined by
the selected paper paper size is copied only in case ofplaten copy.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P92.
Enter the required data:
0: Rectangular
1: Corresponding oblique original
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P90.
Enter the required data:
0: No preliminary rotat. 16535rpm(default)
1: Preliminary rotation at 14000 rpm
2: Preliminary rotation at 11024 rpm
3: Preliminary rotation at 8000 rpm
4: Stop
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Revised 3/99
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P91.
Enter the required data:
0: 15 seconds (default)
1: 30 seconds
2: 60 seconds
3: 120 seconds
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 216/290
7-18
Functions When Auto Button is Pressed orOriginal is Placed in ADFThis feature allows for selecting functions when the auto button
is pressed or when an original is place in the ADF.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P56.
Enter the required data:
0 to 3 (see *1)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, mainswitch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
*1: Automatic button function and ADF original setting indica-
tion.
DataAutomatic button
function
ADF original setting
indication
0
1
2
3
Full auto
Manual select*
Full auto
Manual select*
ADF select
ADF select
Full auto
Manual select*
ATS SelectionThis feature is used to set trays for ATS.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P08.
Enter the required data:
0: ATS is not selected.
1: ATS is selected for all trays.
2: ATS is not selected for the
upper tray.
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Note: ATS order is 2/3/4/1/2 unless data 2 is selected;
then, the order is 2/3/4/2.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P50.
Enter the required data:
0: One count
1: Two counts
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
11x17 Double Count SettingThis feature specifies whether or not the machine will count one
11x17 copy as two 8.5x11 copies.
Switching Auto/Manual PriorityThis feature enables setting parameters that will be automatically
selected when the auto button is pressed.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P58.
Enter the required data:
0 to 7 (see *1)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantitybuttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
*1: Settings that are available.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
AES
AES
AES
AES
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
Data
APS
APS
Manual
Manual
APS
APS
Manual
Manual
ADF select APS select AES select
*Selectable by 25 mode, address P58.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 217/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-19
Setting Paper Size for Trays 2, 3, and 4Sets paper size for trays 2, 3, and 4.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select addresses:P67: Tray 2
P68: Tray 3
P69: Tray 4
Enter the required data:
0 to 9 (see *1)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/ reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
0
1
23
4
11x17
8.5x14
8.5x11R8.5x11
8.5x5.5
Data Paper size
*1: Paper size selection list.
FS-103 Sub-tray Select (Printer)Set if the sub-tray is used and paper exit direction.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P07.
Modify data.
0: Sub-tray is not used.
2: Sub-tray is used. (Reverese
paper exit)
3: Sub-tray is used. (Normal
paper exit)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P andcopy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
FS-103 Original Count Over ControlSet the operation that is used when the original quantity
exceeds the specified limit.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Designate address P11.
Modify data.
0 - 9 (*1)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
*1
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Modification
Stops immediately (at max. 50 sheets)
Stops immediately (at max. 45 sheets)
Stops immediately (at max. 40 sheets)
Stops immediately (at max. 35 sheets)
Stops immediately (at max. 50 sheets)
Stops when current set of copy completes. (every 50 sheets)
Stops when current set of copy completes. (every 45 sheets)
Stops when current set of copy completes. (every 40 sheets)
Stops when current set of copy completes. (every 35 sheets)
Stops when current set of copy completes. (every 50 sheets)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 218/290
7-20
*1
*2
Non-staple mode
Group mode
Offset mode
Staple mode
4
Performing lower limit detection by
PS3 (tray lower limit)
Detecting PS7 (staple paper exit upper
limit) abnormal ON by exiting paper
(more than 1 sec)
Detecting PS2 (tray upper limit)
abnormal ON by exiting paper.
Stop at predetermined number ofcopies. (*2)
Message Language SelectionThis feature selects the language that will appear in the display.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P14.
Enter the required data:
0: American
1: Brit ish
2: French
3: Japanese
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Priority of the Paper SizeSet the priority of the paper size selected when auto-function
operates. (When APS released)
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P16.
Modify data
0: 11x17 4: 5.5x8.5
1: 8.5x14 5: SPECIAL2: 8.5x11
3: 8.5x11R
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Jumping Selection of the Paper SizeSet the most preferred paper size temporarily.
(Select by using P+cassette size button)
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P17
Modify data
0: 11x17 4: 5.5x8.5
1: 8.5x14 5: SPECIAL
2: 8.5x11
3: 8.5x11R
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/ reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
FS-102/103 Overload Control SelectSet the operation for an overload when using the finisher.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P20.
Modifies data
FS-102
0: No control overload
5: Stops when paper quantity
exceeds specification or more
than 25 copies are stapled.
FS-103
0-9 (refer to *1)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
0~3
6~9OperationData
–
–
–
5
–
Paper size
B6R, A5R, 5.5x8.5R
B5R, B5, A4R, A4
8.5x11R, 8.5x11
B4R, F4R, A3R
8.5x14R, 11x17R
Capacity (number of sheets)
500
2,000
1,500
Number of
sheets
2~9
1~20
21~30
31~40
41~50
A3, 11x17 excluded A3, 11x17
1 staple
place
100 sets
50 sets
30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
2 staple
places
100 sets
50 sets
30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
2 staple
places
50 sets
15 sets
30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
1 staple
place
100 sets
20 sets
30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 219/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-21
Setting Intermittent Time for Running TestThis feature specifies the wait time for making intermittent
copies in the running test mode (36 mode).
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address according to
desired waiting time.
P22: 3rd digit (102)
P23: 2nd digit (101)
P24: 1st digit (100)
Input the waiting time.
(1 to 255 seconds)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
* The waiting time is from 1 to 255 seconds.
If more than 255 seconds is input, the machine will default
to 255 seconds.
ADF Frame Erase SelectionThis feature enables/disables frame erase for the ADF.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P26.
Enter the required data:
0: No5: Yes
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
PM Cycle SettingThis feature selects the number of copies at which to display the
call for PM message.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select addresses:P27: 5th digit (105)
P28: 4th digit (104)
P29: 3rd digit (103)
Input the PM cycle.
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttonss,
main switch
Magnification/ reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Finisher Initial Mode SettingThis feature specifies the operating mode the finisher should
enter in its initial state.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P46.
Enter the required data:
0: Non-sorter priority
1: Sort is priority
2: Group priority
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Clearing Fusing FailuresThis feature resets fusing failures [F34], [F35], and [F36].
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P47.
Input 0.
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttonsStart printbutton
Auto Reset SettingThis feature specifies whether or not an auto reset is to take
place.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P48.
Enter the required data:
0: No auto reset
1: Auto reset (1 minute)
2: Auto reset (2 minutes)
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 220/290
7-22
Key Counter Operation SelectionThis feature selects how the copier will operate when the
hardware key counter (optional) is removed during a copy
cycle.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P57.
Enter the required data:
0: Stops after completing the
current copy
5: Stop immediately.
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Switching the Contents of Normal/HighSets the combination of bit numbers when the image quality
button is OFF, or turned to High mode.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P60.
Enter the required data:
normal/high
0: 1ED/2ED*
1: 1ED/4ED
2: 2ED/4ED
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
*ED = error diffusion
ADF Mode Lead Edge Erasure SettingSets the edge erasure amount for copies run through the ADF.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P61.
Enter the required data:
0: 2mm
1: 3mm
2: 4mm
3: 5mm
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switchMagnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Toner Level Detecting SelectionSets display timing of toner replenishment.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P71.
Enter the required data:
0: After copying 100 sheets.
1~3: After copying 1000 to 3000
sheets.
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Master Key Code SettingSets the master key code for entering into the ECM and data
control system operator modes.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select addresses P72 to P79.
Enter the required data:
Input the master key code into P72
(upper digits) to P79 (lower digits).Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 221/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-23
Original Image Shift SettingThis feature enables/disables image shifting.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P31.
Enter the required data:
* See table below.
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/ reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Switching Longitudinal Line Paper/Tranversal Line PaperSet separation conditions depending upon the kind of smal
size paper.
Operation
Enter the 25 mode.
Select address P88.
Enter the required data:
0: All transversal line.
1: Transversal line only 8.5x11,
Press the start print button.
Step
1
2
3
4
Entry
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Magnification/
reduction but-
ton, or the P and
copy quantity
buttons.
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
5.5x8.5, and bypass.*
1-2 mode
Original has a margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has no margin
Original has a margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has no margin
1-1 mode
Shifts paper to the right.
2-1 mode
Shifts even pages to the right.
Shifts paper to the right.
Shifts even pages to the right.
Shifts paper to the right.
Shifts even pages to the right.
Shifts paper to the right.
Shifts even pages to the right.
Shifts paper to the right.
1-2 mode
Shifts a backside to the left.
Shifts a backside to the left.
Shifts a front side to the right.
Deletes a right margin on a
backside.
Shifts a front side to the right.
Deletes a right margin on a
backside.
Shifts a backside to the left.
Shifts a backside to the left.
Shifts a front side to the right.
Shifts a backside to the left.
Shifts a front side to the right.
Shifts a backside to the left.
2-2 mode
Shifts a front side to the right.
Deletes a right margin on a backside.
Shifts a front side to the right.
Shifts a backside to the left.
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Both 1-1 and 2-2 modes treat all originals as no margin.
Margins on copying paper are set as follows based on the
above specifications.
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Shift on a
reverse side
Deleates a
right margin
on copying
paper
S h i f t s
c o p y i n g
paper to the
left
2-1 mode
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 222/290
7-24
Address Item Setting range Initial value Change details Remarks
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
4 in 1 page placement
Selecting data control system
Selecting ECM
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
FS-103 subtray is selected. (printer)
Selecting auto tray switching (ATS)
FS-103 original quatity over is controlled
Selecting temperature in pre-heat mode
Selecting message language
Priority of the paper size
Jumping selection of the paper size (se-
lect by using P+cassette seize button)
Selecting the shut-off time in the pre-
heat mode.
FS-102/103 paper overload control
Selecting AMS
102
101 Waiting timer in the intermittent mode
100
Selecting a function to control data
(protection setting 1)
Selecting ADF frame erase
105
104 Setting PM cycle
103
-
-
0~5
0~5
-
0,2,3
0~2
0-9
0~2
0~3
0~9
0~9
0~9
0-9
0~1
0~9
0~2
0, 5
0~9
-
-
0
0
-
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
5
1
2
0
Set to 1 for 4 in 1 alignment (v24 EPROMs)
Impossible to set other than 0
0:N ot selected 1:Selected (no stop in limiting)
3: Selected (stop in limiting)
5: Selected (forced stop in limiting)
0: Not use 2: Sub-tray (reverse) 3: Sub-tray (normal)
0: ATS not selected
1: ATS for all trays
2: ATS for all trays except universal tray 1
*See bottom of table.
0: 160⋅C 1: 170⋅C 2: 180⋅C
0: American 1: British
2: French 3: Japanese
0: 11x17 1: 8.5x14 2: 8.5x11
3: 8.5x11R 4: 5.5x8.5 5: SPECIAL
0 through 3: 1 hour
4 through 6: 2 hours
7 through 9: 3 hours
*D
0: Selected 1: Not selected
1 second to 255 seconds
0: Protection
1: Canceling copy control protection
2: Canceling service control protection
0: No 5: Yes ( 5mm frame)
(After this period of time inreduced heat mode, themachine will shut off)
(To enable job memory #9 asboot, set address 22 to 1.
[version 24 EPROMs])
*1: Stops (at max. 45 sheets); 2: Stops (at max. 40 sheets); 3: Stops (at max. 35 sheets); 4: Stops (at max. 50 sheets); 5:
Stop after current copy (at max. of 50 sheets); 6: Stop after current copy (at max. 45 sheets); 7: stop fter current copy (at
max. 40 sheets); 8: Stop after current copy (at max. 35 sheets); 9: Stop after current copy (at max. 50 sheets).
Revised 3/98
25 Mode Address Map
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 223/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-25
Address Item Setting range Initialvalue Change details Remarks
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
6061
62
63~65
Setting original image shift
105
104
103 PM counter
102
101
100
105
104
103 Drum counter
102
101
100
Selecting input of an intersheet original
copy number
Switching finisher priority
Canceling fusing abnormality
Automatic resetting
Fusing control during auto shut-off
Selecting 11x17 count number
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
Data control function select
(protect setting 2)
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
Selecting auto button for items in No. 58
Selecting the key-count-immediately-in-
terrupting mode
Switching auto/manual priority
Reading mode default
Selecting the contents of normal/highSelecting the lead edge erasure amount
in the ADF mode
Auto shut-off and automatic pre-heating
0~7
0~9
0~9
0~1
0~2
0~9
0~2
0~2
0~1
-
0~8
-
-
-
0~3
0,1,5,6
0~7
0-2
0~20~3
0~6
7
1
1
9
9
9
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
3
0
0
0
0
02
2
*C
0: Manual 1: Automatic counting
0: Non sort 1: Sort2: Group
0: Cancellation 1 ~ 9: Abnormal
0: No 1: 1 minute
2: 2 minutes
0: No 1: Yes
0: 1 count 1: 2 counts
0: No function 9: For global reset
8: Canceling protection
Set to “0” for 600 dpi
A*
0: Copier and printer stop after last copy exits
1: Printer - Ignores key counter status
5: Copier and printer stop immediately
6: Printer - Ignores key counter status
Copier - stops immediately
B*
0: Normal 1: Fine 2: S-fine
0: 1ED/2ED 1: 1ED/4ED 2: 2ED/4ED0: 2mm 1: 3mm
2: 4mm 3: 5mm
Shut off
0: No 1: 2 minutes
2: 6 minutes 3: 10 minutes
Pre-heating
0: No 4: 2 minutes
5: 6 minutes 6: 10 minutes
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 224/290
Revised 3/98
*A
*Selectable by 25 mode, P58.
*B
*APS is selectable only for USA machine.
*C
Paper sizeB6R, A5R, 5.5x8.5R
B5R, B5, A4R, A4
8.5x11R, 8.5x11
B4R, F4R, A3R
8.5x14R, 11x17R
Capacity (number of sheets)500
2,000
1,500
*D
*1
Offset mode
Staple mode
*E
4
Performing lower limit detection by
PS3 (tray lower limit)Detecting PS7 (staple paper exit upper
limit) abnormal ON by exiting paper
(more than 1 sec)
Detecting PS2 (tray upper limit)
abnormal ON by exiting paper.
Stop at predetermined number of
copies. (*2)
0~3
6~9OperationData
–
–
–
5
–
Number of
sheets
2~9
1~2021~30
31~40
41~50
A3, 11x17 excluded A3, 11x17
1 staple
place
100 sets
50 sets30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
2 staple
places
100 sets
50 sets30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
2 staple
places
50 sets
15 sets30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
1 staple
place
100 sets
20 sets30 sets
25 sets
20 sets
DataBoot as
Copier/Printer
FS-103 - Unload
Paper Tray (P74)
600 dpi Fuser - Wait
or ready Immediately
0
1
2
3
45
6
7
Copier
Printer
Copier
Printer
CopierPrinter
Copier
Printer
Detection
Detection
No detection
No detection
DetectionDetection
No detection
No detection
Wait
Wait
Wait
Wait
Ready immediatelyReady immediately
Ready immediately
Ready immediately
ADF original setting indication
ADF select
ADF select
Full auto
*Manual select
Automatic button function
Full auto
*Manual select
Full auto
*Manual select
ADF select
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
ADF
Platen
APS select
APS
APS
*Manual
*Manual
APS
APS
*Manual
*Manual
AES select
AES
AES
AES
AES
Manual
Manual
Manual
Manual
1-2 mode
Original has a margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has no margin
Original has a margin
Original has a margin
Original has no marginOriginal has no margin
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
67
Shift on a
reverse side
Deleates a
right margin
on copying
paper
S h i f t s
c o p y i n g
paper to theleft
2-1 mode
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has a margin
Original has no margin
Original has a marginOriginal has no margin
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 225/290
DIAGNOSTICS
7-27
Address Item Setting range Initialvalue Change details Remarks
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
7677
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
Preliminary for paper size setting
Setting paper size for tray 2
Setting paper size for tray 3 (1000 LCT)
Setting paper size for tray 4 (1500 LCT)
Selecting outside erase the original
(uses APS sensors)
Selecting sensing toner remaining
amount
107 Upper range
106
105
104 Master key code
103
102
101
100 Lower range
No toner counter (upper range)
No toner counter (upper range)
No toner counter (upper range)
No toner counter (lower range)
Data for adjusting process: rewrite is prohibited
Switching longitudinlline/tranversal line
IP-201 connection
Selecting polygon motor rotation during idle
Timing polygon motor low speed rotation
Selecting auto outside erase for original
0~9
0~1
0~3
0~9
-
0,1
0 -7
0~4
0~3
0,1
-
-
-
-
-
-
KBM:2
KBM:3
KBM:3
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
-
-
-
-
-
0: 11x17 1: 8.5x14 2: 8.5x11R
3: 8.5x11 4: 5.5x8.5 5: 8.5x5.5
6: - 7: 8.5x14 8: 8.5x11R
9: 8.5x11
0: Outside erase the original 1:Entire image only in the
platen mode 2:Transfer paper prior any time
0: Display of toner replenishing after 100 copies
1 ~ 3: Display of toner replenishing after 1000 copies through 3000 copies
0: All is transversal
!: 8.5x11/8.5x8.5/transversal only for manual feeding
0 = copier; 7 = printer; *E (see page 26)
0: No preliminary rotation 16535 rpm
1: Preliminary rotation at 14000 rpm
2: Preliminary rotation at 11024 rpm
3: Preliminary rotation at 8000 rpm
4: Stop0: 15 seconds 1: 30 seconds
2: 60 seconds 3: 120 seconds
0: Rectangular
1: Corresponding an oblique original
XXX
XXX
Revised 3/98
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 226/290
7-28
This page left blank intentionally.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 227/290
7-29
DIAGNOSTICS
36 MODEThis operating mode enables technicians to make adjustments
while operating various parts of the machine.
Setting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation
While pressing copy quantity
buttons 3 and 6, turn ON the main
switch.
Input an address using the copy
quantity buttons.
Press the start print button.
Press the P button. (*1)
Input modified data using the copy
quantity buttons. (*1)
Positive/negative is switched by
using the stop/clear button.
Press the P button. (*1)
Press the start print button. (*1)
Turn the main switch from OFF to
ON.
Remarks (status)
Selecting mode
36.
Setting the ad-
dress number
Conduct initial
processing.
Display data.
Modify data.
Inputting data.
Run a test copy.
Return to the
standard mode.
*1 : Repeat procedures 4 through 7 if necessary.
Display and Input of Data
• For 1 digit data, it flashes and displays as follows:
Positive data .......... xNegative data ........ –x
• For 2 digit data, it flashes and displays as follows:
Positive data.......... xx
Negative data ........ – and xx flashesalternately.
• How to change data from a positive to a negativevalue.
While inputting data, when pressing the stop/clear
button, the sign is switched from positive to negative
and from negative to positive.
Note: The setting method of the running test mode differs
from the above procedure; therefore, follow the running
test mode procedure when entering that mode.
Running Test ModeThis mode will run the copier continuously to facilitate testing
procedures.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Input the running code (see *1)
Press the start print button.
(Initialization takes place)
After completing warming up,
press the start print button. (running
test mode starts.)
Stop the text by using the stop/
clear button.
Operation point
Page quantitybuttons.
Start print button
Start print button
The stop/clear
button.
*1 : Running code list
Code
0001
02
03
04
10
11
12
13
14
Mode
x100No paper
x100+no paper
Intermittent copy
Intermittent copy+no paper
x100
No paper
x100+no-paper
Intermittent copy
Intermittent copy+no paper
Total counting
Not counting
Counting
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 228/290
7-30
Adjusting Lead Edge TimingThe lead edge timing adjustment adjusts the distance from the
front edge of the copy to the starting point where the image
begins. This adjustment occurs in two ways:
• Copy type adjustment
When one sheet is copied, and then multiple sheets
are copied, the lead edge timing of the first original is
memorized.The data memorized indirectly correspondes to the
ON timing of the paper feed restart sensor (PS4) .
• Electronic RDH (E-RDH) type adjustment
When multiple sheets are copied, the RDH memorizes
the read data of the first sheet. This data is then used
to process the remaining sheets being copied.
With this adjustment, the lead edge timing is memorized
using the electronic RDH.
The data memorized indirectly correspondes to the
ON timing of the paper feed temporary stop sensor
(PS14)
Note:
• There is also a lead edge timing adjustment (printer
system)” in Mode 35 - 80, P3. However, it is not used
because it is an outputting timing when this machine is
used as a printer.
• Lead edge timing function in each tray and adjustment
function in modification are not equipped with.
Paper Feeding Loop AdjustmentAdjusts the paper feed loop for each tray.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Designate address 94.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Place an original on the platen
glass.
Select a paper feed tray.
Press the copy button.
Visually confirm the outputted
copy.
Press the P button.
The existing value flashes on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value - 20 to 00 to 50 (99)
Standard value (targeted)
00
Variable amount by one step
1ms
Press the P button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantitybuttons
Start print button
Paper size button
Copy button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
* The allowable range of paper feed loop is - 20 to 99 (99 is for
bypass only).
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 229/290
7-31
DIAGNOSTICS
Lead-to-Trail Magnification AdjustmentAdjusts the lead-to-trail magnification.
Standard value: Within 0.5% for the same magnificationWithin 1 mm in 200 mm interval
200
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Designate address 93.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Place an original on the platen
glass.
Press the start print button.
Check for any deviation in size
between the original and the copy.
Press the P button.
The existing value flashes on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value
- 20 to 00 to 20Standard value (targeted)
00
Variable amount by one step
0.1 %
Press the P button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Start print button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Designate address 91.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Place an 11x17 original on the
platen glass
Select a copy quantity of one.
Press the start print button.
Visually confirm the lead edge
timing of the copy.
Press the P button.
The existing value flashes on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value - 99 to 00 to 99
Standard value (targeted)
00
Variable amount by one step
0.1 mm
Press the P button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttonsStart print button
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 230/290
7-32
Original Lead Edge Erasure AdjustmentAdjusts the lead edge deletion area.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Designate address 92.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Place an original on the platen
glass.
Press the start print button.
Visually confirm the amount of
deletion at the lead edge of the
copy.
Press the P button.
The existing value flashes on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value 00 to 99
Variable amount by one step
1 pixel (63.5 µm)
Press a P button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantitybuttons
Start print button
Start print button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Erasing amount
Standard value: Front edge erasing amount iswithin 3 mm
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Designate address 98.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Place an 11x17 original on the
platen glass.
Select a copy quantity of two.
Press the start print button.
Visually confirm the lead edge
timing of the second copy.
Press the P button.
The existing value flashes on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value - 99 to 00 to 99
Standard value (targeted)
00
Variable amount by one step
0.1 mm
Press a P button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Standard value: -3 mm~+3 mm
–3 mm
+3 mm
Paper
Image
Electronic RDH Type Lead Edge Timing Adjustment
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 231/290
7-33
DIAGNOSTICS
Optical Brake AdjustmentAdjusts the brake starting time of the exposure unit.
Centering AdjustmentThe centering adjustment adjusts the distance from the side o
the copy to the image area. When adjusting, follow the steps
below.
(1) Align each tray to the writing position on the drum using
the laser beam as a reference.
(Adjustment of one-side of writing unit.)
Due to this, complete adjustment for one-sided between the drum and the tray in copying the surface.
(2) Align the ADU using a surface copy original as a
reference. (Adjustment of ADU one-sided)
Due to this, complete adjustment for one-sided be
tween a front surface and a rear surface.
(3) Adjust the writing timing to the drum using writing data
based on a reference established by the exposure unit
(Adjustment of one-sided of original image.)
Due to this, alignment of the reading portion and the
writing portion is completed. In addition, a series of one
sided adjustment is completed.
Relationship Between the Copy Process and the One-
Sided Adjustment.
(3)
(1)
(2)
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Start print button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Designate address 96.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Place an original on the platen
glass.
Press the start print button.
Visually confirm the outputted
copy.
Press the P button.
The existing value flashes on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value
0 to 9Standard value (targeted)
5
Variable amount by one step
2 msec
Press the P button.Reading
↓
Writing
↓
Surface copyTray 1Tray 2Tray 3Tray 4
↓
Rear surface copyADU
5.5x8.5R only
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 232/290
7-34
Writing Unit Adjustment for One-sided
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Operation (display)
Set to mode 35.
(*1)
Designate address 80.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Select “11x17, from one side to
one side” mode.
Select an adjustment tray.
While pressing the P button, select
code 1.
The existing value flashes on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value
- 32 to 32
Variable amount by one step 62.5mm
Press the P button.
Press the start print button to out-
put the test pattern.
Fold the test pattern longitudinally
and confirm whether or not the left
line and the right line exactly match.
If the lines do not match, perform
the one-sided adjustment for each
tray. (*2)
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Copy mode but-
ton
Paper size button
P button + the
copy quantity
buttons
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Start print button
*1 : For details, see the mode 35 section.*2 : For details on the mechanical adjustment for each tray,
see the other adjustment.
ADU Adjustment for Rear Side
Needed for duplexing 5.5x8.5R only.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Operation (display)
Set to mode 35.
(*1)
Designate address 80.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Press theimage quality button and
select the HIGH mode.
Select 5.5"x8.5", from one-sided
to 2-sided mode.
Select tray #1.
While pressing the P button, select
code 2.
The existing value flashed on the
copy quantity display.Variable range of set value
- 94 to 94
Variable amount by one step
62.5mm
Press the P button.
Press the start print button to
output the test pattern.
Confirm that the central lines of the
front surface and the rear surface
of the test pattern exactly match.
If the lines do not match, perform
the one-sided adjustment for eachtray. (*2)
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
SET/F1 button
Copy mode but-
ton
Paper size button
P button + the
copy quantity
buttons
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Start print button
*1 : For details, see the mode 35 section.
*2 : For details on the mechanical adjustment for the ADU,
see the other adjustment section.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 233/290
7-35
DIAGNOSTICS
Adjustment on Original Image for One-sided
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operation (display)
Set to mode 36.
Designate address 97.
Press the start print button to start
the initial processing.
Place an original on the platen
glass.
Press the start print button.
Visually confirm the outputted
copy.
Press the P button
The existing value flashed on the
copy quantity display.
Variable range of set value
- 32 to 00 to 32
Standard value (targeted) 00
Variable amount by one step
1 pixel (63.5 µm)
Press the P button.
Operation point
Copy quantity
buttons, main
switch
Copy quantity
buttons
Start print button
Start print button
P button
Copy quantity
buttons
P button
Alternate Method of Adjustment: 36 Mode,Address 80The adjustments in the table below can be performed by using
address 80 of the 36 mode without exiting the 36 mode to
access other adjustments.
CODE DESCRIPTION RANGE
P-1 Magnification length -20 to +20
(lead to trail) One step = 0.1%
P-4 Optics brake timing -00 to -09
One step = 2msec.
P-5 Registration 2 -99 to +99
(memory) One step = 0.1mm
P-6 Registration timing 1 -99 to +99(first copy) One step = 0.1mm
P-7 Image missing 00 to +99(lead edge deletion) One step = 1 pixel
(63.5µm)
P-8 Loop timing -20 to +50(tray) One step = 0.1%
P-0 DF-306 registration -99 to +99(select 1:1 & 2:1) One step = 0.47mm
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 234/290
7-36
Mode 36 List
Classifi-
cationCode
00
01
02
03
04
10
11
12
13
14
91
92
93
94
96
97
98
Mode
x100 mode
No-paper mode
x100 +
no-paper modeIntermittent copy
mode
Intermittent copy +
no-paper mode
x100 mode
No-paper mode
x100 +
no-paper mode
Intermittent copy
mode
Intermittent copy +
no-paper mode
Lead edge timingadjustment mode
(copy type)
Original lead edge
erasing adjustment
Vertical magnification
adjustment
Optical paper feed
loop adjustment
Optical brake
adjustment mode
One-sided adjust-
ment mode
Lead edge timing
adjustment mode
(E-RDH type)
Contents
Copies the selected quantity x100.
Disables jam detection sensors, allowing the machine to operate without paper.
Disables jam detection sensors, allowing the machine to operate without paper for
100 cycles.Copies selected quantity then stops according to a preset time, then continues to
repeat cycle.
Copies selected quantity then stops according to a preset time, then continues to
repeat cycle. Jam detection sensors are disabled to allow testing without paper.
Same operation as above, but the counter is enabled when selecting these codes.
Mode wherein the timing between the copy and the original image is adjusted whilecopying.
- 99 ← 00 → 99
(slow) (standard) (fast)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 mm
Mode wherein the amount of lead edge deletion is adjusted while copying
from the lead edge of the original, deletion for set pixel number.
00 → 99
Change the amount of data 1 = 1 pixel = 62.5 µm
Mode wherein the vertical magnification is adjusted while copying.
- 20 ← 00 → 20
(short) (standard) (long)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 %Mode wherein amount of paper feed loop is adjusted while copying.
- 20 ← 00 → 50
(small) (standard) (large)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 1 msec
Mode wherein the starting time for optical braking is adjusted while copying.
0 ← 5 → 9
(small) (standard) (large)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 2 msec
Mode wherein one-sided of the surface is adjusted while copying
- 32 ← 00 → 32
(small) (standard) (large)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 1 pixel = 62.5 µm
Mode wherein the timing between the copy and the original image is adjusted while
outputting from the E-RDH.
- 99 ← 00 → 99
(slow) (standard) (fast)
Changing the amount of data 1 = 0.1 mm
F o r p r o
c e s s
F o r d e v e l o p m e n t
A d j u s t m e n t s
Revised 3/98
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 235/290
7-37
DIAGNOSTICS
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operation
While pressing copy quantity
setting buttons 3 and 5, turn the
main switch ON.
Input an address location using
the copy quantity setting buttons.
Press the start print button.
While pressing the P button, select
a code number (*1)
Press the P button. (*1)
Input the new data using the copy
quantity setting buttons. (*1)
Switch positive/negative using the
stop/clear button.
Press the P button. (*1)
Press the start print button. (*1)
Turn the main switch from OFF to
ON.
Remarks (status)
Select mode 35
Selecting an
address
Conduct initial
processing
P button + the
copy quantity
buttons
Display data
Modify data
Data modifica-
tion is
completed
Conduct test
copy
Return to the
normal mode
*1 : Repeat procedures 4 through 8 if necessary.
Lead Edge Timing AdjustmentThis procedure is for adjusting the lead edge timing when the
copier is selected as a PRINTER while in the super-fine mode
Note:Do not use this adjustment when the copier is selected as
a COPIER – refer to the lead edge timing adjustment performed
in the 36 mode in that situation.
35 MODEIn this machine, mode 35 is used as a check via internally
generated test charts to verify copy quality concerning the
image processing and writing units. The resulting patterns on
these charts are used to diagnose for the type of adjustments
that must be perfomed.
Note: Do not attempt to use modes that are not described in
particular.
Setting Method
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Operation
Set to mode 35.
Designate address 80.
Press the start print button
to start the initial
processing.
Select “11x17 from 1 -sided
to 1-sided mode.
Press the start print button
to output the test pattern.
Check the lead edge timing
of the test pattern.Standard: ± 3.0mm
If the test pattern is not
within standards, press the
P and 3 buttons.
The existing value will
flash on the display. Select
a new value (-99 → 00 →99). Each step = 0.1mm.
Press the P button.
Repeat steps 6 through 9
until the lead edge timing
is within the standards.
Entry
Copy quantity button, main
switch
Copy quantity button
Start print button
Paper size and copy mode
buttons
Start print button
P and 3 buttons
Copy quantity button
P button
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 236/290
7-38
Mode 35 List
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 237/290
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 238/290
7-40
35-02 Gray Scale Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
If the test pattern has background or the density is light, determine which is abnormal, the processing system
or the gamma correction. If the copy image is abnormal despite this test pattern being normal, either theimage processing system or the scanner system is abnormal.
Note: each block is written by both lasers.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 239/290
7-41
DIAGNOSTICS
35-03 Gray Scale Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
If the test pattern appears abnormal, check to see if the two lasers are functioning normally using 35-80 (P+6/
P+7).Note: Each column is written by a separate laser.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 240/290
7-42
35-05 Gray Scale Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
If the test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is output from the two lasers.
(Adjust in 35-80 mode, P+6/P+7)Note: 1. Basically, composition needs to be even.
2. Each column is written by alternating lasers.
3. Blocks should be visible above upper line.
Note: This 35-05 and 35-80 have different chracteristics in low density areas.
Use 35-80 for adjustment.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 241/290
7-43
DIAGNOSTICS
35-11 Beam Misalignment Check
Test pattern
[Check item]
If the test pattern appears abnormal, check to see if the positional correction of both lasers is normal.
(Same as 35-80 mode, P+5)Note: Every line is written by a different laser.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 242/290
7-44
35-16 Linearity Evaluation Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
Judge from this test pattern which of the systems is abnormal: the scanner system or the printer system.
Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, tilt, and leading edgetiming of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test
pattern, the scanner system is defective.
31mm237mm
2 0 m m
1 9 0 m m
1 9 0 m m
2 8 0 m
m
2 8 0 m m
Edge of paper
Edge of paper
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 243/290
7-45
DIAGNOSTICS
35-60 Process Overall Halftone
Test pattern
[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge which of the systems is the cause of an abnormality such as white
stripes, black stripes, and shifting of density: the scanner system or the write system isBy using this test pattern, a copy process takes place with the lasers and the charging voltage OFF, and
halftones are output. If the test pattern appears abnormal, the processing system is abnormal.
Note: No charging and no laser beam are used in development.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 244/290
7-46
35-30 Read Gate Array Built-in Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the abnormal section is located before the image process-
ing board. If the test pattern is an 8-bit output and is normal, the fault lies in the CCD board before the imageprocessing board.
Note: If there a problem with the copy and this output is good then the problem is in the CCD.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 245/290
7-47
DIAGNOSTICS
35-32 Copy γ γ γ γ γ GA Built-in Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the electronic RDH board is abnormal.
There are two test patterns which correspond to the 8-bit mode in which the electronic RDH is not used, andthe mode in which it is used, respectively. The test pattern checks the state of the electronic RDH board. If
an abnormality is found when an electronic RDH is used and several copies of the test pattern are output,
there is an abnormality in the electronic RDH. In this case, an abnormality in the test pattern excludes any
difference in error dispersion.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 246/290
7-48
35-36 Write GA Built-in Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to judge whether or not the cause of an abnormality is located in or after the
image processing board. If the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in or after the image process-ing board (PWM function or after).
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 247/290
7-49
DIAGNOSTICS
35-37 Electronic RDH GA Built-in Pattern
Test pattern
[Check item]
This test pattern is intended to determine if the electronic RDH board or image processing board is abnormal
in the case where the copy image is abnormal despite the 35-36 mode pattern being normal.If the 35-36 mode pattern is normal but the test pattern is abnormal, there is an abnormality in either the
electronic RDH or the image processing board.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 248/290
7-50
35-80
(P+1)Confirming on Writing Unit for Centering
Test pattern
[Check item]
Use this this test pattern to determine if the scanner system and the printer system (writing section, process
section) are abnormal. Items that can be checked include lead-to-trail magnification, front-to-backmagnification, tilt image, and lead edge timing of the printer system. This mode is used epsecially for the
centering error. If the copy image has centering error, the adjustment should be done by changing the
position of each tray.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 249/290
7-51
DIAGNOSTICS
35-80
(P+2)Confirmation on ADU for Centering
Test pattern
[Check item]
Use this this test pattern to determine if the scanner system and the printer system (writing section, process
section) are abnormal. Items that can be checked include lead-to-trail magnification, front-to-backmagnification, tilt image, and lead edge timing of the printer system. This mode is used epsecially for the
centering error. If the copy image has centering error, the adjustment should be done by changing the
position of the ADU.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 250/290
7-52
35-80
(P+3)Confirmation of Front Edge Timing (Printer)
Test pattern
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 251/290
7-53
DIAGNOSTICS
35-80
(P+4)
Test pattern
Confirmation of Printer Type Vertical Magnification(Main Drive Speed Adjustment)
Revised 3/98
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 252/290
7-54
35-80
(P+5)Confirming the Main Scanning/sub-scanning Alignment
Test pattern
[Check item]
If the test pattern appears to be abnormal, check to see if the positional correction of both lasers is normal.
(Same as 35-11 mode)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 253/290
7-55
DIAGNOSTICS
35-80
(P+6)Adjustment of Gradation (LD1)
Test pattern
[Check item]
If this test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is emitted from both lasers. Start position of the LD1
writing should be between the two lines.(Adjust by changing data; adjustment range -64 to 64)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 254/290
7-56
35-80
(P+7)Adjustment of Gradation (LD2)
Test pattern
[Check item]
If this test pattern is abnormal, check to see if light is emitted from both lasers. Start position of the LD2
writing should be between the two lines.(Adjust by changing data; adjustment range -64 to 64)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 255/290
7-57
DIAGNOSTICS
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
One-sided Adjustment
Tools used• Phillips screwdriver
• Pyramid chart (11x17)
Upper Tray One-sided Adjustment
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation
Partially pull the top tray out.
Loosen the 2 screws shown.
Move the side plate and adjust for one-sided.
After adjustment, tighten the 2 screws and then
make copies to check the results.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 until the one-sided
adjustment is within standards.
Securingscrew
Lower Tray One-sided Adjustment
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation
Partially pull the lower tray out.
Loosen the 4 screws shown.
Move the cover forward or backward to adjust for
one-sided.
After adjustment, tighten the 4 screws and then
make copies to check the results.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 until the one-sided
adjustment is within standards.
Securing screw
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 256/290
7-58
Bypass Tray One-sided Adjustment
Step
1
2
3
4
Operation
Loosen the adjustment screw and lower the by-
pass tray.
Move the guide forward or backward.
After adjustment, make copies to check the results.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 until the one-sided
adjustment is within standards.
Adjustment screw
Bypass tray
Within 3 mm Center of image
Center of paper
Standard value: Mis-centering ....... Within 3 mm
LCT Tray One-sided Adjustment
Step
1
2
3
Operation
Pull the LCT tray out.
Loosen both screws of the front cover. Then
loosen the screw of each one-sided adjustment
plate (one plate on each side).
Move the one-sided adjustment plate forward or
backward until the one-sided adjustment is within
standards.
Securingscrew
Front cover
Securing screw
Securing screw
One-sidedadjustment plate
Within 3 mm Center of image
Center of paper
Standard value: Mis-centering....... Within 3 mm
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 257/290
7-59
DIAGNOSTICS
ADU One-sided Adjustment
Front cover
One-sidedadjustmentplate
Step
1
2
3
Operation
Pull the ADU out.
Loosen both screws of the front cover. Then
loosen the 2 screws of each one-sided adjustment
plate (one plate on each side).
Move the one-sided adjustment plate forward or
backward until the one-sided adjustment is within
standards.
Note: Move left and right plate in the opposite
directions.
Securing screw
Securing screw
Wire adjustment plate
Set screw
If the tray is tilted, paper skew may occur. Adjust the tray so tha
the tray and the paper feed roller shaft are parallel to each otherBe sure to perform this adjustment after replacing wires A and
B.
Tools required• Phillips head screwdriver
Adjustment method(1) Loosen the set screw of the wire adjustment plate on the
front of the tray.
(2) Perform the adjustment by moving the wire adjustmen
plate so that the top faces of both ends of the tray
coincide with the scribed scales, as shown in the figure
(3) Upon completion of the adjustment, tighten the wireadjustment plate securely with the set screw.
Tray Tilt Adjustment
Scribed scaled
Tray
Standard value: Mis-centering ...... Within 3 mm
in 35-16 mode(Image density : output with 255in43-13
Within 3 mm Center of image
Center of paper
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 258/290
7-60
This page left blank intentionally.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 259/290
MAINTENANCE
8-1
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service Schedule
Service item (cycles)
Maintenance
(Every 120,000 copies)
Periodic check (I)
(Every 240,000 copies)
Periodic check (II)
(Every 360,000 copies)
Periodic check (III)
(Every 480,000 copies)
Periodic check (IV)
(Every 840,000 copies)
Periodic check (V)(Every 1,440,000 copies)
Periodic check (VI)
(Every 2,880,000 copies)
Maintance
(Every 120,000 copies)
Periodic check (I)
(Every 240,000 copies)
Maintenance
(Every 120,000 copies)
Periodic check (I)
(Every 480,000 copies)
Maintenance
(Every 120,000 copies)
Periodic check (I)
(Every 1,080,000copies)
Periodic check (II)
(Every 2,520,000copies)
Classifi-
cation
Main
body
RADF
(DF-306)
Finisher
(FS-102)
Finisher
(FS-103)
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 408 420 432 444 456 468 480 492
Number of copies (unit: 10,000 copies)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 260/290
8-2
Number
of parts
replaced
2
1
1
1 each
1
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
ment
Material used
Tools used
Alcohol & cleaning pad
Cleaning pad
Blower brush
Blower brush
Blower brush & cleaning pad
* Clean toner control sen-sor with alcohol
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Classification
Preparation
Fusing unit
Drum unit
No.
1
2
3
Service item
(1) Image check
(2) Kit contents check
(3) 47 - 94 (Check adjustment 51-
55
(1) Fusing unit removal
(2) Jam clearance door removal
(3) Upper cover removal
(1) Drum unit removal
(2) Drum unit check
(3) Charge unit removal
(4) Charge control plate removal
and cleaning
(5) Charge wire replacement
25SA25090
(6) Charge corona unit
(back plate, PCL, etc. )
(7) Charge cleaning block (B)
(upper)
(8) Charge cleaning block (A)
(lower) 25SA-2530
(9) Developing unit removal
(10) Cleaning blade removal
(11) Drum removal
(12) Drum cartridge/PTL/developing
unit bottom plate/toner controlsensor/separating claw
(13) Recycle pipe check
(14) Toner collecting screw (A)
(15) Guide roller removal/drum set
Guide roller installation
(Guide roller à
25SA-2080)
(16) Cleaning blade 25SA-2060
(17) Cleaning blade and upper plate
installation
SupplyCheck
Maintenance Items
Main body (Every 120,000 copies)
(18) Drum
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 261/290
MAINTENANCE
8-3
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & Cleaning pad
Cleaning pad & blower brush
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Plas Guard No. 2
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Plas Guard No. 2
Blower brush & cleaning pad
(See Note 2).
Classification
Developing
unit
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(See note 1)
Machine in-
side
2nd paper
feed unit
Drum unit
Drive unit & fil-
ter
ADU
Paper feed
unit (mainbody/LCT)
No.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Service item
(1) Developing bias intercept
(2) Developer
(3) Developing unit
(4) Developing unit installation(1) Transfer/separation corona unit (front
and rear block/guide rail/separating
bridge/enter plate/back plate) removal
& installation
(2) Discharge wire
25SA26120
(3) Wire cleaning part (1) and (2)
1 25SA-2630 2 25SA-2620
(4) Transfer/exposure lamp (PSL)
(1) Upper part of conveyance unit
(2) Conveyance belt
(1) Paper dust removal brush
(removal)
(2) 2nd paper feed roller
(3) Paper dust removing brush (in-
stallation)
(1) Drum unit installation
(1) Back plate removal
(2) Developing suction filter check
(3) Ozone filters H/S
H 25BA73090 S 25BA73060
(4) Timing belt check
(5) Drive gear oiling
(6) Back plate installation
ADU intro. unit paper exit roller
(2) 4 position each of conveyance
and driven roller (ADU intro. unit)
(3) Timing belt (side external re-
moval/ADU intro. unit removal/
belt check)
(4) Sensors (intro. unit: 2 points/
ADU horizontal unit: 3 points/
intro. unit & side external instal-
lation)
(5) Gears oiling
(intro. unit & drive unit)
Upper paper feed unit
(1) Upper right side plate and unitremoval
(2) Main bottom plate and area
around paper feed unit
(3) Double feed prevention rollers
(2 each tray) 25SA40960
Number
of parts
replaced
1
3
1 each
1 each
Check
(1)
8
Revised 3/99
Note 1: A maintenance procedure to enhance the performance of the transfer/separation corona is provided in the CORONA UNIT
SECTION of this service manual.
2: The actual replacement cycle for double feed prevention rollers is 80,000 copies. Check the total counter for each tray and
replace the double feed prevention rollers as needed.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 262/290
8-4
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Blower brush
Plas Guard No. 2
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Plas Guard No. 2
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Classification
Paper feed
unit (Main
body/LCT)
No.
11
Service item
(3) Sensor (5 positions of upper tray)
(4) Gears (upper tray) oiling
(5) Conveyance/driven roller
(upper tray)(6) Swing/feeding roller (3 positions
including bypass tray)
(7) Double feed prevention roller
(by-pass tray) removal, cleaning,
and Installation
(8) Double feed prevention roller
(1st tray of main body)
(Cassette guide rail removal/
double feed prevention roller
cleaning)
(9) Cassette guide rail installation
(10) Double feed prevention roller
(2nd tray of main body)
(Cassette guide rail removal/
double feed prevention roller
cleaning)
(11) Cassette guide rail installation
(12) Cleaning of LED board and cen-
tering error detection board
(13) Unit (cassette) and upper right
side plate installation
Lower paper feed unit
(14) Lower right plate and removal of
LCT unit
(15) Main bottom plate and area
around paper feed unit
(16) Sensor (4 positions of lower tray)
(17) Gears (upper)
(18) Conveyance and driven roller
(lower)
(19) Swing/feeding roller
(1 position)
(20) Double feed prevention roller
(cleaning after opening open/
close cover)
(21) Unit (LCT) and lower right side
plate installation
LCT horizontal conveyance unit(22) Horizontal conveyance rail re-
moval
(23) Sensors
Number
of parts
replacedCheck
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 263/290
MAINTENANCE
8-5
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Plas Guard No. 2
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning padDrum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Cleaning pad
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Blower brush
Multi oil & cleaning pad
Blower brush & cleaning pad
Roller cleaner & cleaning pad
Roller cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush & paper
Molytherm grease
Classification
Paper feed
unit (main
body/LCT)
Reading
section
Writing section
Fusing unit
No.
11
12
13
14
Service item
(24) Gears
(25) Conveyance roller (upper and
lower)
(26) Swing/feeding roller(27) Double feed prevention roller
(28) Horizontal conveyance roller
installation
(1) Platen glass (removal)
(2) Exposure lamp
(3) Reflection mirror
(4) Lens
(5) 1st, 2nd and 3rd mirror
(6) White reference board cover
glass
(7) APS sensor
(8) Photo interrupter
(9) Supply cord check
(10) Wire tension
(11) Optics guide rail oilling
(12) Dust proof filter 25SA62100
(1) Dust proof glass (outside)
(1) Oil pad removal
(2) Impregnated roller removal
(3) Fusing cleaning roller removal
(4) Fusing roller (upper)
(5) Fusing roller (lower) (paper exit
guide plate removal)
(6) Fusing claw (upper) and (lower)
(7) Paper exit roller
(8) Fusing entrance guide plate
(9) Fusing temperature sensor (2)
(10) Fusing gear oiling
(11) Fusing cleaning roller
(installation) 25SA53200
(12) Impregnated roller
(installation) 25SA53210
(13) Oil pad (installation)
25SA-5350
(14) Paper exit guide plate installation
(15) Fusing upper cover installation
(16) Jam clearance door installation(17) Fusing unit installation
Check
Number
of parts
replaced
1
1
1
1
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 264/290
8-6
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Drum cleaner & Cleaning pad
Classification
Final check
No.
15
Service item
(1) Toner cartridge supply
(2) L detection (with new developer)
47 - 95
(3) Warm up time measure and check
(4) Image check after changing
consumables
(5) Copy sample check
(6) PM counter reset
47 - 90
(7) Drum counter reset
47 - 91
(8) Leakage breaker reset
(9) Machine surroundings, externals
Number
of parts
replacedCheck
RADF [DF-306] (Every 120,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Cleaning pad & blower brush
Plus guard No. 2
Classification
Paper feed
unit
Conveyance
unit
No.
1
2
Service item
(1) Double feed prevention sheet
(1) Conveyance belt
(2) Each sensor
(3) Neutralizing brush
(4) Drive gear
Check
Number
of parts
replaced
FNS [FS-102] (Every 120,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Blower brush
Drum cleaner & cleaning pad
Classification
Conveyance
unit
Stapler unit
No.
1
2
Service item
(1) Conveyance roller
(2) Conveyance belt
(3) Conveyance stopper
(4) Conveyance guide
(5) Neutralizing brush
(1) Sensors
(2) Stapling section
(3) Staple cartridgePC/UA 947–381
Number
of parts
replaced
1
Check
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 265/290
MAINTENANCE
8-7
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Drum cleaner & clean pad
Plas guard No.2
Plas guard No.2
Plas guard No.2
Plas guard No.2
Drum cleaner & clean pad
Check
Number
of parts
replaced
2
1
4
2
Service item
(1) Paper passage check
(1) Conveyance roller
(2) Roller 12QR4525*(3) Swing roller 12QR5065*
(1) Paper exit roller/A 12QR4825*
(1) Main drive unit *1
(2) Tray up unit *1
(3) Shift drive unit *1
(4) Paper exit unit *1
(5) Staple unit
(1) Staple *2 12QRK001*
(1) Paper passage check
(2) Exter ior
Classification
Preparation
Conveyance
roller unit
Paper exit unit
Drive unit
Stapler unit
Final check
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Periodic Check (Main Body)
Periodic check (I) (Every 240,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Charge
corona unit
Fusing unit
Drum unit
Drive section
(Filter parts)
No.
1
2
3
4
Service item
(1) Charge cleaning block (B)
25SA-2540
(2) Charge control plate
25SA25080
(1) Fusing roller (upper)25SA53070
(2) Fusing claw (upper)
25SA53150
(3) Insulating sleeve
454053391
(1) Separating claw
25SA-2190
(1) Developing suction filter
540073070
Number
of parts
replaced
1
1
1
6
2
3
1
Periodic check (II) (Every 360,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Paper feed
unit
No.
1
Service item
(1) Double feed prevention roller
25SA40960
(2) Paper feed tire
540040562
Number
of parts
replaced
8
2
Check
Check
Actual replacement 80kSee bulletin #12
FNS (FS-103) (Every 120,000 copies)
*1: If noise occurs due to lack of oil, apply plas guard No.2.
*2: This work confirms if the staple is exchanged by CE.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 266/290
8-8
Periodic check (III) (Every 480,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cationSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Fusing unit
Optics unit
ADU
Paper feed
unit
Service item
(1) Ball bearing
454075040
(2) Fusing roller (lower)25SA53720
(3) Fusing claw (lower)
25BA53330
(4) Fusing roller shaft holder
25BA76030
(1) Exposure lamp
25SA83010
(1) Paper exit conveyance pulley
25SA76550
(1) Resist roller (lower)
25SA41050
(2) Resist roller (upper)
25SA41060
Number
of parts
replaced
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
CheckReplace-
ment
No.
1
2
3
4
Periodic check (IV) (Every 840,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Paper feed
unit
Fusing unit
No.
1
2
Service item
(1) Feeding tire (A)
25AA40010
(2) Paper feed tire
25BA40320
(1) Fusing lamp (L2)
25SE83030
(2) Fusing lamp (L3)25SE83050
Number
of parts
replaced
4
1
1
1
Check
Periodic check (V) (Every 1,440,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Drum unit
Transfer &
Separation
corona unit
Paper feedunit
Fusing unit
No.
1
2
3
4
Service item
(1) Solenoid press-in assembly
25SA-2170
(1) Transfer and separation corona
unit assembly
25SA-2600
(1) Main body paper feed interme-diate clutch parts
25SA82210
(1) Fusing entrance gear
25BA77261
Number
of parts
replaced
1
1
1
1
Check
Revised 3/99
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 267/290
MAINTENANCE
8-9
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools used
Cotton swabs and a 1:1
mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and acetone
Classification
Writing unit
Drum unit
Paper feed
unit
Charging
corona unit
Developing
unit
Fixing unit
ADU
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Service item
(1) Polygon mirror cleaning
Right side plate and writing unit
removing/Polygon mirrorsurface cleaning/Right side
plate and writing unit installing
(1) Toner control board unit
25SA-910*
(1) Paper feed clutch
25SA8201*
(2) Paper feed drive shaft assembly
25BA-7653*
(3) Paper feed idler gear/A
25BA7704*
(4) Paper feed regulation gear/upper
25SA7726*
(5) Paper feed drive motor25SA8003*
(1) Charging corona unit (PCL
included)
25SA-250*
(1) Developing unit
25SA-300*
(1) Temperature sensor 2
25SA8844*
(1) Conveyance pulley/C
25SA7659*
(2) Paper conveyance roller
25SA4310*
(3) ADU conveyance roller/D
25SA5016*
Number
of parts
replaced
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Check
Revised 3/99
Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,880,000 copies)
Periodic Check (I) (RADF [DF-306]) (Every 240,000 copies/200,000 copies)
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Paper feed
unit
No.
1
Service item
(1) Paper feed belt
1212ER4057*
(2) Paper supply rubber
12ER4034*
(3) Double feed prevention roller12ER4031*
Number
of parts
replaced
1
2
1
Check
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Stapler unit
No.
1
Service item
(1) Stapler unit
12FU22530
Number
of parts
replaced
1
Check
Periodic Check (I) (FNS [FS-102]) (Every 480,000 copies)
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 268/290
8-10
SERVICE MATERIALS
FNS (FS-103)Regular service (I) (Every 1,080,000 copies)
*1: Guarantee period of the stapler unit is 200K staples.
* Actual replacement interval of the unit: (5K staples/1 cartridge) x 40 cartridges.
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Process unit
No.
1
Service item
(1) Stapler unit (1)12QR5210*
Number
of parts
replaced
2
Check
Implementation classification
Clean-
ing
Lubri-
cation
Replace-
mentSupply
Material used
Tools usedClassification
Drive unit
No.
1
Service item
(1) Paper feed motor (tray up/
down unit motor) *1
12FU22530
Number
of parts
replaced
1
Check
Regular service (II) (Every 2,520,000 copies)
*1: When the motor is removed, remove it holding the up-down tray to the paper exit.
Service materials that are considered to be standard (for all models), such as plastic bags or other containers cleaning pads,
setting powder, lubricants, and cleaners, are not listed. Refer to Konica's Tool Bulletin series for a complete listing of standardservice items available from Konica's Parts Distribution Center. The Tool Bulletin series also provides information for obtaining
materials that are not supplied by Konica.
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 269/290
MAINTENANCE
8-11
SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
Tool No. Description Shape Remark
7050K0010
7050K0020
00M6-2-00
00M8-1-00
00M8-2-00
00VD-2002
00VD-5000
Temperature sensor PS
adjusting jig
Optics position
adjusting jig
Door switch jig
Thermostat PS
adjusting jig
(upper roller)
Thermostat PS
adjusting jig
(lower roller)
Potential adjusting chart
New pyramid chart
Quantity
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 270/290
8-12
Tool No. Description Shape Remark
00VC-2-00
Order from
DM15XL
Quantity
1
1
1
Drum cover
Blower brush
Meter
R & K Supply Company *
* R & K Supply Company 650 W. Smith Road, #17
Medina, Ohio 44256
Phone: 1-800-362-6780
Fax: 1-800-840-TOOL
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 271/290
INSTALLATION
9-1
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 272/290
9-2
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 273/290
INSTALLATION
9-3
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 274/290
9-4
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 275/290
INSTALLATION
9-5
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 276/290
9-6
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 277/290
INSTALLATION
9-7
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 278/290
9-8
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 279/290
INSTALLATION
9-9
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 280/290
9-10
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 281/290
INSTALLATION
9-11
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 282/290
9-12
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 283/290
10-1
INDEX
Revised 3/99
INDEXSymbols
1000 tray paper feed/conveyance unit (drive) .................. 2-24
1500 tray paper feed/conveyance unit (drive) .................. 2-25
25 mode
25 mode address map .............................................. 7-24ADF mode lead edge erasure ................................... 7-22
ADF frame erasure .................................................... 7-21
ATS ........................................................................... 7-18
Auto button pressed or original placed on ADF ........ 7-18
Automatic reset ......................................................... 7-21
Automatic shut off and automatic pre-heating .......... 7-16
Cancellation of fusing abnormality ............................ 7-21
Copy control/service control mode enable ................ 7-15
Data control function ................................................. 7-15
Double count for 11x17 ............................................. 7-18
ECM .......................................................................... 7-15
Erasure outside of the original .................................. 7-17
Erasure of the outside of the original automatically .......................................................... 7-17
Finisher initial mode ................................................. 7-21
FS-102/103 overload control select .......................... 7-20
FS-103 original count over control ............................ 7-19
FS-103 sub-tray select (printer) ................................ 7-19
Fusing control during automatic shut-off ................... 7-16
Intermittent time for running test ............................... 7-21
Jumping selection of the paper size.......................... 7-20
Key counter operation ............................................... 7-22
Master key code ........................................................ 7-22
Message language .................................................... 7-20
Original image shift ................................................... 7-23
Paper size for trays 2, 3 and 4 .................................. 7-19
PM cycle ................................................................... 7-21
Polygon motor low speed rotation timing .................. 7-17
Preliminary rotation of polygon mirror ....................... 7-17
Priority of the paper size ........................................... 7-20
Setting method .......................................................... 7-15
Shut-off time selection in the pre-heat mode ............ 7-16
Switching auto/manual priority .................................. 7-18
Switching the contents of normal/high ...................... 7-22
Switching longitudinal line paper/transverse line
paper ....................................................................... 7-23
Temperature selection in the pre-heat mode ............ 7-16
Toner level detection ................................................. 7-22
35 mode
List of mode 35 .........................................................7-38
Lead Edge Timing Adjustment ................................. 7-37
Setting method ..........................................................7-37
Test patterns of 35 mode ..........................................7-39
36 mode
Alternate method of adjustment: 36 mode, add. 80
7-35
Centering adjustment ...............................................7-33
Lead edge timing adjustment ...................................7-31
Lead-to-trail magnification adjustment .....................7-31
List of mode 36 ......................................................... 7-36
Optical brake amount adjustment............................. 7-33
Original lead edge erasure adjustment .................... 7-32
Paper feeding loop adjustment ................................ 7-30
Running test mode ................................................... 7-29
Setting method.......................................................... 7-29
47 mode
Adjustment mode list (setting method) ........................ 7-5
Adjustment mode list (table) ..................................... 7-12
Charge corona current adjustment ............................. 7-3
Charge grid voltage adjustment ................................. 7-4
Developing bias adjustment ....................................... 7-4
Initial setting ................................................................ 7-5
Input check list ............................................................ 7-7
L detection adjustment ............................................... 7-6
Method of setting the 47 mode ................................... 7-1
Output check list .......................................................... 7-9
Separation (AC) current adjustment ........................... 7-3
Separation (DC) current adjustment ........................... 7-3Setting the 47 mode and multimode........................... 7-1
Telephone number setting ......................................... 7-6
Test pattern density adjustment .................................. 7-5
Transfer current adjustment ........................................ 7-3
A-B
ADF frame erasing ........................................................... 7-21
ADF mode lead edge erasure setting .............................. 7-22
Adjustments
Adjustments when replacing parts .............................. 6-1
Centering adjustment ................................................ 7-33
Charge corona current ............................................... 7-3
Charge grid voltage .................................................... 7-4
Developing bias.......................................................... 7-4
Initial setting ................................................................ 7-5
L detection .................................................................. 7-6
Lead edge timing adjustment ................................... 7-31
When in printer mode (Mode 35 adjustment) .... 7-37
Lead-to-trail magnification ........................................7-31
One-sided ................................................................. 7-57
Optical brake ............................................................. 7-33
Original lead edge erasure adjustment .................... 7-32
Paper feed loop ........................................................ 7-30
Separation (AC) current .............................................. 7-3Separation (DC) current ............................................. 7-3
Telephone number setting ......................................... 7-6
Test pattern density .................................................... 7-5
Transfer current .......................................................... 7-3
Tray tilt ...................................................................... 7-59
Adjustment mode list (setting method) .............................. 7-5
Adjustment mode list (table) ............................................ 7-12
Address map of the 25 mode ........................................... 7-24
ADU paper exit/conveyance drive unit ............................ 2-22
ADU paper exit/conveyance section ............................. 2-111
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 284/290
10-2Revised 3/99
Composition ........................................................... 2-111
Disassembly and reassembly ................................ 2-112
M152 (ADU cooling fan) control ............................. 2-113
Mechanisms ........................................................... 2-111
Selector guide ........................................................ 2-112
ADU paper feed/conveyance drive unit ........................... 2-23
ADU paper feed/conveyance section ............................ 2-114
ADU mis-centering control ..................................... 2-119
Composition ........................................................... 2-114
Conveyance control ................................................ 2-118
Disassembly and reassembly ................................ 2-116
Mechanisms ........................................................... 2-114
Paper feed/reversal control .................................... 2-116
ADU timing chart ................................................................ 4-2
AES control ...................................................................... 2-46
Alternate method of adjustment: 36 mode, add. 80 ......... 7-35
APS control ...................................................................... 2-44
ATS selection ................................................................... 7-18
Auto button pressed or original placed on ADF .............. 7-18
Automatic reset setting ..................................................... 7-21
Automatic shut off and automatic pre-heating setting ..... 7-16
C
CCD unit ........................................................................... 2-34
Cancellation of fusing abnormality ................................... 7-21
Center cross section ........................................................ 2-18
Centering adjustment ....................................................... 7-33
Charge control ................................................................. 2-66
Charge corona current adjustment .................................... 7-3
Charge grid voltage adjustment ........................................ 7-4
ClawsFusing (lower) ......................................................... 2-128
Fusing (upper) ......................................................... 2-129
Separation ................................................................. 2-57
Cleaning
Charge corona wires ................................................. 2-61
Polygon mirror ........................................................... 2-49
Transfer and separation ............................................ 2-62
Cleaning/toner recycling unit ............................................ 2-81
Composition .............................................................. 2-81
Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-81
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-81
Cleaning blade ................................................................. 2-81
Connector layout diagram .................................................. 3-4
Cooling fan control ......................................................... 2-135
Composition
ADU paper exit /conveyance section ...................... 2-111
ADU paper feed/conveyance section ...................... 2-114
Cleaning/toner recycling unit ..................................... 2-81
Conveyance section ................................................ 2-120
Corona unit ............................................................... 2-61
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-69
Drive unit .................................................................. 2-29
Drum Unit ................................................................. 2-55
Externals .................................................................. 2-26
Fusing unit ............................................................. 2-123
LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section.................... 2-98
LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section.................. 2-102
LCT paper tray ....................................................... 2-106
Paper feed unit ........................................................ 2-84
Read section ............................................................ 2-33
Toner supply unit ..................................................... 2-78
Write unit .................................................................. 2-47
Connector disconnections list......................................... 5-16
Others ...................................................................... 5-18
Paper jams (J codes) ............................................... 5-16
Warning (E, F, P codes) ........................................... 5-16
Control
ADU mis-centering ..................................................2-119
AES ...........................................................................2-46
APS ...........................................................................2-44
Charge ..................................................................... 2-66
Conveyance .......................................................... 2-118
Cooling fan ............................................................ 2-135
Counter control ...................................................... 2-139
Developing bias ...................................................... 2-73
Dmax/drum jam control ........................................... 2-75
Exposure .................................................................. 2-43
FM14 (conveyance suction) .................................. 2-122
FM30 (developing suction) ...................................... 2-77
Fusing temperature ............................................... 2-133
Gray scale correction ............................................... 2-76
Image write .............................................................. 2-52LCT 1000 tray PF/no paper detection control........ 2-101
LCT 1500 tray PF/no paper detection control........ 2-104
LCT tray up/down control....................................... 2-110
M1 (main) ................................................................. 2-31
M3 (developing drive ) ............................................. 2-72
M4 (drum) ................................................................ 2-32
M5 (polygon) ............................................................ 2-51
M7 (charge wire cleaning) ....................................... 2-67
M8 (transfer/separation cleaning) ........................... 2-68
M12 (optics drive) .................................................... 2-39
M35 (agitator screw) ................................................ 2-73
M152 (ADU cooling fan) ........................................ 2-113Operation panel control ......................................... 2-137
Option control ........................................................ 2-140
Original read ............................................................ 2-44
No paper detection .................................................. 2-97
Paper feed ............................................................... 2-93
Paper feed/reversal ............................................... 2-116
Paper guide plate .................................................... 2-60
Paper size detection ................................................ 2-96
Paper up/down control ............................................ 2-95
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 285/290
10-3
INDEX
Revised 3/99
PCL/PSL ................................................................... 2-59
Separation claw ........................................................ 2-59
Toner density ............................................................ 2-74
Toner level detection ................................................ 2-80
Transfer/separation .................................................. 2-66
Control board circuit diagram .......................................... 3-23
Conveyance control ....................................................... 2-118
Conveyance belt ............................................................ 2-121
Conveyance section ...................................................... 2-120
Composition ........................................................... 2-120
Disassembly and reassembly ................................ 2-121
FM14 (conveyance suction) control ....................... 2-122
Mechanism ............................................................. 2-120
Conveyance suction motor (FM14) ............................... 2-122
Copy control/service control mode enable ...................... 7-15
Corona unit ...................................................................... 2-61
Charge control .......................................................... 2-66
Composition ............................................................. 2-61
Disassembly and reassembly .................................. 2-62M7 (charge wire cleaning) control ............................ 2-67
M8 (transfer/separation cleaning) control................. 2-68
Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-61
Transfer/separation control ....................................... 2-66
Corona wires
Charge ............................................................. 2-61, 2-64
Transfer and separation ................................... 2-62, 2-65
Counter control ............................................................... 2-139
D
Data control function selection ......................................... 7-15DC driver board circuit diagram ....................................... 3-38
Developer ......................................................................... 2-70
Developing bias adjustment ............................................... 7-4
Developing bias control .................................................... 2-73
Developing drive unit ....................................................... 2-20
Developing suction filter ................................................... 2-27
Developing unit ................................................................ 2-69
Composition .............................................................. 2-69
Developing bias control ............................................. 2-73
Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-70
Dmax control/drum jam control ................................. 2-75
FM 30 (developing suction) control ........................... 2-77Gray scale correction control .................................... 2-76
M3 (developing drive) control .................................... 2-72
M35 (agitator screw) control ..................................... 2-73
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-69
Toner density control ................................................ 2-74
Diagrams, wiring ................................................................ 3-1
Connector layout ......................................................... 3-4
Control board circuit .................................................. 3-23
DC driver board circuit .............................................. 3-38
Drum board circuit ....................................................3-47
Electrical parts layout ................................................. 3-1
Operation board/1 circuit ..........................................3-35
Operation board/2 circuit ..........................................3-36
Operation board/3 circuit ..........................................3-37
Overall wiring .............................................................. 3-7
Toner control sensor board circuit ............................ 3-45
Transfer paper detecting board circuit......................3-46
Transfer paper LED board circuit ............................. 3-47
Disassembly and Reassembly
ADU paper exit/conveyance section ....................... 2-112
ADU paper feed/conveyance section...................... 2-116
Cleaning/toner recycling unit..................................... 2-81
Conveyance section................................................ 2-121
Corona units .............................................................. 2-62
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-70
Drive unit ................................................................... 2-29
Drum unit .................................................................. 2-56
Externals ................................................................... 2-26LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section ..................... 2-99
LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section ................... 2-103
LCT paper tray ........................................................ 2-107
Paper feed unit .......................................................... 2-86
Read section ............................................................. 2-33
Toner supply unit ...................................................... 2-79
Write unit ................................................................... 2-48
Dmax control .................................................................... 2-75
Double count for 11x17 .................................................... 7-18
Drive system diagrams ..................................................... 2-19
1000 tray paper feed/conveyance unit ...................... 2-24
1500 tray paper feed/conveyance unit ...................... 2-25ADU paper exit/conveyance drive unit ...................... 2-22
ADU paper feed/conveyance drive unit .................... 2-23
Drum/developing drive unit ....................................... 2-20
Main drive ................................................................. 2-19
Paper feed drive unit ................................................. 2-21
Drum ................................................................................ 2-57
Drum board circuit diagram.............................................. 3-47
Drum/developing drive unit .............................................. 2-20
Drum unit .......................................................................... 2-55
Composition .............................................................. 2-55
Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-56
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-55
Paper guide plate control .......................................... 2-60
PCL/PSL control ....................................................... 2-59
Separation claw control ............................................. 2-59
Drive unit ......................................................................... 2-29
Composition .............................................................. 2-29
M1 (main) control ...................................................... 2-31
M4 (drum) control ..................................................... 2-32
Mechanisms .............................................................2-29
Dust prevention filter ........................................................ 2-27
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 286/290
10-4Revised 3/99
E
ECM setting ......................................................................7-15
Electrical parts layout ......................................................... 3-1
Electronic RDH ................................................................. 2-50
Erasure outside of the original selection .......................... 7-17
Erasure of the outside of the original automatically
selection ......................................................................... 7-17
Exit/conveyance drive unit, ADU paper............................ 2-22
Exposure control .............................................................. 2-43
Exposure lamp ................................................................. 2-35
Exposure unit ................................................................... 2-36
Externals ......................................................................... 2-26
Composition .............................................................. 2-26
Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-26
F
Feed/conveyance drive unit, ADU paper ......................... 2-23
Finisher initial mode setting.............................................. 7-21
Filters
Developing suction .................................................... 2-27
Dust prevention ......................................................... 2-27
Ozone (H) ................................................................. 2-27
Ozone (S) .................................................................. 2-26
FM14 (conveyance suction) control ............................... 2-122
FM30 (developing suction) control ................................... 2-77
Front edge of the original adjustment (erasing) ............... 7-32
FS-102/103 overload control select.................................7-20
FS-103/103A paper jam code cross-reference table ........ 5-7
FS-103 original count over control ..................................7-19
FS-103 sub-tray select (printer) .......................................7-19
Fusing application roller ...............................................2-126
Fusing claws (lower) ......................................................2-128
Fusing claws (upper) .....................................................2-129
Fusing cleaning roller ....................................................2-126
Fusing control during automatic shut-off selection ..........7-16
Fusing heater lamp (lower)............................................2-125
Fusing heater lamp (upper) ...........................................2-124
Fusing input gear .............................................................2-30
Fusing roller (lower) .......................................................2-127
Fusing roller (upper) ......................................................2-127
Fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 ............................. 2-129
Fusing unit ..................................................................... 2-123
Composition ...........................................................2-123
Disassembly and reassembly ................................2-124
Fusing temperature control..................................... 2-133
Mechanisms ...........................................................2-123
G-H
Gray scale correction control ...........................................2-76
I
Image formation ............................................................... 2-10
Charging ................................................................... 2-10
Cleaning .................................................................... 2-11
Developing ................................................................ 2-10
PCL ........................................................................... 2-11
Separation ................................................................. 2-11
Transfer ..................................................................... 2-10
Exposure ................................................................... 2-10
Image processing ............................................................... 2-3
A/D conversion ............................................................ 2-3
AES processing .......................................................... 2-4
Analog processing ...................................................... 2-3
Brightness/density conversion .................................... 2-4
Copy γ correction ........................................................ 2-6
Error diffussion processing ......................................... 2-6
Image compression processing .................................. 2-6
Magnification processing ............................................ 2-5Memory ....................................................................... 2-6
Outline ......................................................................... 2-3
Reversal processing .................................................. 2-6
SGU selector ............................................................... 2-6
Shading correction ...................................................... 2-3
Text/halftone identification .......................................... 2-4
Two-beam control ....................................................... 2-6
Write density control ................................................... 2-6
Image read mechanism ...................................................... 2-2
Outline ......................................................................... 2-2
Image write ......................................................................... 2-7
Beam combining prism ............................................... 2-8Collimator lens ............................................................ 2-8
Compression prism ..................................................... 2-8
Cylindrical lenses ........................................................ 2-9
fθ lens ......................................................................... 2-8
Fine adjustment prism................................................. 2-8
Index sensor ............................................................... 2-9
Outline ......................................................................... 2-7
Polygon mirror ............................................................. 2-8
Image write control ........................................................... 2-52
Initial setting ....................................................................... 7-5
Input check list ................................................................... 7-7
Installation .......................................................................... 9-1Accessories ................................................................. 9-2
Confirmation of operation.......................................... 9-12
Installation procedure.................................................. 9-3
L detection adjustment ................................................ 9-8
Paper size setting ....................................................... 9-9
Site requirements ........................................................ 9-1
Unpacking ..................................................................9-1
Intermittent time for running test.......................................7-21
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 287/290
10-5
INDEX
Revised 3/99
J
Jam list ............................................................................... 5-1
Paper jam (J codes) .................................................... 5-1
Trouble (E, F codes) ................................................. 5-10
Warning (P codes) ...................................................... 5-8
Jumping selection of the paper size ................................. 7-20
K
Key counter operation selection ...................................... 7-22
L
L detection adjustment ....................................................... 7-6
Lamps
Exposure ................................................................... 2-35
Fusing lamp (lower) ................................................ 2-125
Fusing lamp (upper) ................................................ 2-124PCL ........................................................................... 2-58
LCT 1000 tray paper feed/conveyance section................ 2-98
Composition .............................................................. 2-98
Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-99
LCT 1000 tray PF/no paper detection control ......... 2-101
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-98
LCT 1500 tray paper feed/conveyance section.............. 2-102
Composition ............................................................ 2-102
Disassembly and reassembly ................................. 2-103
LCT 1500 tray PF/no paper detection control ......... 2-104
Mechanisms ............................................................ 2-102
LCT paper tray ............................................................... 2-106Composition ............................................................ 2-106
Disassembly and reassembly ................................. 2-107
Mechanisms ............................................................ 2-106
Tray up/down control .............................................. 2-110
Lead edge timing adjustment .......................................... 7-31
When in printer mode (35 mode adjustment) ...........7-37
Lead-to-trail magnification adjustment ............................ 7-31
List of 35 mode ................................................................7-38
List of 36 mode ................................................................7-36
List of connector disconnections ..................................... 5-16
Others ....................................................................... 5-18
Paper jams (j codes) .................................................5-16Warning (E, F, P codes) ............................................ 5-16
M
M1 (main) control .............................................................2-31
M3 (developing drive) control .......................................... 2-72
M4 (drum) control .............................................................2-32
M5 (polygon) control ........................................................2-51
M7 (charge wire cleaning) control ...................................2-67
M8 (transfer/separation wire cleaning) control ................ 2-68
M12 (optics drive) control ................................................ 2-39
M35 (agitator screw) control ............................................2-73
M152 (ADU cooling fan) control ....................................2-113
Main body timing chart .......................................................4-1
Main drive ........................................................................ 2-19
Main motor unit ................................................................ 2-29
Maintenance ......................................................................8-1
Maintenance items ..................................................... 8-2
Periodic checks .......................................................... 8-7
Service materials ......................................................8-10
Service schedule ........................................................ 8-1
Special tools list ........................................................ 8-11
Master key code setting ................................................... 7-22
Mechanisms
ADU paper exit/conveyance section ....................... 2-111
ADU paper feed/conveyance section...................... 2-114
Cleaning/toner recycling unit..................................... 2-81
Conveyance section................................................ 2-120Corona unit ............................................................... 2-61
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-69
Drive unit ................................................................... 2-29
Drum unit .................................................................. 2-55
Fusing unit .............................................................. 2-123
LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section ..................... 2-98
LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section ................... 2-102
LCT paper tray ........................................................ 2-106
Paper feed unit .......................................................... 2-84
Read section ............................................................. 2-33
Toner supply unit ...................................................... 2-78
Write unit ................................................................... 2-47Message language selection ........................................... 7-20
Motors
Conveyance suction (FM14) ................................... 2-122
Main unit (M1) ........................................................... 2-29
N
No paper detection control .............................................. 2-97
NVRAM, Initializing the ...................................................... 7-2
O
Oil pad .........................................................................2-126
One-sided adjustment .....................................................7-57
Operation board/1 circuit diagram ...................................3-35
Operation board/2 circuit diagram ...................................3-36
Operation board/3 circuit diagram ...................................3-37
Operation panel control .................................................2-137
Operation section ............................................. See chapter 1
Optical brake adjustment .................................................7-33
Optics wire ....................................................................... 2-37
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 288/290
10-6Revised 3/99
Option control .................................................................2-140
Original image shift setting ............................................. 7-23
Original lead edge erasure adjustment ..........................7-32
Original read control ........................................................ 2-44
Outline and composition ................................................... 2-1
Output checklist .................................................................7-9
Overall wiring diagram .......................................................3-7
Ozone filter (H) .................................................................2-27
Ozone filter (S) .................................................................2-26
P-Q
P function, setting and checking with ................................. 6-3
Confirmation items by means of the P function........... 6-3
Density shift ................................................................ 6-4
Drum count and resetting............................................ 6-4
Functions to control data ............................................ 6-5
PM count and resetting ............................................... 6-3
Service Data Control Operation Mode Access ........... 6-4
Paper exit/conveyance drive unit, ADU ............................ 2-22
Paper feed control ...........................................................2-93
Paper feed/conveyance drive unit, ADU...........................2-23
Paper feed/conveyance unit, 1000 tray ............................ 2-24
Paper feed/conveyance unit, 1500 tray ............................ 2-25
Paper feed drive shaft ......................................................2-30
Paper feed drive unit ........................................................ 2-21
Paper feed loop adjustment ............................................ 7-30
Paper feed/reversal control ...........................................2-116
Paper feed unit ................................................................2-84
Composition ............................................................. 2-84
Disassembly and reassembly .................................2-86Mechanisms ............................................................. 2-84
No paper detection control ....................................... 2-97
Paper feed control ....................................................2-93
Paper size detection control .....................................2-96
Paper up/down control ............................................. 2-95
Paper guide plate control ................................................2-60
Paper size detection control ............................................2-96
Paper size setting for trays 2, 3 and 4 ............................. 7-19
Paper up/down control .....................................................2-95
Parts that operate when the main switch is OFF ..........2-134
Parts that operate when the main switch is ON............2-134
PCL ...........................................................................2-58PCL/PSL control ..............................................................2-59
Periodic checks ................................................................. 8-7
PM cycle setting ............................................................... 7-21
Polygon mirror .................................................................2-49
Polygon motor low speed rotation timing ........................7-17
Preliminary rotation of polygon motor selection .............. 7-17
Priority of the paper size ..................................................7-20
Product specifications ..................................................... 2-16
RRead section ................................................................... 2-33
AES control ...............................................................2-46
APS control ...............................................................2-44
Composition .............................................................2-33
Disassembly and reassembly .................................2-33
Exposure control .......................................................2-43
M12 (optics drive) control .......................................... 2-39
Mechanisms .............................................................2-33
Original read control ................................................. 2-44
Removal/replacement
1000 tray (LCT) ....................................................... 2-107
1500 tray (LCT) ....................................................... 2-107
ADU paper exit conveyance section ....................... 2-112
ADU paper feed/conveyance section...................... 2-116
CCD unit ................................................................... 2-34
Charge corona unit ................................................... 2-62
Charge corona wire ................................................... 2-64
Cleaning blade .......................................................... 2-81Conveyance belt ..................................................... 2-121
Conveyance suction motor (FM14) ......................... 2-122
Conveyance unit ..................................................... 2-121
Developer .................................................................. 2-70
Developing suction filter ............................................ 2-27
Developing unit ......................................................... 2-70
Drum ......................................................................... 2-57
Drum unit .................................................................. 2-56
Dust prevention ......................................................... 2-27
Electronic RDH ......................................................... 2-50
Exposure lamp .......................................................... 2-35
Exposure unit ............................................................ 2-36Fusing application roller .......................................... 2-126
Fusing cleaning roller .............................................. 2-126
Fusing claws (lower) ............................................... 2-128
Fusing claws (upper) ............................................... 2-129
Fusing lamp (lower) ................................................ 2-125
Fusing lamp (upper) ................................................ 2-124
Fusing rollers (upper and lower) ............................. 2-127
Fusing unit .............................................................. 2-124
Fusing temperature sensors 1 and 2 ...................... 2-129
Fusing input gear ...................................................... 2-30
LCT 1000 tray PF/conveyance section ..................... 2-99
LCT 1500 tray PF/conveyance section ................... 2-103
Main motor unit ......................................................... 2-29
Oil pad ..................................................................... 2-126
Optics wire ................................................................ 2-37
Ozone filter (H) ..........................................................2-27
Ozone filter (S) ..........................................................2-26
Paper feed drive shaft ...............................................2-30
Paper feed unit ......................................................... 2-86
Paper feed unit (second) .......................................... 2-91
PCL ...........................................................................2-58
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 289/290
10-7
INDEX
Revised 3/99
Separation claws ...................................................... 2-57
Separation claw solenoid press-fit assembly .........2-58
Thermostat (lower) .................................................2-131
Thermostat (upper) ................................................2-130
Toner control board unit ...........................................2-71
Toner supply unit ...................................................... 2-79
Transfer and separation corona unit ........................2-62
Transfer and separation wires .................................2-65
Write unit ...................................................................2-48
Rollers, fusing (upper and lower) .................................2-127
Running test mode ..........................................................7-29
S
Selector guide (ADU paper exit conveyance section)... 2-112
Separation claw control .................................................... 2-59
Separation claws .............................................................. 2-57
Separation claw solenoid press-fit asssembly ................. 2-58
Separation (AC) current adjustment ................................... 7-3Separation (DC) current adjustment .................................. 7-3
Service materials .............................................................. 8-10
Service schedule ................................................................ 8-1
Setting the 25 mode ......................................................... 7-15
Setting the 35 mode ......................................................... 7-37
Setting the 36 mode ......................................................... 7-29
Setting the 47 mode and multimode .................................. 7-1
Shut-off time selection in the pre-heat mode ................... 7-16
Space requirements ......................................................... 2-15
Special tools list ............................................................... 8-11
Specifications ................................................................... 2-16
Switching auto/manual priority ......................................... 7-18
Switching the contents of normal/high ............................. 7-22
Switching longitudinal line paper/transverse line
paper .............................................................................. 7-23
System configuration ........................................................ 2-13
T-U-V
Telephone number setting ................................................. 7-6
Temperature selection in the pre-heat mode ................... 7-16
Temperature sensors 1 and 2, fusing ............................ 2-129
Test pattern density adjustment ......................................... 7-5
Test patterns of 35 mode ................................................. 7-39
Adjustment of gradation (LD1) (35-80, P+6) ............. 7-55Adjustment of gradation (LD2) (35-80, P+7) ............. 7-56
ADU for centering (35-80, P+2) ................................ 7-51
Beam misalignment check (35-11)...........................7-43
Copy γ gate array built-in pattern (35-32) .................7-47
Electronic RDH GA built-in pattern (35-37) ..............7-49
Front edge timing (printer) (35-80, P+3) ...................7-52
Gray scale pattern (35-02) ........................................7-40
Gray scale pattern (35-03) ........................................7-41
Gray scale pattern (35-05) ........................................7-42
Horizontal magnification (main drive speed
adjustment ) (35-80, P+4) ....................................... 7-53
Linearity evaluation pattern (35-16) .........................7-44
Overall halftone (35-01)............................................ 7-39
Process overall halftone (35-60) ..............................7-45
Read gate array built-in pattern (35-30) ................... 7-46
Write gate array built-in pattern (35-36) ...................7-48
Writing unit for centering (35-80, P+1)......................7-50
Main scanning sub-scanning alignment(35-80, P+5) ............................................................ 7-54
Thermostat (lower) ......................................................... 2-131
Thermostat (upper) ........................................................ 2-130
Timing charts
ADU ............................................................................ 4-2
Main body ................................................................... 4-1
Toner control board unit ................................................... 2-71
Toner control sensor board circuit .................................... 3-45
Toner density control ........................................................ 2-74
Toner level detection control ............................................ 2-80
Toner level detection selection ........................................ 7-22
Toner supply unit .............................................................. 2-78Composition .............................................................. 2-78
Disassembly and reassembly ................................... 2-79
Mechanisms .............................................................. 2-78
Toner level detection control ..................................... 2-80
Transfer current adjustment ............................................... 7-3
Transfer paper LED board circuit diagram ......................3-47
Transfer paper detecting board circuit diagram .............. 3-46
Transfer/separation control .............................................. 2-66
Transfer/separation corona maintenance ....................... 2-65
Tray paper feed conveyance unit, 1000 ..........................2-24
Tray paper feed conveyance unit, 1500 ..........................2-25
Tray tilt adjustment ........................................................... 7-59
Tray up/down control .....................................................2-110
W-X-Y-Z
Wiring diagrams ................................................................. 3-1
Connector layout ......................................................... 3-4
Control board circuit .................................................. 3-23
DC driver board circuit .............................................. 3-38
Drum board circuit ..................................................... 3-47
Electrical parts layout .................................................. 3-1
Operation board/1 circuit........................................... 3-35
Operation board/2 circuit........................................... 3-36
Operation board/3 circuit........................................... 3-37
Overall wiring .............................................................. 3-7
Toner control sensor board circuit ............................3-45
Transfer paper detecting board circuit ......................3-46
Transfer paper LED board circuit ............................. 3-47
Wiring diagram, overall ......................................................3-7
Write unit .......................................................................... 2-47
Composition .............................................................2-47
8/19/2019 Konica Minolta 7050 Service Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/konica-minolta-7050-service-manual 290/290
Disassembly and reassembly ..................................2-48
I i l 2 52